WO2015001873A1 - Colored curable composition, cured film using same, color filter, production method for color filter, solid state imaging element, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device - Google Patents

Colored curable composition, cured film using same, color filter, production method for color filter, solid state imaging element, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015001873A1
WO2015001873A1 PCT/JP2014/064045 JP2014064045W WO2015001873A1 WO 2015001873 A1 WO2015001873 A1 WO 2015001873A1 JP 2014064045 W JP2014064045 W JP 2014064045W WO 2015001873 A1 WO2015001873 A1 WO 2015001873A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
general formula
substituent
represented
carbon atoms
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/064045
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
陽祐 村上
貴規 田口
賢 鮫島
渡邉 哲也
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to KR1020157032296A priority Critical patent/KR101780993B1/en
Publication of WO2015001873A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015001873A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/201Filters in the form of arrays
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/0008Organic ingredients according to more than one of the "one dot" groups of C08K5/01 - C08K5/59
    • C08K5/0041Optical brightening agents, organic pigments
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/0091Complexes with metal-heteroatom-bonds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B47/00Porphines; Azaporphines
    • C09B47/04Phthalocyanines abbreviation: Pc
    • C09B47/06Preparation from carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof, e.g. anhydrides, amides, mononitriles, phthalimide, o-cyanobenzamide
    • C09B47/067Preparation from carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof, e.g. anhydrides, amides, mononitriles, phthalimide, o-cyanobenzamide from phthalodinitriles naphthalenedinitriles, aromatic dinitriles prepared in situ, hydrogenated phthalodinitrile
    • C09B47/0675Preparation from carboxylic acids or derivatives thereof, e.g. anhydrides, amides, mononitriles, phthalimide, o-cyanobenzamide from phthalodinitriles naphthalenedinitriles, aromatic dinitriles prepared in situ, hydrogenated phthalodinitrile having oxygen or sulfur linked directly to the skeleton
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B69/00Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
    • C09B69/10Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
    • C09B69/108Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds containing a phthalocyanine dye
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B13/00Optical objectives specially designed for the purposes specified below
    • G02B13/001Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras
    • G02B13/0085Miniaturised objectives for electronic devices, e.g. portable telephones, webcams, PDAs, small digital cameras employing wafer level optics
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/0005Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
    • G03F7/0007Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/105Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L63/00Compositions of epoxy resins; Compositions of derivatives of epoxy resins

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a colored curable composition, a cured film using the same, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, a liquid crystal display device, and an organic EL display device.
  • the color filter is an indispensable component for the display of a solid-state image sensor or a liquid crystal display device.
  • a colored curable composition is employed (for example, Patent Documents 1 to 7).
  • the present invention solves this problem, and is a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matters, and particularly capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matters even when thinned.
  • An object is to provide a curable composition.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine dye 2 has a smaller particle diameter than the halogenated phthalocyanine pigment 4. Therefore, the interparticle steric repulsion when the halogenated phthalocyanine dye 2 and the radical trapping agent 3 interact with each other is more effective when the halogenated phthalocyanine pigment 4 and the radical trapping agent 3 interact with each other. It is considered to be larger than Noh. As a result, the cohesive force change after the interaction between the halogenated phthalocyanine dye 2 and the radical trapping agent 3 appears more remarkably as compared with the case where the halogenated phthalocyanine pigment 4 is used, and the generation of minute foreign matters is further increased.
  • a colored curable composition comprising a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them.
  • the radical trapping agent contains at least one compound containing at least one ring structure.
  • the radical trapping agent includes at least one selected from a hindered amine compound, an ultraviolet absorber, and a thermal polymerization inhibitor.
  • halogenated phthalocyanine dye is represented by the following general formula (1);
  • Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom or a substituent, At least one of the substituents is a halogen atom; At least one other substituent is an aromatic group, a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), or a group represented by the following formula (2A).
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are A group represented by the following general formula (1-2); A group represented by the general formula (1-4), a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), and a group represented by the following formula (2A).
  • a group containing at least one functional group selected from a group, an amino group, and a thiol group which represents at least one selected from:
  • General formula (1-2) In general formula (1-2), X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent.
  • General formula (1-4) In general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ′′ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are It represents a group represented by the following general formula (1-2) or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4), and at least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-2)
  • X is an oxygen
  • R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • R ′′ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms
  • n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • halogenated phthalocyanine dye is represented by the following general formula (1-1):
  • General formula (1-1) In the general formula (1-1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2), or a group represented by the following general formula (1-3).
  • 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 represent a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2) or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4), At least one is a halogen atom, and at least one is a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2); M represents two hydrogen atoms, a metal atom, a metal oxide or a metal halide; general formula (1-1-2)
  • X 1 is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
  • a 11 is a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents R, or a naphthyl group having 1 to 7 substituents R.
  • substituent R is represented by any one of the following general formulas (4) to (6): a nitro group, COOR 1 , OR 2 , a halogen atom, an aryl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • R 1 is a group represented by the following general formula (1-3) or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms
  • R 2 Is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 is an alkyl group that may have a substituent or an aryl that may have a substituent. And when d is 2, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • R 6 and R 7 are each an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, An arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent;
  • R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms; n1 represents an integer of 1 to 3; when n1 is 2 or 3, the plurality of R 11 may be the same or different; Y 1 represents —O—, —S—, —NR 13 —, —SO 2 —, or —C ( ⁇ O) —.
  • R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R 12 represents a monovalent substituent.
  • General formula (1-3) In the general formula (1-3), R 3 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R 4 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 1 to 4; 1-4) In general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ′′ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • ⁇ 8> 1 to 4 of Z 1 to Z 16 are a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), or a group represented by the following formula (2A).
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • ⁇ 9> The colored curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8>, wherein the colorant further contains a yellow pigment.
  • the thermosetting compound has two or more epoxy groups in one molecule.
  • the total content of the colorant is 60 to 90% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored curable composition.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is a multimer.
  • ⁇ 13> A cured film obtained by curing the colored curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12>.
  • ⁇ 14> A color filter having a colored layer using the colored curable composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 12>.
  • ⁇ 15> The color filter according to ⁇ 14>, wherein the colored layer has a thickness of 0.1 to 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • ⁇ 16> a step of curing a colored curable composition containing a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them to form a colored layer; Forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer; A step of patterning a photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of dry etching a colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask, A method for producing a color filter, comprising: ⁇ 17> A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence device or a solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to ⁇ 14> or ⁇ 15>. ⁇ 18> A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence element, or a solid-state imaging element having a color filter manufactured by the method for manufacturing a color filter according to ⁇ 16>.
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matter, and particularly a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matter even when thinned. It has become possible.
  • the contents of the present invention will be described in detail.
  • “to” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • the notation which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes what has a substituent with what does not have a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • (meth) acrylate represents acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth) acryl represents acryl and methacryl
  • (meth) acryloyl represents acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • Cold layer means a pixel used in a color filter.
  • “Dye” means a coloring compound that is soluble in a specific solvent.
  • the specific solvent includes, for example, an organic solvent exemplified in the column of a solvent that dissolves at least a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye described later, a thermosetting compound, and a radical trapping agent.
  • the pigment compound which dissolves in at least one of these solvents corresponds to the dye in the present invention.
  • a solvent for dissolving a colorant, a thermosetting compound and a radical trapping agent containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye refers to, for example, a solvent for a colorant, a thermosetting compound and a radical trapping agent containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye at 23 ° C.
  • the solubility is 1% by mass or more, preferably 1% to 90% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass, and still more preferably 10 to 50% by mass.
  • the colored curable composition the color filter and the manufacturing method thereof, the solid-state imaging device, the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device of the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
  • the colored curable composition of the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the composition of the present invention”) comprises a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them. Including. According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matter, and particularly a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matter even when thinned. it can. Thereby, the yield at the time of manufacturing a color filter can be improved.
  • a halogenated phthalocyanine dye instead of a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment as a colorant, the luminance difference (distribution) in a fine area region due to the pigment particle size is reduced, and stable spectral performance can be maintained. it can.
  • a halogenated phthalocyanine dye is essential and may contain other colorants, and preferably contains other colorants.
  • the total amount of the colorant is preferably 65 to 85% by mass, more preferably 70 to 80% by mass with respect to the total solid content. According to the composition of the present invention, even when the content of the colorant with respect to the total solid content of the composition is increased, it is possible to form a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matters, and thus the color filter can be thinned.
  • a halogenated phthalocyanine dye may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used together 2 or more types.
  • the composition of the present invention comprises a halogenated phthalocyanine dye.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine dye refers to a compound having a phthalocyanine skeleton and having one or more halogen atoms as a substituent. In the present invention, it is preferable to have 4 to 15 halogen atoms in one molecule, more preferably 6 to 14, more preferably 8 to 14. Examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, or a bromine atom is preferable, a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom is more preferable, and a chlorine atom is further preferable.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention is usually a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the region of 600 to 800 nm, and preferably having a maximum absorption wavelength in the region of 630 to 750 nm.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (1).
  • General formula (1) (In the general formula (1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom or a substituent, at least one of the substituents is a halogen atom, and at least one of the other substituents is aromatic.
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom.
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 are bonded to each other. And may form a ring.
  • Z 1 , Z 4 , Z 5 , Z 8 , Z 9 , Z 12 , Z 13 and Z 16 represent substituents substituted at eight ⁇ positions of the phthalocyanine nucleus. Therefore, these substituents are also referred to as ⁇ -position substituents.
  • Z 2 , Z 3 , Z 6 , Z 7 , Z 10 , Z 11 , Z 14 and Z 15 in the general formula (1) are substituents substituted at eight ⁇ -positions of the phthalocyanine nucleus. These substituents are also referred to as ⁇ -position substituents.
  • any of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) preferably contains a multimeric structure.
  • carboxyl group epoxy group, aryl ester group, tertiary alkyl ester group, group represented by the above formula (1A), group represented by the above formula (2A), amino group and thiol group
  • group, epoxy group, aryl ester group, tertiary alkyl ester group, group represented by the above formula (1A), group represented by the above formula (2A), amino group and thiol group are preferable, carboxyl group, epoxy group .
  • An aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the above formula (1A), and a group represented by the above formula (2A) are more preferable, a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, and the above formula.
  • the group represented by (2A) is more preferable.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention usually contains the above functional group at the terminal portion of the structure.
  • the effects of the present invention can be achieved more effectively.
  • aryl ester group examples include a substituted or unsubstituted aryl ester group and a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl ester group.
  • the aryl group contained in the aryl ester group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
  • the heteroaryl group contained in the aryl ester group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
  • the heteroaryl group is a single ring or a condensed ring, preferably a single ring or a condensed ring in which 2 to 8 rings are condensed, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring in which 2 to 4 rings are condensed, A monocycle is more preferred.
  • the substituent of the aryl ester group is preferably an electron withdrawing group, for example, a nitro group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, a carboxyl group, a ketone group, an acyloxy group, a hydroxy group, a perfluoroalkyl group, an alkylsulfone group, an ethoxy group.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an electron-withdrawing group
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 3.
  • the electron-withdrawing group include the above-described electron-withdrawing group, and a nitro group and a perfluoroalkyl group (particularly, a trifluoromethyl group) are preferable.
  • the substitution position of R may be any of the ortho-position, meta-position and para-position, but the para-position is preferred.
  • n is preferably 0 or 1.
  • the tertiary alkyl ester group includes a substituted or unsubstituted tertiary alkyl ester group.
  • Examples of the tertiary alkyl group in the tertiary alkyl ester group include a t-butyl group, a t-pentyl group, a t-hexyl group, and the like, and a t-butyl group and a t-pentyl group are particularly preferable.
  • the group represented by the above formula (1A) represents an alkyl group in which R 1 has a fluorine atom in the above formula (1A).
  • the alkyl group having a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having 2 or more fluorine atoms and a fluorine atom having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be linear, branched or cyclic, A linear or branched one is preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group having a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and particularly preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group having a fluorine atom preferably has a terminal structure of (—CF 3 ).
  • the alkyl group having a fluorine atom preferably has a fluorine atom substitution rate of 40 to 100%, more preferably 50 to 100%.
  • the substitution rate of fluorine atoms refers to the ratio (%) in which hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms in alkyl groups having fluorine atoms.
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 are bonded to each other to form a ring. May be.
  • R 2 and R 3 each independently may be a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and are linear, branched, and R 2 and R 3 are It may be any one of the rings bonded to each other.
  • a linear or cyclic C3-C5 unsubstituted alkyl group in which R 2 and R 3 are bonded to each other is preferable.
  • each of R 2 and R 3 preferably independently has 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and has 1 to 4 carbon atoms. More preferably.
  • R 2 and R 3 are each independently a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, or 4 carbon atoms in which R 2 and R 3 are bonded to each other.
  • a cyclic alkyl group of 6 to 6 is preferred.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention has the above-described functional group, but this functional group may be directly bonded to the phthalocyanine skeleton of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye, or may be bonded through any linking group. It may be.
  • the form which the hydrogen atom of the substituent of the substituent T group mentioned later is substituted is mentioned.
  • Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom or a substituent, at least one of the substituents is a halogen atom, and at least one of the other substituents is an aromatic group. Is a group containing It is preferable to have 5 to 15 halogen atoms in one molecule, and more preferable to have 6 to 14 halogen atoms.
  • a halogen atom a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, or a bromine atom is preferable, a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom is more preferable, and a chlorine atom is further more preferable.
  • the aromatic group in the group containing an aromatic group is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.
  • the number of groups having an aromatic group is preferably 1 to 11 per molecule, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 2 to 7.
  • Z 1 to Z 16 are all groups other than halogen atoms having an aromatic group.
  • the substituent is not particularly defined as long as the phthalocyanine compound does not lose its function as a dye, and examples thereof include substituent T described later.
  • 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are a group represented by the following general formula (1-2), a group represented by the general formula (1-4), a carboxyl group At least one functional group selected from a group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the above formula (1A), a group represented by the above formula (2A), an amino group, and a thiol group It is preferable to represent at least one selected from a group containing a group.
  • 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are represented by (i) a group represented by the following general formula (1-2) or a general formula (1-4).
  • At least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-2), or (ii) a group represented by the following general formula (1-2), and a carboxyl group, At least one functional group selected from an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), a group represented by the following formula (2A), an amino group, and a thiol group It preferably represents a containing group.
  • at least one of Z 1 to Z 16 represents the general formula (1-2). And, more preferably, 2 to 6 of Z 1 to Z 16 are represented by the group represented by the general formula (1-2) or the general formula (1-4). And at least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-2).
  • Formula (1-2) (In the general formula (1-2), X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. is there.)
  • General formula (1-4) (In the general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ′′ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4)
  • X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and preferably an oxygen atom.
  • a 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent, and is a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents or 1 to 7 substituents. And a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents is more preferable.
  • the group represented by the general formula (1-2) is more preferably a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2).
  • Formula (1-1-2) (In the general formula (1-1-2), X 1 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 11 represents a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents R, or a naphthyl having 1 to 7 substituents R.
  • the substituent R is a nitro group, COOR 1 (R 1 is a group represented by the general formula (1-3) or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), OR 2 (R 2 is carbon An alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, an aryl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a group represented by any one of the general formulas (4) to (6), or a general formula ( Represents a group selected from X).) (In the general formula (4), R 4 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 is an alkyl group that may have a substituent or an aryl that may have a substituent. And when d is 2, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • R 6 and R 7 are each an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, The arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, the alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, and the arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent are represented.
  • Formula (X) (In the general formula (X), R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. N1 represents an integer of 1 to 3.
  • a plurality of R 11 are each Y 1 may be —O—, —S—, —NR 13 — (R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms), —SO 2 —, or And —C ( ⁇ O) —, R 12 represents a monovalent substituent.)
  • X 1 is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, preferably an oxygen atom.
  • a 11 is a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents or a naphthyl group having 1 to 7 substituents, and more preferably a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents.
  • the number of substituents of the phenyl group is an integer of 1 to 5, but more preferably an integer of 1 to 3 from the viewpoint of the Gram extinction coefficient.
  • the number of substituents is 1 to 5 Any integer of is preferred.
  • the number of substituents of the naphthyl group is an integer of 1 to 7, but from the viewpoint of the gram extinction coefficient (absorbance per gram), it is preferably an integer of 1 to 5, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3. 1 or 2 is more preferable.
  • the bonding position between the naphthyl group and X 1 is not particularly limited, and may be any of the following 1-position (1-naphthyl group) or 2-position (2-naphthyl group).
  • the bonding position of the substituent to the naphthalene ring is not particularly limited.
  • the bonding position of the naphthyl group and X 1 is the 1-position (1-naphthyl group)
  • the bonding position of the substituent to the naphthalene ring is the 2-position, 3-position, 4-position, 5-position, 6
  • the 2nd and 3rd positions are preferable, and the 2nd position is more preferable.
  • the bonding positions of the substituent to the naphthalene ring are the 1-position, 3-position, 4-position, 5-position, 6-position,
  • the 3rd and 6th positions are preferable, and the 3rd position is more preferable in consideration of heat resistance and solvent solubility.
  • the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is a nitro group, COOR 1 (R 1 is a group represented by the general formula (1-3) or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), OR 2 (R 2 Is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, an aryl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a group represented by any one of the general formulas (4) to (6), or It is a group selected from the formula (X).
  • R 1 in the COOR 1 is represented by an alkyl group substituted by 1 carbon atoms which may be 1-8 or the following general formula, (1-3) Represents a group.
  • General formula (1-3) (In the general formula (1-3), R 3 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R 4 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 1 to 4)
  • R 1 is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of solvent solubility.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, iso-propyl group, n-butyl group, iso-butyl group, sec-butyl group, t-butyl group, and n-pentyl.
  • alkyl groups such as n-hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, n-heptyl group, n-octyl group and 2-ethylhexyl group.
  • substituted or cyclic alkyl groups such as n-hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, n-heptyl group, n-octyl group and 2-ethylhexyl group.
  • substituteduent optionally present in the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms include an alkyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a halogen atom or an aryl group.
  • alkyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms which is a “substituent optionally present in an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms”
  • alkyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propyloxy group, an iso-propyloxy group, n-butyloxy group, iso-butyloxy group, sec-butyloxy group, t-butyloxy group, n-pentyloxy group, n-hexyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group, n-heptyloxy group, n-octyloxy group, 2- Examples include linear, branched or cyclic alkyloxy groups such as an ethylhexyloxy group.
  • an alkyloxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the halogen atom as the “substituent optionally present in the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms” include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom. Among these, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom is preferable.
  • Examples of the aryl group that is a “substituent optionally present in an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms” include a phenyl group, a p-methoxyphenyl group, a pt-butylphenyl group, a p-chlorophenyl group, and the like. . Among these, a phenyl group is preferable. A plurality of these substituents may be present. When a plurality of these substituents are present, they may be the same or different, and even in the same case, they may be the same or different.
  • the number of substituents on the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
  • R 3 in the group represented by the general formula (1-3) is From the viewpoint of the effect on ether solvent solubility, 1 to 3 alkylene groups are preferred.
  • the alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms include a methylene group, an ethylene group, an n-propylene group, and an iso-propylene group. Preferably, they are an ethylene group and a propylene group.
  • R 4 in the group represented by the general formula (1-3) is an alkyl group of 1 to 8, more preferably an alkyl group of 1 to 4, from the viewpoint of molecular weight.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms include those described in the above R 1 column.
  • N in the group represented by the general formula (1-3) is an integer of 1 to 4, and preferably an integer of 1 to 3, from the viewpoint of molecular weight.
  • R 2 in OR 2 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably from the viewpoint of crystallinity and better handling property of the dye, a C1- 3 alkyl groups are shown.
  • Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms represented by R 2 include the same substituents as those described in R 1 of COOR 1 which is an example of the substituent R, and the preferred range is also synonymous.
  • the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is a halogen atom
  • examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or an iodine atom is preferable.
  • a chlorine atom and a fluorine atom are preferable because the molecular weight of the dye is reduced and the gram absorption coefficient is increased.
  • the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is an aryl group
  • examples of the aryl group include aryl groups such as a phenyl group, a p-methoxyphenyl group, a pt-butylphenyl group, and a p-chlorophenyl group.
  • a phenyl group is preferable because the molecular weight of the dye is reduced and the gram extinction coefficient is increased.
  • substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is an alkyl group
  • examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms include the same substituents as those described in R 1 of COOR 1 as an example of the substituent R.
  • the preferred range is also synonymous.
  • it is an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of crystallinity of the dye and good handleability.
  • substituent R is an alkyl group
  • substituents that may be present in the alkyl group include a halogen atom, preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and more preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • halogen atom preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and more preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
  • the number of substituents on the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 3.
  • R 4 in the general formula (4) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, a substituted group
  • a diarylamino group which may have a group or an alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, A dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkylarylamino group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and a total carbon number.
  • dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms More preferred is a dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms in total, or an alkylarylamino group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms in total, and a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms in total or Dialkylamino groups of primes 2-20 is particularly preferred.
  • the alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety may further have a substituent, and the substituent is preferably an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group or a halogen atom, and an alkoxy group Are more preferable, and a methoxy group or an ethoxy group is more preferable. Moreover, the aspect which does not have a substituent is also preferable.
  • d represents an integer of 0 to 2
  • R 5 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent when d is 0 or 1, or an aryl which may have a substituent.
  • d represents 2, the alkyl group which may have a substituent, the aryl group which may have a substituent, the dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, and the substituent Or a diarylamino group which may be substituted or an alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent.
  • R 5 is preferably a dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkylarylamino group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms when d is 2.
  • the alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later.
  • An alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylthio group, and an arylthio group. Or a halogen atom etc. are preferable, an alkoxy group is more preferable, and a methoxy group or an ethoxy group is further more preferable.
  • the aspect which does not have a substituent is also preferable.
  • R 6 and R 7 are each an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, An arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a carbon number of 6 An aryl group having ⁇ 20, an alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are preferable.
  • alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are more preferable.
  • the alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later.
  • an alkoxy group is more preferable, and a methoxy group or an ethoxy group is further more preferable.
  • the aspect which does not have a substituent is also preferable. Examples of the alkyl group and the like which may have a substituent will be described later.
  • alkyl group that may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • alkyl group which may have a substituent include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a dodecyl group, Hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-norbornyl group, 1-adamantyl group, phenoxyethyl group, benzyl group, phenylethyl group, N-butylaminosulfonylpropyl group, N-butylaminocarbonylmethyl group, N, N-dibutyl
  • methyl group ethyl group, propyl group, tert-butyl group, phenoxyethyl.
  • benzyl group phenylethyl group, N-butylaminosulfonylpropyl group, N-butylaminocarbonylmethyl group, N, N-dibutylaminosulfonylpropyl group and ethoxyethoxyethyl group.
  • aryl groups which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • Such aryl groups include phenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl, 4-N, N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl, 4-N-butylaminosulfonylphenyl 4-N, N-dibutylaminosulfonylphenyl group, more preferably phenyl group, 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl group, 4-N, N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl group, 4-N-butylaminosulfonylphenyl group.
  • 4-N, N-dibutylaminosulfonylphenyl group particularly preferably phenyl group, 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl group, 4-N, N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl group, 4-N, N-dibutylaminosulfonyl group.
  • a phenyl group is mentioned.
  • dialkylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • Examples of such a dialkylamino group include N, N-dimethylamino group, N, N-dibutylamino group, N, N-di (2-ethylhexyl) amino group, N-methyl-N-benzylamino group, N, N-di (2-ethoxyethyl) amino group, N.I. N-di (2-hydroxyethyl) amino group may be mentioned.
  • diarylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • Examples of such a diarylamino group include an N, N-diphenylamino group, an N, N-di (4-methoxyphenyl) amino group, and an N, N-di (4-acylphenyl) amino group.
  • alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • alkylarylamino group examples include an N-methyl-N-phenylamino group, an N-benzyl-N-phenylamino group, and an N-methyl-N- (4-methoxyphenyl) amino group.
  • alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • Examples of such an alkylcarbonyl group include an acetyl group, a propylcarbonyl group, a heptyl-3-carbonyl group, a 2-ethylhexyloxymethylcarbonyl group, a phenoxymethylcarbonyl group, and a 2-ethylhexyloxycarbonylmethylcarbonyl group.
  • arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • arylcarbonyl groups include benzoyl group, 4-methoxybenzoyl group, and 4-ethoxycarbonylbenzoyl group.
  • alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • alkylsulfonyl group examples include a methanesulfonyl group, an octanesulfonyl group, a dodecylsulfonyl group, a benzylsulfonyl group, and a phenoxypropylsulfonyl group.
  • arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • Examples of such an arylsulfonyl group include a phenylsulfonyl group, a 2-methoxyphenylsulfonyl group, and a 4-ethoxycarbonylphenylsulfonyl group.
  • alkylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below.
  • alkylsulfonylamino group examples include a methylsulfonylamino group, a butylsulfonylamino group, a hydroxypropylsulfonylamino group, a 2-ethylhexylsulfonylamino group, an n-octylsulfonylamino group, a phenoxyethylsulfonylamino group, and an allylsulfonylamino group. Is mentioned.
  • examples of the vinylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent include a vinylsulfonylamino group and a 1-methylvinylsulfonylamino group.
  • the arylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent includes a phenylsulfonylamino group, a p-methoxyphenylsulfonylamino group, a p-ethoxycarbonylsulfonylamino group, and the like. Is mentioned.
  • the alkylcarbonylamino group which may have a substituent is a methylcarbonylamino group, a 2-ethylhexanoylamino group, an n-heptylcarbonylamino group, an ethoxyethoxy group. Examples include a methylcarbonylamino group.
  • examples of the arylcarbonylamino group which may have a substituent include a benzoylamino group, a 2-methoxybenzoylamino group, and a 4-vinylbenzoylamino group.
  • An alkyl group preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, Hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, dodecyl group, hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-norbornyl group, 1-adamantyl group), alkenyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 2 to 18 alkenyl groups such as vinyl group, allyl group, 3-buten-1-yl group), aryl groups (preferably aryl groups having 6 to 24 carbon atoms such as phenyl group, naphthyl group), heterocyclic ring Group (preferably a heterocyclic
  • Alkylthio group for example, methylthio group, ethylthio group, octylthio group, cyclohexylthio group), arylthio group (preferably arylthio group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, phenylthio group), heterocyclic thio group (preferably having carbon number) 1 to 18 heterocyclic thio groups such as 2-benzothiazolylthio group, 2-pyridylthio group, 1-phenyltetrazolylthio group), alkylsulfinyl group (preferably alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms) For example, dodecanesulfinyl group), arylsulfinyl group (preferably having 6 to 24 carbon atoms) An arylsulfinyl group such as a phenylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably an alkylsulfon
  • substituent When the above-described substituent is a substitutable group, it may be further substituted with any of the above-described groups. In addition, when it has two or more substituents, those substituents may be the same or different.
  • R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • n1 represents an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2. When n1 is 2 or 3, the plurality of R 11 may be the same or different.
  • Y 1 represents —O—, —S—, —NR 13 —, —SO 2 —, or —C ( ⁇ O) —, and represents —O—, —SO 2 —, or —C ( ⁇ O).
  • R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 12 represents a monovalent substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above-described substituent T. The substituent T may be further substituted with the substituent T.
  • R 12 is preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an acyl group which may have a substituent, a sulfonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, Or an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. And an alkylamino group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • the mass of the R 12 portion per molecule is preferably 200 to 2500, and more preferably 250 to 1500.
  • R ′ is an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of ether solubility and molecular weight.
  • the alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms include a methylene group, an ethylene group, an n-propylene group, and an iso-propylene group.
  • they are an ethylene group and a propylene group.
  • R ′′ is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of ether solubility and molecular weight.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms may be represented by the general formula: It is synonymous with R 3 in (1-3), and the preferred range is also synonymous.
  • n1 is an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 1 to 2, from the viewpoint of ether solubility and molecular weight.
  • M which is the central part of the general formula (1), will be described.
  • M represents two hydrogen atoms, a metal atom, a metal oxide, or a metal halide.
  • the metal atom include iron, magnesium, nickel, cobalt, copper, palladium, zinc, vanadium, titanium, indium, and tin.
  • the metal oxide include titanyl and vanadyl.
  • the metal halide include aluminum chloride, indium chloride, germanium chloride, tin (II) chloride, tin (IV) chloride, and silicon chloride.
  • the central metal is zinc or copper because of high heat resistance. Further, it is particularly preferable that the central metal is zinc or copper because the solvent solubility in general-purpose solvents such as acetone, methanol, and methyl cellosolve is high, and the solubility in the resin is high and the contrast becomes high.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is more preferably represented by the following general formula (1-1).
  • General formula (1-1) (In the general formula (1-1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2), or a general formula (1-3) Or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4), and 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are represented by the general formula (1-1-2) Or a group represented by the general formula (1-4), at least one is a halogen atom, and at least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-1-2) It is.
  • M represents two hydrogen atoms, a metal atom, a metal oxide or a metal halide.
  • the general formula (1-1-2), the general formula (1-3), and the general formula (1-4) in the general formula (1-1) are represented by the general formula (1-1) described in the general formula (1).
  • M in the general formula (1-1) has the same meaning as M in the general formula (1), and a preferred range is also the same.
  • Pc represents a phthalocyanine nucleus
  • Zn represents a central metal
  • a portion with “ ⁇ -” represents a substituent at the ⁇ -position
  • a portion with “ ⁇ -” represents ⁇ Represents a substituent at the position.
  • x and y are numbers of 0 or more, where the number of substituents is 0 or more.
  • the phthalocyanine compound is a mixture having different substitution positions and substitution numbers, it is difficult to uniquely describe it as a structural formula. Further, the number of substitutions shown in the following table is a value obtained by approximating the average value of the number of substituents in the mixture, and may be a small number.
  • S-1 given as an example of Z 1 to Z 16 described above is one of S-2 to S-47. It may be replaced with either one.
  • R is the carboxyl group, epoxy group, aryl ester group, tertiary alkyl ester group, group represented by the above formula (1A), group represented by the above formula (2A), amino group And a substituent having at least one functional group selected from thiol groups and preferably bonded to the ⁇ -position.
  • S represents another substituent which the phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention may have.
  • X represents a halogen atom that the phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention may have.
  • the method for producing the phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known method can be used. A method of cyclizing a phthalonitrile compound and a metal salt in a molten state or in an organic solvent can be particularly preferably used.
  • a method of cyclizing a phthalonitrile compound and a metal salt in a molten state or in an organic solvent can be particularly preferably used.
  • preferred embodiments of the method for producing a phthalocyanine dye will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to the following preferred embodiments.
  • the phthalonitrile compound (1) represented by the following formula (I) A phthalonitrile compound (2) represented by the following formula (II): A phthalonitrile compound (3) represented by the following formula (III): And a phthalonitrile compound (4) represented by the following formula (IV): These are cyclized with one selected from the group consisting of metal atoms, metal oxides, metal carbonyls, metal halides, and organic acid metals (also collectively referred to as “metal compounds” in this specification). Thus, a phthalocyanine compound can be produced.
  • Z 1 to Z 16 are the desired phthalocyanine compounds (1) Defined by the structure of Specifically, in the above formulas (I) to (IV), Z 1 to Z 16 are the same as the definitions of Z 1 to Z 16 in the general formula (1), respectively. Omitted.
  • the cyclization reaction is carried out by melting one kind selected from the group consisting of the phthalonitrile compounds of formulas (I) to (IV) and a metal, a metal oxide, a metal carbonyl, a metal halide and an organic acid metal in a molten state or It is preferable to react in a solvent.
  • the metal, metal oxide, metal carbonyl, metal halide, and organic acid metal that can be used at this time are those corresponding to the central part of the phthalocyanine compound obtained after the reaction (M in the general formula (1)). If there is, there is no particular limitation.
  • metals such as iron, copper, zinc, vanadium, titanium, indium and tin listed in the item M in the above general formula (1), metal halides such as chlorides, bromides and iodides of these metals, Examples thereof include metal oxides such as vanadium oxide, titanyl oxide and copper oxide, organic acid metals such as acetate, complex compounds such as acetylacetonate, and metal carbonyls such as carbonyl iron.
  • metals such as iron, copper, zinc, vanadium, titanium, indium, magnesium and tin; metal halides such as chloride, bromide, iodide, etc.
  • Metal oxides such as cobalt dioxide, cuprous oxide, cuprous oxide, cupric oxide, copper trioxide, barium oxide, zinc oxide, germanium monoxide, and german
  • metals, metal oxides and metal halides are preferable, metal halides are more preferable, vanadium iodide, copper iodide and zinc iodide are more preferable, and iodine is particularly preferable. Copper iodide and zinc iodide, most preferably zinc iodide. When zinc iodide is used, the central metal is zinc.
  • metal halides it is preferable to use iodide because it has excellent solubility in solvents and resins, and the spectrum of the resulting phthalocyanine compound is sharp and easily fits within the desired wavelength range of 640 to 750 nm. is there.
  • the detailed mechanism of sharpening the spectrum when using iodide during the cyclization reaction is unknown, but when iodide is used, the iodine remaining in the phthalocyanine compound after the reaction may have some interaction with the phthalocyanine compound. It is presumed that iodine is present between the layers of the phthalocyanine compound due to the action. However, the mechanism is not limited to the above mechanism. In order to obtain the same effect as when metal iodide is used for the cyclization reaction, the obtained phthalocyanine compound may be treated with iodine.
  • the organic solvent may be any inert solvent that has a low reactivity with the phthalonitrile compound as a starting material, and preferably exhibits no reactivity.
  • benzene, toluene, xylene, nitrobenzene, monochlorobenzene, o -Inert solvents such as chlorotoluene, dichlorobenzene, trichlorobenzene, 1-chloronaphthalene, 1-methylnaphthalene, ethylene glycol, and benzonitrile; methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1- Alcohols such as butanol, 1-hexanol, 1-pentanol, 1-octanol; and pyridine, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, N, N-dimethylacetophenone, Triethylamine, tri n- butylamine, dimethyl sulfoxide, aprotic polar solvents such as sulfolane.
  • o -Inert solvents such as chlorotoluen
  • 1-chloronaphthalene, 1-methylnaphthalene, 1-octanol, dichlorobenzene and benzonitrile are preferably used, and 1-octanol, dichlorobenzene and benzonitrile are more preferably used.
  • These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the reaction conditions for the phthalonitrile compound of the formulas (I) to (IV) and the metal compound in the above embodiment are not particularly limited as long as this reaction proceeds.
  • the total amount of the phthalonitrile compounds of the above formulas (I) to (IV) is 1 to 500 parts by weight, preferably 10 to 350 parts by weight, and the metal compound is 4 moles of the phthalonitrile compound.
  • the charge is preferably in the range of 0.8 to 2.0 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1.5 mol.
  • the reaction temperature during cyclization is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 30 to 250 ° C., more preferably 80 to 200 ° C.
  • the reaction time is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20 hours.
  • the starting phthalonitrile compounds of formulas (I) to (IV) can be synthesized by a conventionally known method, or commercially available products can also be used.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention may be a multimer (halogenated phthalocyanine multimer).
  • a multimer is a compound containing two or more halogenated phthalocyanine structures, and includes a structure such as a dimer, trimer or polymer.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is a halogenated phthalocyanine multimer comprising at least one of structural units represented by the following general formula (A), general formula (B), and general formula (C), or general A halogenated phthalocyanine multimer represented by the formula (D) is preferred.
  • Structural unit represented by general formula (A) In general formula (A), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • DyeI represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton.
  • X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization. That is, it refers to a portion that forms a repeating unit corresponding to the main chain formed by the polymerization reaction. Two sites represented by * are repeating units.
  • X 1 is not particularly limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer, but is particularly preferably a linking group represented by the following (XX-1) to (X-24): 1) (meth) acrylic linking chains represented by (XX-2), styrene linking chains represented by (XX-10) to (XX-17), and (XX-24) More preferably, it is a vinyl type connecting chain.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group may be a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene group).
  • R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
  • DyeI represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton, that is, a partial structure derived from a halogenated phthalocyanine in a halogenated phthalocyanine multimer.
  • any one of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) is It is preferably bonded to L 1 .
  • paragraphs 0138 to 0152 of JP 2013-29760 A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • X 2 has the same meaning as X 1 in general formula (A).
  • L 2 has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (A).
  • Y 2 represents a group capable of ionic bonding or coordination bonding with DyeII.
  • DyeII represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton.
  • X 2 has the same meaning as X 2 in general formula (A), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L 2 has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (A), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • Y 2 may be any group capable of ionic bonding or coordination bonding with Dye II, and may be either an anionic group or a cationic group. Examples of the anionic group include COO ⁇ , PO 3 H ⁇ , SO 3 ⁇ , —SO 3 NH ⁇ , —SO 3 N ⁇ CO— and the like, and COO ⁇ , PO 3 H ⁇ and SO 3 ⁇ are preferable. .
  • Examples of the cationic group include substituted or unsubstituted onium cations (for example, ammonium, pyridinium, imidazolium, phosphonium and the like), and ammonium cations are particularly preferable.
  • Y 2 can be bonded to an anion part (COO ⁇ , SO 3 ⁇ , O ⁇ etc.) or a cation part (the onium cation, metal cation etc.) of DyeII.
  • any one of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) is present in the general formula (B). It is preferably bonded to Y 2 of
  • paragraphs 0156 to 0161 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • DyeIII represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton.
  • m represents 0 or 1;
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 3 is a substituted or unsubstituted linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (for example, a methylene group, an ethylene group, Trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, phenylene group, naphthalene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH— , —O—, —S—, —NR— (R each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group), —C ( ⁇ O) —, —SO—, Preferred examples include —SO 2 — and a linking group formed by linking two or more of these.
  • m 0 or 1, but is preferably 1.
  • DyeIII has a structure derived from the compound represented by the above general formula (1), any one of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) is represented in the general formula (C). it is preferred that the of L 3 are bound.
  • Halogenated phthalocyanine multimer represented by the general formula (D) (In general formula (D), L 4 represents an n-valent linking group. N represents an integer of 2 to 20. When n is 2 or more, the structures of DyeIV may be the same or different. DyeIV represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton.) In the above general formula (D), n is preferably 3 to 15, particularly preferably 3 to 6. In the general formula (D), when n is 2, the divalent linking group represented by L 4 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene).
  • arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, phenylene group, naphthalene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —NR— (R each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group), —C ( ⁇ O) —, —SO—, —
  • Preferable examples include SO 2 — and a linking group formed by linking two or more of these.
  • n-valent linking group where n is 3 or more is a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group (1,3,5-phenylene group, 1,2,4-phenylene group, 1,4,5,8-naphthalene group, etc.) And a linking group formed by substituting the divalent linking group with a heterocyclic linking group (for example, 1,3,5-triazine group, etc.), an alkylene linking group or the like as a central mother nucleus.
  • DyeIV has a structure derived from the compound represented by the above general formula (1), any one of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) is represented in the general formula (D). it is preferred that the of L 4 are attached.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer having a structural unit represented by general formula (A) and general formula (C) and the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer represented by general formula (D) are linked by a covalent bond. Therefore, the colored curable composition containing the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is excellent in heat resistance, and when the colored curable composition is applied to the formation of a colored pattern of multiple colors, This is preferable because it is effective in suppressing color migration.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (A) is preferable because the molecular weight of the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is easily controlled.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer may have another functional group in the structural portion including the halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton of the above-described halogenated phthalocyanine multimer.
  • other functional groups include polymerizable groups, acid groups, and alkali-soluble groups (for example, carboxylic acid, sulfonic acid, phosphoric acid, and phenolic hydroxyl group).
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit including the structure containing the halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton described above. Other repeating units may have a functional group.
  • the repeating unit containing at least 1 sort (s) of a polymeric group, an acid group, and an alkali-soluble group is illustrated. That is, the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer may have other repeating units in addition to the repeating units represented by the general formulas (A) to (D). One type of other repeating unit may be contained in one halogenated phthalocyanine multimer, or two or more types may be contained. The halogenated phthalocyanine multimer may have other functional groups in the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer represented by the general formulas (A) to (D).
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer preferably contains a polymerizable group.
  • One type of polymerizable group may be included, or two or more types may be included.
  • a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton may contain a polymerizable group, or may contain other parts.
  • the structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton preferably contains a polymerizable group.
  • the aspect in which other parts other than the structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton contain a polymeric group is also preferable.
  • the polymerizable group a known polymerizable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, an acid, or heat can be used.
  • examples thereof include a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetane group), and a methylol group.
  • a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferable, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable, and a (meth) acryloyl group derived from glycidyl (meth) acrylate and 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate is more preferable.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is preferably a polymer having a repeating unit derived from a halogenated phthalocyanine compound having one radical polymerizable group.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer has an epoxy group.
  • the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer having an epoxy group include a repeating unit derived from a halogenated phthalocyanine compound having one radical polymerizable group and a radical polymerizable monomer having an epoxy group (for example, glycidyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, etc.). Examples thereof include a polymer having a repeating unit derived therefrom.
  • a method for introducing a polymerizable group for example, paragraphs 0180 to 0188 in JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • a method of obtaining a halogenated phthalocyanine multimer having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond is obtained by radicalizing a monomer mixture containing a halogenated phthalocyanine compound having one radical polymerizable group and a radical polymerizable monomer having a reactive group.
  • polymerization is mentioned.
  • Examples of the reactive group include a carboxyl group and a hydroxy group.
  • Examples of the radical polymerizable monomer having a reactive group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, hydroxyethyl acrylate, and hydroxyethyl methacrylate.
  • Examples of the group that reacts with the reactive group include an epoxy group and an isocyanate group.
  • Examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond include glycidyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, 2-acryloyloxyethyl isocyanate, 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate, and the like.
  • the amount of polymerizable groups possessed by the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is preferably 0.1 to 2.0 mmol, more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 mmol, and more preferably 0.3 to 1. More preferably, it is 0 mmol.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is preferably 2,000 to 20,000, more preferably 3,000 to 15,000, and further preferably 4,000 to 10,000. preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight ratio of the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is preferably 1.0 to 3.0, more preferably 1.6 to 2.5, and more preferably 1.6 to 2 More preferably, it is 0.0.
  • the weight average molecular weight and degree of dispersion of the polymer are defined as polystyrene conversion values by GPC measurement.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polymer are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and TSKgel Super Super AWM-H (Tosoh Corporation) as a column.
  • 6.0 mm ID ⁇ 15.0 cm can be obtained by using a 10 mmol / L lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution as an eluent.
  • the blending amount of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye in the composition of the present invention is preferably 20 to 70% by mass, more preferably 30 to 60% by mass, and more preferably 40 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content. % Is more preferable.
  • the blending amount of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is preferably 55 to 80% by mass, more preferably 60 to 75% by mass.
  • the blending amount of the phthalocyanine compound containing no halogen atom in the composition of the present invention is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total solid content. By setting it as such a range, the effect of this invention is exhibited more effectively.
  • the composition of the present invention contains a radical trapping agent.
  • a radical trap agent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used together 2 or more types.
  • the radical trapping agent in the present invention preferably has at least one ring structure.
  • the radical trapping agent has a ring structure, it is presumed that the steric bulk of the radical trapping agent promotes the interparticle steric repulsion ability when the halogenated phthalocyanine dye interacts with the radical trapping agent.
  • the ring structure of the radical trapping agent is oriented horizontally with respect to the phthalocyanine ring, it is presumed that the inhibitory effect on the TT-TT interaction (stacking) between phthalocyanines is also great.
  • the composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one selected from a naphthalene derivative, a thioether compound, a hindered amine compound, an ultraviolet absorber, and a thermal polymerization inhibitor as a radical trapping agent.
  • the composition of the present invention more preferably contains at least one selected from a hindered amine compound, an ultraviolet absorber and a thermal polymerization inhibitor as a radical trapping agent.
  • naphthalene derivatives include naphthohydroquinone compounds such as naphthohydroquinone sulfonate onium salts, and the like, and 1,4-dihydroxynaphthalene, 6-amino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4 -Dione, 6-methylamino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4-dione, 6-ethylamino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4-dione 6-propylamino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4-dione, 6-butylamino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4-dione, -( ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethyl) naphthalene, 2- ( ⁇ , ⁇ dimethyl
  • the thioether compound is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound having at least one thioether group in the molecule, for example.
  • Examples of the hindered amine compound include compounds having a partial structure represented by the following formula (RT1).
  • Formula (RT1) (In Formula (RT1), R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and R 5 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group.)
  • R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
  • R 5 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group.
  • the alkyl group a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable.
  • the alkyl group used for the alkoxy group is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aryl group used for the aryloxy group include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
  • the molecular weight of the hindered amine compound is preferably 2000 or less, and more preferably 1000 or less. In view of easy availability in the market, the molecular weight of the hindered amine compound is preferably 400 to 700.
  • a hindered amine compound commercially available TINUVIN123, TINUVIN144, TINUVIN152 manufactured by BASF, Adeka Stub LA-52 manufactured by Adeka, and the like can be preferably used.
  • UV absorber examples include salicylates, benzophenones, benzotriazoles, cyanoacrylates, nickel chelates, and the like, and benzotriazole compounds are preferred.
  • benzotriazole compounds include 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4,6-bis (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) phenol and 2- (2′-hydroxy-5 ′).
  • -Merphenyl) benzotriazole 2- (2′-hydroxy-3′-t-butyl-5′-methylphenyl) -5-chlorobenzotriazole, 2- [2-hydroxy-3,5-bis ( ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylbenzyl) phenyl] -2H-benzotriazole and the like.
  • 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4,6-bis (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) phenol is particularly preferable.
  • benzotriazole compounds include TINUVIN900, TINUVIN928, TINUVINP, TINUVIN234, TINUVIN326, and TINUVIN329 manufactured by BASF.
  • thermal polymerization inhibitor examples include hydroquinone, hydroquinone monomethyl ether, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl- 6-t-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, phenothiazine, pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl- 4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] and the like, and at least one selected from p-methoxyphenol and pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] is used. It is preferable.
  • ADK STAB AO-60 manufactured by ADE
  • the composition of the present invention includes an oxidizing agent described in paragraphs 0183 to 0210 of JP2011-141534A, and paragraphs 0103 to 0153 described in JP2011-253174A.
  • a polymerizable compound having a radical scavenging ability for example, a hindered amine type or a hindered phenol type polymerizable compound
  • the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the blending amount of the radical trapping agent in the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 20% by mass, more preferably 2 to 15% by mass, and more preferably 3 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content. It is particularly preferred that The molar ratio of the radical trapping agent to the halogenated phthalocyanine dye in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 5, and more preferably 0.2 to 1.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain other colorants in addition to the halogenated phthalocyanine compound, and preferably contains other colorants.
  • a yellow pigment is preferably used, and it may be a dye, a pigment, or a mixed system of a dye and a pigment.
  • Other colorants may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the pigment examples include conventionally known various inorganic pigments or organic pigments. Further, considering that it is preferable to have a high transmittance, whether it is an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, it is preferable to use a pigment having an average particle size as small as possible, and considering the handling properties, the average particle size of the pigment is 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.1 ⁇ m is preferable, and 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.05 ⁇ m is more preferable.
  • Examples of the pigment that can be preferably used in the present invention include the following. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the colorant is a dye
  • a colored curable composition in a state of being uniformly dissolved in the composition can be obtained.
  • a well-known dye can be used for conventional color filters.
  • Examples of the chemical structure include azo series (for example, CI solvent yellow 162) and methine series (CI solvent yellow 93).
  • CI solvent yellow 162 CI solvent yellow 162
  • methine series CI solvent yellow 93
  • methine dye a monomethine dye is preferable, and a monomethine dye represented by the following general formula (5) is more preferable.
  • R 11 represents an alkyl group or a vinyl group
  • R 12 represents an aromatic ring group having a substituent.
  • R 11 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • R 12 is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and the substituent is preferably an alkylsulfonylamino group, a vinylsulfonylamino group, an arylsulfonylamino group, an alkylcarbonylamino group, a vinylcarbonylamino group, or an arylcarbonylamino group.
  • An alkylsulfonylamino group is preferred.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms may have an unsaturated bond, and examples of such a substituent include an allylsulfonylamino group.
  • an acid dye and / or a derivative thereof may be suitably used.
  • a direct dye, a basic dye, a mordant dye, an acid mordant dye, an azoic dye, a disperse dye, an oil-soluble dye, a food dye, and / or a derivative thereof can be usefully used.
  • acid dye examples include 1,3,7,9,11,17,23,25,29,34,36,38,40,42,54,65,72,73,76,79,98,99,111,112, 113, 114, 116, 119, 123, 128, 134, 135, 138, 139, 140, 144, 150, 155, 157, 160, 161, 163, 168, 169, 172, 177, 178, 179, 184 190,193,196,197,199,202,203,204,205,207,212,214,220,221,228,230,232,235,238,240,242,243,251;
  • the yellow dye used in the present invention is particularly preferably an azo dye and / or a methine dye, and more preferably an azo dye.
  • a pigment is used for preparing the composition of the present invention, it is preferably a pigment dispersion. From the viewpoint of improving the dispersibility of the pigment, it is preferable to add a pigment dispersant.
  • pigment dispersants examples include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamines and salts thereof, polycarboxylic acids and salts thereof, high molecular weight unsaturated acid esters, modified polyurethanes, modified polyesters, and modified poly (meth) acrylates. , (Meth) acrylic copolymers, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensates], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl amines, alkanol amines, pigment derivatives, and the like.
  • the polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer from the structure thereof.
  • the polymer dispersant acts to prevent re-aggregation of the pigment by adsorbing on the surface of the pigment. Therefore, as the pigment dispersant, a terminal-modified polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface, a graft polymer, and a block polymer can be mentioned as preferred structures. On the other hand, the pigment derivative has an effect of promoting the adsorption of the polymer dispersant by modifying the pigment surface.
  • the pigment dispersant that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples include the following. “Disperbyk-101 (polyamideamine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester), 110 (copolymer containing an acid group)”, 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 manufactured by BYK Chemie (Polymer copolymer) ”,“ BYK-P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) ”,“ EFKA 4047, 4050-4010-4165 (polyurethane) ”, EFKA 4330-4340 (block copolymer) manufactured by EFKA 4400-4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyesteramide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylate), 6220 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (azo pigment derivative) ", Ajinomoto Fan Techno Co., Ltd.
  • a dispersant described in paragraphs 0028 to 0124 of JP2011-070156A and a dispersant described in JP2007-277514A are preferably used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • pigment dispersants may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use a combination of a pigment derivative and a polymer dispersant.
  • the content of the pigment dispersant in the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 80 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 70 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment, and 10 to 60 parts by mass. More preferably.
  • the amount thereof used is preferably in the range of 5 to 100 parts by mass in terms of mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment, and in the range of 10 to 80 parts by mass. It is more preferable that
  • the amount of the pigment derivative used is preferably in the range of 1 to 30 parts by mass, preferably in the range of 3 to 20 parts by mass, with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. Is more preferable, and the range of 5 to 15 parts by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the colorant contains a pigment
  • the pigment derivative is a compound having a structure in which a part of an organic pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group or a phthalimidomethyl group.
  • the pigment derivative preferably contains an acidic group or a basic group from the viewpoint of dispersibility and dispersion stability.
  • organic pigment for constituting the pigment derivative examples include diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, perinone pigments, perylene pigments, thioindigo pigments , Isoindoline pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, selenium pigments, metal complex pigments, and the like.
  • a sulfonic acid, carboxylic acid, and its quaternary ammonium salt are preferable, a carboxylic acid group and a sulfonic acid group are more preferable, and a sulfonic acid group is especially preferable.
  • the basic group possessed by the pigment derivative is preferably an amino group, particularly preferably a tertiary amino group.
  • quinoline-based, benzimidazolone-based and isoindoline-based pigment derivatives are particularly preferable, and quinoline-based and benzimidazolone-based pigment derivatives are more preferable.
  • a pigment derivative having a structure represented by the following general formula (P) is particularly preferred.
  • A represents a partial structure selected from the following general formulas (PA-1) to (PA-3).
  • B represents a single bond or a (t + 1) -valent linking group.
  • C represents a single bond, —NH—, —CONH—, —CO 2 —, —SO 2 NH—, —O—, —S— or SO 2 —.
  • D represents a single bond, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group or an arylene group.
  • E represents —SO 3 H, —SO 3 M (M represents an alkali metal atom), —CO 2 H or N (Rpa) (Rpb).
  • Rpa and Rpb each independently represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and Rpa and Rpb may be linked to each other to form a ring.
  • t represents an integer of 1 to 5.
  • Rp1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an aryl group.
  • Rp2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, or a hydroxyl group.
  • s represents an integer of 1 to 4. When s is 2 or more, the plurality of Rp2s may be the same as or different from each other.
  • Rp3 represents a single bond, —NH—, —CONH—, —CO 2 —, —SO 2 NH—, —O—, —S— or Represents SO 2 —. * Represents a connecting part with B in the general formula (P).
  • Rp1 is particularly preferably a methyl group or a phenyl group, and most preferably a methyl group.
  • Rp2 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and most preferably a hydrogen atom or a chlorine atom.
  • examples of the (t + 1) -valent linking group represented by B include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an arylene group, and a heteroarylene group.
  • linking groups represented by the following structural formulas (PA-4) to (PA-9) are particularly preferable.
  • pigment derivatives having a linking group represented by the structural formula (PA-5) or (PA-8), particularly as B are more excellent in dispersibility. This is preferable.
  • examples of the alkylene group, cycloalkylene group and arylene group represented by D include methylene, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, decylene, cyclopropylene, cyclobutylene, cyclopentylene, Examples include cyclohexylene, cyclooctylene, cyclodecylene, phenylene, naphthylene, and the like.
  • an alkylene group is particularly preferable, and alkylene having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is most preferable.
  • examples of the alkyl group and aryl group in Rpa and Rpb include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, and a butyl group.
  • pigment derivatives for example, the compounds of paragraphs 0217 to 0222 of JP2013-64998A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the content of the pigment derivative in the colored curable composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 3 to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the pigment. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
  • the solvent in the pigment dispersion is not particularly limited as long as it is an organic solvent used in general pigment dispersible compositions.
  • a solvent may be used individually by 1 type and may be used together 2 or more types.
  • the content of the solvent in the pigment dispersion is appropriately selected according to the use of the pigment dispersion.
  • the “total sum of the pigment and the pigment dispersant” is changed to “the total mass excluding the solvent of the pigment dispersion”.
  • the content can be 5 to 50% by mass.
  • the content of the other colorant can be used within a range not impairing the effects of the present invention, and is preferably 10 to 55% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored curable composition of the present invention. More preferably, it is ⁇ 45 mass%. Further, it is preferably added to the colored curable composition so that the absorption intensity ratio (absorption at 450 nm / absorption at 650 nm) is in the range of 0.95 to 1.05.
  • thermosetting compound refers to a compound that can be cured by heating, and generally refers to a compound that is cured by heating at 180 ° C. or higher.
  • a photocurable compound means what can perform film
  • a thermosetting compound may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • a compound having a thermosetting functional group can be used as the thermosetting compound used in the present invention.
  • thermosetting functional group examples include those having at least one group selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, an acyloxymethyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, an isocyanate group, a vinyl group, and a mercapto group. preferable.
  • thermosetting compound those having two or more thermosetting functional groups in one molecule are more preferable, and compounds having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule are more preferable.
  • thermosetting compound used in the present invention includes epoxy compounds, melamine compounds (for example, alkoxymethylated, acyloxymethylated melamine compounds), urea compounds (for example, alkoxymethylated, acyloxymethylated urea compounds), phenol compounds ( For example, preferred examples include hydroxymethylated or alkoxymethylated phenol compounds or resins, and alkoxymethyl etherified phenol compounds), epoxy compounds and melamine compounds are more preferred, and epoxy compounds are more preferred.
  • the thermosetting compound used in the present invention may be a low molecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 2000, and further a molecular weight of less than 1000), or a high molecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of 1000 or more, in the case of a polymer, the weight average molecular weight is 1000 or more).
  • a molecular weight of 1000 or more are preferred, and those having a molecular weight of 2000 to 100,000 are more preferred.
  • a compound having 2 or more epoxy groups in one molecule and a molecular weight of 1000 or more is particularly preferable.
  • the said weight average molecular weight can be calculated
  • R EP1 to R EP3 each represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group, and the alkyl group may have a cyclic structure, and has a substituent. May be. R EP1 and R EP2 and R EP2 and R EP3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure.
  • alkyl group may have include a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, an alkylthio group, an alkylsulfone group, an alkylsulfonyl group, and an alkylamino group.
  • QEP represents a single bond or an nEP- valent organic group.
  • R EP1 ⁇ R EP3 combines with Q EP may form a ring structure.
  • nEP represents an integer of 2 or more, preferably 2 to 10, and more preferably 2 to 6. However, n EP is 2 when Q EP is a single bond.
  • QEP When QEP is an nEP- valent organic group, QEP includes a chain or cyclic nEP- valent saturated hydrocarbon group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms), an nEP- valent aromatic ring group (carbon number). 6-30 are preferred), or a chain or cyclic saturated hydrocarbon or aromatic hydrocarbon, ether group, ester group, amide group, sulfonamide group, alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, methylene group is A divalent linking group such as —N (—) 2 , an n EP valent organic group having a structure in which a combination of these is connected, or the like is preferable.
  • paragraph 0200 of JP2013-64998A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the epoxy compound used in the present invention is also preferably an oligomer or polymer having an epoxy group in the side chain.
  • examples of such compounds include bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, phenol novolac type epoxy resins, cresol novolac type epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins and the like. These compounds may be commercially available or can be obtained by introducing an epoxy group into the side chain of the polymer.
  • Examples of bisphenol A type epoxy resins include JER827, JER828, JER834, JER1001, JER1002, JER1003, JER1055, JER1007, JER1009, JER1010 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resins Co., Ltd.), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050, EPICLON1051, EPICLON1055 Etc.).
  • Examples of the bisphenol F type epoxy resin include JER806, JER807, JER4004, JER4005, JER4007, JER4010 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLON 830, EPICLON 835 (above, made by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE- 602S (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Phenol novolac type epoxy resins include JER152, JER154, JER157S70, JER157S65 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, EPICLON N-775 (above, DIC Corporation).
  • Cresol novolac type epoxy resins include EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) ), EOCN-1020 (above, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • Aliphatic epoxy resins include ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (above, manufactured by ADEKA) Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, PB 4700 (above, manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Denacol EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (above, manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation).
  • ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), JER1031S (manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • the introduction reaction includes tertiary amines such as triethylamine and benzylmethylamine, quaternary ammonium salts such as dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium chloride, tetraethylammonium chloride, pyridine,
  • the reaction can be carried out in an organic solvent at a reaction temperature of 50 to 150 ° C. for several to several tens of hours using triphenylphosphine as a catalyst.
  • the amount of the alicyclic epoxy unsaturated compound introduced is preferably controlled so that the acid value of the obtained polymer satisfies the range of 5 to 200 KOH ⁇ mg / g.
  • the molecular weight is preferably in the range of 500 to 5000000, more preferably 1000 to 500000 on a weight average.
  • the epoxy unsaturated compound those having a glycidyl group as an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate and allyl glycidyl ether can be used, but preferred are unsaturated compounds having an alicyclic epoxy group. Examples of such compounds include the following compounds.
  • thermosetting compound used in the present invention is also preferably a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylene group and a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure.
  • (Meth) acrylate, bifunctional (meth) acrylate, trifunctional or higher (meth) acrylate (for example, 3 to 6 functional (meth) acrylate) is preferable. The following can be mentioned as the example.
  • Monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate; Polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate , Ethylene with polyfunctional alcohols such as dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, glycerin
  • ethyleneoxy-modified pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercially available product, NK ester ATM-35E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol triacrylate (as a commercially available product, KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipenta Erythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and a structure in which these (meth)
  • thermosetting compound used in the present invention compounds having the following N-hydroxymethyl group, N-alkoxymethyl group, or N-acyloxymethyl group are also preferable.
  • Such a compound is usually provided as a melamine compound or a urea compound.
  • paragraphs 0172 to 0194 of JP2013-066498A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the total content of the thermosetting compound in the composition of the present invention varies depending on the material, but is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, preferably 7 to 35% with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the colored curable composition. % By mass is more preferable, and 10 to 30% is particularly preferable. In this invention, the effect that the cured film excellent in chemical-resistance can be obtained by setting it as the compounding quantity of such a thermosetting compound is acquired.
  • the colored curable composition of the present invention includes a solvent that dissolves at least a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, and a radical trapping agent.
  • a solvent that dissolves at least a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, and a radical trapping agent.
  • an organic solvent is usually used.
  • a solvent may be used individually by 1 type and may be used together 2 or more types. Examples of the organic solvent include the following.
  • Esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, alkyl oxyacetate (examples) : Methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)), 3-oxypropionic acid alkyl esters (example: 3 -Methyl oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate, etc.
  • ethers include diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl
  • Examples include ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate and the like.
  • ketones include methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, and 3-heptanone.
  • Aromatic hydrocarbons include toluene, xylene and the like.
  • solvents are preferably mixed in two or more types from the viewpoint of improving the coated surface.
  • It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
  • the content of the solvent in the colored curable composition is preferably such that the total solid content of the composition is 5 to 30% by mass, more preferably 7 to 25% by mass, from the viewpoint of applicability. 10 to 20% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • Various colored surfactants may be added to the colored curable composition of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability.
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used. Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be combined.
  • the colored curable composition of the present invention contains a fluorosurfactant, so that the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved, so that the coating thickness is uniform.
  • the liquid-saving property can be further improved. That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a colored curable composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid, The wettability is improved, and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several ⁇ m is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3% by mass to 40% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7% by mass to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content in this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in a colored curable composition.
  • Examples of the fluorine-based surfactant include Megafac F781 (manufactured by DIC Corporation).
  • the colored curable composition may or may not contain a surfactant, but when it is contained, the addition amount of the surfactant is 0.001% by mass relative to the total mass of the colored curable composition.
  • the content is preferably -2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% -1.0% by mass.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization initiator. Only one type of polymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used.
  • the content of the polymerization initiator in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.01 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass.
  • the polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound by light or heat, or both, and can be appropriately selected according to the purpose. When polymerization is initiated by light, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferred. In addition, when the polymerization is initiated by heat, a polymerization initiator that decomposes at 150 to 250 ° C. is preferable.
  • the polymerization initiator that can be used in the present invention is preferably a compound having at least an aromatic group.
  • Onium salt compounds organoboron salt compounds, disulfone compounds, and the like. From the viewpoint of sensitivity, oxime compounds, acetophenone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, trihalomethyl compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, and thiol compounds are preferred.
  • acetophenone compounds trihalomethyl compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, and oxime compounds
  • paragraphs 0506 to 0510 of JP2012-208494A corresponding to US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099. [0622-0628]) and the like can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Examples of the oxime compound include those represented by the following formula (OX-1) or (OX-2) in paragraph 0513 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/235099, [0632]). Reference can be made to the description of the compounds represented, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the oxime compound commercially available products IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • As the acetophenone-based initiator commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) can be used.
  • acylphosphine initiator commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) can be used. Also, commercial products such as TRONLY TR-PBG-304, TRONLY TR-PBG-309, TRONLY TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO., LTD) are used. it can. Commercial products such as Adeka Arkles NCI-831 and Adeka Arkles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA) can also be used.
  • the colored curable composition of the present invention is various additives, for example, an acid anhydride, a curing agent, a curing catalyst, a filler, an adhesion promoter, and an antioxidant as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • An agent, an anti-aggregation agent and the like can be blended.
  • ⁇ Preparation method of colored curable composition> A preferred method for preparing the colored curable composition of the present invention will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the colorant is only a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, it is usually dissolved in the solvent together with the thermosetting compound and the radical trapping agent.
  • it further contains a pigment as a coloring agent, it mix
  • thermosetting compound is an epoxy compound
  • a thermosetting compound and a curing catalyst or a curing agent are added to the pigment dispersion or dye solution thus obtained, or the binder is already thermosetting.
  • the colored curable composition of the present invention is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects.
  • a filter used for filter filtration if it is a filter conventionally used for the filtration use etc., it can use without being specifically limited.
  • the material of the filter include: a fluororesin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene); a polyamide resin such as nylon-6 and nylon-6, 6; a polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, Including ultra high molecular weight); Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) is preferable.
  • the pore size of the filter is not particularly limited, but is, for example, about 0.01 to 20.0 ⁇ m, preferably about 0.01 to 5 ⁇ m, and more preferably about 0.01 to 2.0 ⁇ m.
  • the pore size of the filter can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer.
  • a commercially available filter for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
  • two or more filters may be used in combination.
  • the filtration can be performed first using a first filter and then using a second filter having a pore diameter different from that of the first filter.
  • the filtering by the first filter and the filtering by the second filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more, respectively.
  • the second filter a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
  • the colored curable composition of the present invention is cured and preferably used as a cured film.
  • the layer obtained by curing the colored curable composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a colored layer of a color filter. In particular, it can be preferably used as a colored curable composition for dry etching.
  • the thickness of the colored layer is preferably from 0.1 to 1.0 ⁇ m, and more preferably from 0.1 to 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • the color filter of the present invention is a colored pattern formed from the above-described colored curable composition of the present invention.
  • the color filter of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as at least one pattern is a colored pattern formed from the above-described colored curable composition of the present invention, but preferably the color of the present invention shown below.
  • the filter is manufactured by a manufacturing method.
  • a step of forming a colored layer using the colored curable composition of the present invention a step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer, exposure and development Patterning the photoresist layer to obtain a resist pattern, and dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
  • the first colored layer is formed using the above-described colored curable composition of the present invention (also referred to as the first colored curable composition).
  • the 1st colored layer is formed with the colored curable composition of this invention, it is excellent in solvent resistance and alkali developing solution resistance.
  • the first colored layer exposes the organic solvent in the second or third colored radiation-sensitive composition or the second or third colored radiation-sensitive layer formed by the second or third colored radiation-sensitive composition;
  • the color component in the first colored layer may be eluted into the solvent or developer, or the color component in the second or third colored radiation-sensitive composition is Mixed in the first colored layer Fear, etc. can be suppressed.
  • the performance of the finally obtained color filter can be improved.
  • a solid-state imaging device that requires a minute size such that the thickness is 0.1 to 1.0 ⁇ m and / or the pixel pattern size (one side in a square pattern) is 2 ⁇ m or less (for example, 0.5 to 2.0 ⁇ m). It is effective for producing a color filter.
  • the solid-state imaging device 10 includes a light receiving element (photodiode) 42 provided on a silicon substrate, a color filter 13, a planarizing film 14, a microlens 15, and the like.
  • the planarizing film 14 is not necessarily provided.
  • FIG. 4 in order to clarify each part, the ratios of the thicknesses and widths are ignored, and some parts are exaggerated.
  • the support is not particularly limited as long as it is used for a color filter in addition to a silicon substrate.
  • soda glass, borosilicate glass, quartz glass, and a transparent conductive film attached to these are used for liquid crystal display elements.
  • a photoelectric conversion element substrate used for a solid-state imaging device such as an oxide film or silicon nitride.
  • an intermediate layer or the like may be provided between the support and the color filter 13 as long as the present invention is not impaired.
  • a P well 41 is provided on the silicon substrate, and a photodiode 42 is provided on a part of the surface of the P well 41.
  • the photodiode 42 is formed by performing heat treatment after ion-implanting N-type impurities such as P and As into a part of the surface of the P well 41.
  • an impurity diffusion layer 43 having an N-type impurity concentration higher than that of the photodiode 42 is provided in a region different from the above portion on the surface of the P well 41 of the silicon substrate.
  • the impurity diffusion layer 43 is formed by performing heat treatment after ion implantation of N-type impurities such as P and As.
  • the impurity diffusion layer 43 serves as a floating diffusion layer that transfers charges generated when the photodiode 42 receives incident light.
  • the P-well 41 being a P-type impurity layer and the photodiode 42 and the impurity diffusion layer 43 being an N-type impurity layer
  • the P-well 41 is an N-type impurity layer
  • the photodiode 42 and the impurity diffusion layer 43 are being P-type impurity layers. Can also be implemented.
  • An insulating film 47 such as SiO 2 or SiO 2 / SiN / SiO 2 is provided on the P well 41, the photodiode 42, and the impurity diffusion layer 43.
  • An electrode 44 made of tungsten silicide, Al, Cu or the like is provided on the insulating film 47.
  • the electrode 44 serves as the gate of the gate MOS transistor, and can serve as a transfer gate for transferring charges generated in the photodiode 42 to the impurity diffusion layer 43.
  • a wiring layer 45 is formed above the electrode 44. Above the wiring layer 45, a BPSG film 46 and a P-SiN film 48 are provided.
  • the interface between the BPSG film 46 and the P-SiN film 48 is formed so as to be curved downward above the photodiode 42, and serves as an in-layer lens for efficiently guiding incident light to the photodiode 42. Fulfill.
  • a planarizing film layer 49 is formed for the purpose of planarizing the surface of the P-SiN film 48 or uneven portions other than the pixel region.
  • the color filter 13 is formed on the planarizing film layer 49.
  • a colored film (so-called solid film) formed on a silicon substrate without dividing the region is referred to as a “colored (colored radiation sensitive) layer”, and is formed by dividing the region into a pattern.
  • a colored film (for example, a film patterned in a stripe shape) is referred to as a “colored pattern”.
  • a colored pattern that is an element constituting the color filter 13 for example, a colored pattern patterned into a square or a rectangle
  • a colored (red, green, blue) pixel is referred to as a “colored (red, green, blue) pixel”.
  • the color filter 13 includes a plurality of two-dimensionally arranged green pixels (first color pixels) 20G, red pixels (second color pixels) 20R, and blue pixels (third color pixels) 20B.
  • Each of the colored pixels 20R, 20G, and 20B is formed above the light receiving element 42.
  • the green pixels 20G are formed in a checkered pattern, and the blue pixels 20B and the red pixels 20R are formed between the green pixels 20G.
  • the color filter 13 is composed of pixels of three colors, the colored pixels 20R, 20G, and 20B are displayed in a line.
  • the planarization film 14 is formed so as to cover the upper surface of the color filter 13 and planarizes the color filter surface.
  • the microlens 15 is a condensing lens arranged with the convex surface facing upward, and is provided above the planarizing film 14 (or a color filter when the planarizing film 14 is not provided) and above the light receiving element 42. .
  • Each microlens 15 efficiently guides light from the subject to each light receiving element 42.
  • the manufacturing method of the color filter which concerns on embodiment of this invention is demonstrated.
  • the first colored curable composition is the colored curable composition of the present invention.
  • the first colored layer 11 can be formed by applying a colored curable composition on a support by a coating method such as spin coating, slit coating or spray coating, and drying to form a colored layer.
  • a coating method such as spin coating, slit coating or spray coating, and drying to form a colored layer.
  • the thickness of the first colored layer 11 is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1.0 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.8 ⁇ m, and more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.7 ⁇ m. .
  • the first colored curable composition contains a thermosetting compound.
  • a heating device such as a hot plate or an oven.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 120 ° C. to 250 ° C., and more preferably 160 ° C. to 230 ° C.
  • the heating time varies depending on the heating means, but is usually about 3 to 30 minutes when heated on a hot plate, and usually about 30 to 90 minutes when heated in an oven.
  • step (II) patterning is performed by dry etching so that a through hole group is formed in the first colored layer 11 (step (II)).
  • a first colored pattern is formed.
  • the first colored layer is exposed and developed to form a through hole having a desired shape as compared with the case where the through hole group is provided.
  • a hole group can be provided more reliably. This is because, in a colored radiation-sensitive composition in which the content of the colorant with respect to the total solid content of the composition is 50% by mass or more, there is limited room for adding a component that contributes to developability to the composition. This is because reliable patterning becomes difficult.
  • the first colored pattern may be a colored pattern provided as the first color on the support, or may be a colored pattern provided as a pattern for the second color or the third color or later on the support having an existing pattern in some cases. .
  • Dry etching can be performed on the first colored layer 11 using an etching gas with the patterned photoresist layer as a mask.
  • a photoresist layer 51 is formed on the first colored layer 11.
  • a positive or negative radiation-sensitive composition is applied (preferably applied) on the colored layer and dried to form a photoresist layer.
  • a pre-bake treatment it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment.
  • a positive type radiation sensitive composition As the photoresist, for example, a positive type radiation sensitive composition is used.
  • positive type radiation sensitive composition positive type photo sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, h rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays.
  • a positive resist composition suitable for resist can be used.
  • the radiation g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
  • a composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
  • a positive radiation-sensitive composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin indicates that a quinonediazide group is decomposed by irradiation with light having a wavelength of 500 nm or less to produce a carboxyl group, resulting in alkali-solubility from an alkali-insoluble state. It is what you use. Since this positive photoresist has remarkably excellent resolution, it is used for manufacturing integrated circuits such as ICs and LSIs.
  • the quinonediazide compound include a naphthoquinonediazide compound.
  • the thickness of the photoresist layer 51 is preferably 0.1 to 3 ⁇ m, preferably 0.2 to 2.5 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.3 to 2 ⁇ m.
  • the application of the photoresist layer 51 can be suitably performed using the application method for the first colored layer 11 described above.
  • the photoresist layer 51 is exposed and developed to form a resist pattern (patterned photo resist) provided with a resist through-hole group 51A.
  • Resist layer) 52 is formed.
  • the formation of the resist pattern 52 is not particularly limited, and can be performed by appropriately optimizing a conventionally known photolithography technique.
  • a resist pattern 52 as an etching mask used in the next etching is provided on the first colored layer 11.
  • the exposure of the photoresist layer 51 is performed by exposing the positive-type or negative-type radiation-sensitive composition with g-line, h-line, i-line, etc., preferably i-line, through a predetermined mask pattern. be able to. After the exposure, the photoresist is removed in accordance with a region where a colored pattern is to be formed by developing with a developer.
  • Any developer can be used as long as it dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist without affecting the first colored layer containing the colorant.
  • a combination of these organic solvents or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used.
  • an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass is suitable.
  • alkaline compounds include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, Examples include pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene.
  • alkaline aqueous solution is used as a developing solution, generally a washing process is performed with water after development.
  • the through-hole group 120 has a first through-hole part group 121 and a second through-hole part group 122.
  • the through-hole group 120 is provided in a checkered pattern in the first colored layer 11. Therefore, the 1st coloring pattern 12 by which the through-hole group 120 is provided in the 1st coloring layer 11 has a some square-shaped 1st coloring pixel in checkered form.
  • the first colored layer 11 is dry etched using the resist pattern 52 as an etching mask.
  • Representative examples of dry etching include JP-A-59-126506, JP-A-59-46628, JP-A-58-9108, JP-A-58-2809, JP-A-57-148706, JP-A-61-41102, and the like. There is a method described in this publication.
  • Dry etching is preferably performed in the following manner from the viewpoint of forming a pattern cross section closer to a rectangle and reducing damage to the support.
  • a mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas (O 2 ) the first stage etching is performed up to a region (depth) where the support is not exposed, and after this first stage etching, nitrogen gas ( N 2 ) and oxygen gas (O 2 ), and a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed.
  • N 2 nitrogen gas
  • O 2 oxygen gas
  • a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed.
  • the form containing these is preferable.
  • a specific method of dry etching and the first stage etching, second stage etching, and over-etching will be described.
  • Dry etching is performed by obtaining etching conditions in advance by the following method.
  • (1) The etching rate (nm / min) in the first stage etching and the etching rate (nm / min) in the second stage etching are calculated respectively.
  • (2) The time for etching the desired thickness in the first stage etching and the time for etching the desired thickness in the second stage etching are respectively calculated.
  • (3) The first stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above.
  • the second stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above. Alternatively, the etching time may be determined by endpoint detection, and the second stage etching may be performed according to the determined etching time.
  • Overetching time is calculated with respect to the total time of (3) and (4) above, and overetching is performed.
  • the mixed gas used in the first stage etching step preferably contains a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas (O 2 ) from the viewpoint of processing the organic material that is the film to be etched into a rectangular shape.
  • the first stage etching process can avoid damage to the support body by etching to a region where the support body is not exposed.
  • the second etching step and the over-etching step are performed in the first etching step after etching to a region where the support is not exposed by the mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas. From the viewpoint of avoidance, it is preferable to perform the etching process using a mixed gas of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
  • the latter ratio in the total etching amount (the sum of the etching amount in the first-stage etching process and the etching amount in the second-stage etching process) is preferably in the range of more than 0% and not more than 50%. 10 to 20% is more preferable.
  • the etching amount refers to the remaining film thickness of the film to be etched.
  • the etching preferably includes an over-etching process.
  • the overetching process is preferably performed by setting an overetching ratio. Moreover, it is preferable to calculate the overetching ratio from the etching process time to be performed first.
  • the over-etching ratio can be arbitrarily set, but it is preferably 30% or less of the etching processing time in the etching process, and preferably 5 to 25% from the viewpoint of etching resistance of the photoresist and maintaining the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched. Is more preferable, and 10 to 15% is particularly preferable.
  • the resist pattern (that is, etching mask) 52 remaining after the etching is removed.
  • the removal of the resist pattern 52 includes a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent to the resist pattern 52 so that the resist pattern 52 can be removed, and a step of removing the resist pattern 52 using cleaning water. Is preferred.
  • a stripping solution or solvent is applied on at least the resist pattern 52, and the paddle is stagnated for a predetermined time.
  • a step of developing can be mentioned. Although there is no restriction
  • Examples of the step of removing the resist pattern 52 using cleaning water include a step of removing the resist pattern 52 by spraying cleaning water onto the resist pattern 52 from a spray type or shower type spray nozzle. it can.
  • As the washing water pure water can be preferably used.
  • examples of the injection nozzle include an injection nozzle in which the entire support is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support. When the spray nozzle is movable, the resist pattern 52 is more effectively moved by spraying the cleaning water by moving from the support center to the support end twice or more during the step of removing the resist pattern 52. Can be removed.
  • the stripping solution generally contains an organic solvent, but may further contain an inorganic solvent.
  • organic solvents include 1) hydrocarbon compounds, 2) halogenated hydrocarbon compounds, 3) alcohol compounds, 4) ether or acetal compounds, 5) ketones or aldehyde compounds, and 6) ester compounds.
  • the stripping solution preferably contains a nitrogen-containing compound, and more preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
  • the acyclic nitrogen-containing compound is preferably an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound having a hydroxyl group.
  • Specific examples include monoisopropanolamine, diisopropanolamine, triisopropanolamine, N-ethylethanolamine, N, N-dibutylethanolamine, N-butylethanolamine, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine.
  • they are monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and more preferably monoethanolamine (H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 OH).
  • cyclic nitrogen-containing compounds include isoquinoline, imidazole, N-ethylmorpholine, ⁇ -caprolactam, quinoline, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, ⁇ -picoline, ⁇ -picoline, ⁇ -picoline, 2- Preferred examples include pipecoline, 3-pipecoline, 4-pipecoline, piperazine, piperidine, pyrazine, pyridine, pyrrolidine, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-phenylmorpholine, 2,4-lutidine, and 2,6-lutidine.
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • the stripping solution preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
  • acyclic nitrogen-containing compound at least one selected from monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and cyclic
  • the nitrogen-containing compound preferably includes at least one selected from N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, and more preferably includes monoethanolamine and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
  • a deposit means an etching product deposited and deposited on the side wall of a colored layer.
  • the content of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 9 parts by weight or more and 11 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution, and the content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution. On the other hand, what is 65 to 70 mass parts is desirable. Further, the stripping solution is preferably obtained by diluting a mixture of an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound with pure water.
  • the second colored radiation-sensitive composition is formed inside each through-hole in the first through-hole portion group 121 and the second through-hole portion group 122.
  • the first colored layer that is, the first colored pattern 12 in which the through-hole group 120 is formed in the first colored layer 11
  • the 2nd colored radiation sensitive layer 21 is laminated
  • the 2nd coloring pattern 22 which has a some 2nd coloring pixel in the through-hole group 120 of the 1st coloring layer 11 is formed.
  • the second colored pixel is a square pixel.
  • the second colored radiation sensitive layer 21 can be formed in the same manner as the method for forming the first colored layer 11 described above.
  • the thickness of the second colored radiation-sensitive layer 21 here is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.8, and more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.7 ⁇ m. preferable.
  • the second colored radiation-sensitive layer 21 is exposed and developed at a position 21A corresponding to the first through-hole portion group 121 provided in the first colored layer 11 of the second colored radiation-sensitive layer 21.
  • the plurality of second colored pixels 22R provided inside each through hole of the second through hole portion group 122 (step (d)) (schematic cross section of FIG. 8 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-64998) (See diagram).
  • a third colored radiation-sensitive composition is embedded in each through-hole in the second through-hole portion group 122 to obtain a plurality of The third color sensation is formed on the first color layer (that is, the first color pattern 12 in which the second color pattern 22 is formed in the first through-hole portion group 121) so that the third color pixel is formed.
  • the 3rd colored radiation sensitive layer 31 is formed with a radiation composition (process (e)).
  • the third colored pattern 32 having a plurality of third colored pixels is formed in the second through-hole portion group 122 of the first colored layer 11.
  • the third colored pixel is a square pixel.
  • the third colored radiation-sensitive layer 31 can be formed in the same manner as the method for forming the first colored layer 11 described above.
  • the thickness of the third colored radiation-sensitive layer 31 here is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.8, and more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.7 ⁇ m. preferable.
  • the third colored radiation-sensitive layer 31 is exposed and developed at a position 31A corresponding to the second through-hole portion group 122 provided in the first colored layer 11 of the third colored radiation-sensitive layer 31.
  • the color filter 100 having the first colored pattern 12, the second colored pattern 22, and the third colored pattern 32 is removed. Is manufactured (step (f)).
  • the second colored radiation-sensitive composition and the third colored radiation-sensitive composition described above each contain a colorant.
  • the colorant include those described above for the colored curable composition of the present invention, but one of the second colored pixel and the third colored pixel is a red transmissive portion, and the other is a blue transmissive portion. Are preferably a red transmissive part or a blue transmissive part, respectively.
  • the colorant contained in the colored curable composition for forming the red transmission part is C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, And C.I. I.
  • the content of the colorant composition with respect to the total solid content is preferably 30% by mass or more, and 35% by mass. More preferably, it is more preferably 40% by mass or more. Moreover, content with respect to the total solid of the composition of a coloring agent is 90 mass% or less normally, and it is preferable that it is 80 mass% or less.
  • a negative radiation sensitive composition is used for each of the second colored radiation sensitive composition and the third colored radiation sensitive composition.
  • this negative type radiation sensitive composition there is a negative type feeling sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, h rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays.
  • a radiation composition can be used.
  • g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
  • the negative radiation-sensitive composition is preferably a composition containing a photopolymerization initiator, a polymerization component (polymerizable compound), a binder resin (alkali-soluble resin or the like), and the like. Examples described in paragraph Nos. [0017] to [0064] of JP-A-2005-326453.
  • Such a negative radiation sensitive composition utilizes the fact that the photopolymerization initiator initiates the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound upon irradiation with radiation, and as a result, the alkali soluble state becomes alkali insoluble. To do.
  • the exposure with respect to the 2nd colored radiation sensitive layer 21 and the 3rd colored radiation sensitive layer 31 can be performed by exposing with g line
  • the development performed after exposure is usually performed by developing with a developer. Examples of the developer include the same developers as those already described in the exposure and development of the photoresist layer 51. When an alkaline aqueous solution is used as a developer, a washing treatment with water is generally performed after development.
  • the length of one side of the first colored pixel, the second colored pixel, and the third colored pixel is From the viewpoint of image resolution, 0.5 to 1.7 ⁇ m is preferable, and 0.6 to 1.5 ⁇ m is more preferable.
  • the first colored layer, and thus the first colored pixel is formed of the colored curable composition having a high concentration of the colorant of the present invention.
  • the thickness of one colored pixel can be extremely reduced (for example, 0.7 ⁇ m or less). Thereby, it can be set as the manufacturing method of the color filter which can manufacture the color filter by which crosstalk (color mixture of light) was suppressed.
  • the first colored pixel formed by the colored curable composition of the present invention has excellent solvent resistance and alkali developer resistance. Thereby, generation
  • the color filter obtained from the colored curable composition of the present invention can be suitably used for a liquid crystal display (LCD) or a solid-state imaging device (for example, CCD, CMOS, etc.). Moreover, it can use suitably also for image display devices, such as electronic paper and organic EL. In particular, the color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD and a CMOS.
  • the color filter of the present invention is also suitable as a color filter for a liquid crystal display device.
  • a liquid crystal display device provided with such a color filter can display a high-quality image having a good display image color tone and excellent display characteristics.
  • Halogenated phthalocyanine dye F (multimer of halogenated phthalocyanine dye E) ⁇ Non-halogenated phthalocyanine dye>
  • Non-halogenated phthalocyanine dye A: In the following structures, a and b each represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses and satisfy a + b 16. ⁇ Halogenated phthalocyanine pigment> Halogenated phthalocyanine pigment A: P.I. G58 (Pigment Green 58)
  • a flask was charged with compound A (125.0 g, 293.7 mmol) and 146.83 mL of benzonitrile, and stirred for about 1 hour under a nitrogen stream (10 mL / min) until the internal temperature of the flask was stabilized at 150 ° C. did. Thereafter, 26.81 g (84.0 mmol) of zinc iodide was added thereto and reacted for about 48 hours. After cooling, 2000 mL of methanol was added thereto and crystallized by stirring at room temperature. The precipitated solid was taken out by decantation, 2000 mL of methanol was added to the obtained solid, and the mixture was heated and stirred at 60 ° C. for 1 hour.
  • Compound B corresponds to the halogenated phthalocyanine dye E described above.
  • Compound B (30.0 g, 16.97 mmol), THF / water (1: 1) 300 mL, and lithium hydroxide (0.81 g, 33.94 mmol) were charged into the flask, and the internal temperature of the flask was adjusted to 60 ° C. Stir for about 7 hours. After cooling this, 102 mL of 1M hydrochloric acid was added thereto and stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The solution was concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye F confirmed by GPC measurement was 6,500, and the ratio of the weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight (Mw / Mn) was 1.9.
  • Synthesis of Phthalocyanine Dye BE and Non-Halogenated Phthalocyanine Dye >> In Synthesis Example 1, other phthalocyanine dyes were synthesized by appropriately changing the raw materials.
  • Epoxy compound B glycidyl trityl ether, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • Surfactant A Megafac F781 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, fluorine type surfactant)
  • Solvent amount that results in a final solid content concentration of 15% by mass ⁇
  • Examples 2 to 10 Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 45 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 22.5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Radical trapping agent: 100 parts by mass of total solids 5 parts by mass in the part, thermosetting compound: 26.5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of the total solid, surfactant: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of the total solid, and solvent: 15% by mass of the final solid content concentration.
  • Amount ⁇ Example 11 >> -Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 70 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Radical trapping agent: 5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Thermosetting compound: 24 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Surface activity Agent: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of the total solid content.
  • Solvent Amount at which the final solid content concentration becomes 15 mass% ⁇
  • Examples 12 to 20, 22 to 26, Comparative Example 5 >> -Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 50 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 30 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Radical trapping agent: in 100 parts by mass of total solids 5 parts by mass / thermosetting compound: 14 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids / surfactant: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids / solvent: an amount in which the final solid content concentration is 15% by mass ⁇
  • Example 21 >> -Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 30 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 15 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Radical trapping agent: in 100 parts by mass of total solids 5 parts by mass-thermosetting compound: 49 parts by mass in 100 parts
  • ⁇ Comparative Example 1 >> -Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 45 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 22.5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Thermosetting compound: 100 in total solids 31.5 parts by weight in parts by weight, surfactant: 1 part by weight in 100 parts by weight of total solids, solvent: an amount that results in a final solids concentration of 15% by weight ⁇ Comparative Example 2 >> ⁇ P. Pigment dispersion using G58 (prepared above): 67.5 parts by mass / P.
  • Pigment dispersion using Y150 (prepared above): 22.5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids, thermosetting compound: 9 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids, surfactant: all solids 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass / solvent: An amount that results in a final solid content concentration of 15% by mass ⁇ Comparative Example 3 >> ⁇ P.
  • Pigment dispersion using G58 (prepared above): 67.5 parts by mass / P.
  • Pigment dispersion using Y150 (prepared above): 2 in 100 parts by weight of total solids 2.5 parts by mass-radical trapping agent: 5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-thermosetting compound: 4 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-surfactant: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Parts / solvent: an amount at which the final solid content concentration becomes 15% by mass ⁇ Comparative Example 4 >> Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 50 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 30 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Thermosetting compound: 100 parts by mass of total solids 19 parts by mass / surfactant: 1 part by mass of 100 parts by mass of total solids / solvent: the amount at which the final solid content concentration is 15% by mass
  • the composition obtained above was applied onto a 7.5 cm ⁇ 7.5 cm glass substrate using a spin coater so as to form a coating film having a thickness of 0.6 ⁇ m. And dried for 2 minutes (pre-baked) to form a colored film (colored layer). Foreign matter contained in the colored film (colored film after exposure and development after pre-baking) was detected with a foreign substance evaluation apparatus Conplus III (manufactured by Applied Materials). From all the detected foreign matters, foreign matters having a maximum width of 1.0 ⁇ m or more that cause a decrease in yield were visually classified.
  • the number of classified foreign matters having a maximum width of 1.0 ⁇ m or more was counted, and film defects were evaluated using the obtained value as an index.
  • the foreign substance evaluation apparatus Conplus III has a different number of foreign substances depending on the state of the film. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the in-plane uniformity of the film thickness in advance when evaluating the foreign substance. For the group of coating films having in-plane uniformity within 100 nm, the number of foreign matters can be compared in the same row.
  • In-plane uniformity means the film thickness difference between the maximum film thickness and the minimum film thickness (maximum film thickness-minimum film thickness) within the 8-inch wafer surface of the coating film.

Abstract

Provided are: a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer having little occurrence of micro foreign matter; a cured film using same; a color filter; a production method for color filters; a solid state imaging element; a liquid crystal display device; and an organic EL display device. The colored curable composition includes: a coloring agent including a phthalocyanine halide dye; a heat-curable compound; a radical trapping agent; and a solvent that dissolves these.

Description

着色硬化性組成物、これを用いた硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子、液晶表示装置、および有機EL表示装置Colored curable composition, cured film using the same, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device
 本発明は、着色硬化性組成物、これを用いた硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、カラーフィルタの製造方法、固体撮像素子、液晶表示装置、および有機EL表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a colored curable composition, a cured film using the same, a color filter, a method for producing a color filter, a solid-state imaging device, a liquid crystal display device, and an organic EL display device.
 カラーフィルタは、固体撮像素子や液晶表示装置のディスプレイに不可欠な構成部品である。このようなカラーフィルタを形成するために、着色硬化性組成物が採用されている(例えば特許文献1~7)。 The color filter is an indispensable component for the display of a solid-state image sensor or a liquid crystal display device. In order to form such a color filter, a colored curable composition is employed (for example, Patent Documents 1 to 7).
特開2011-191483号公報JP 2011-191383 A 特開2011-253174号公報JP 2011-253174 A 特開2008-3551号公報JP 2008-3551 A 特開2011-257591号公報JP 2011-257591 A 特開2011-141534号公報JP 2011-141534 A 特開2011-107430号公報JP 2011-107430 A 特開2011-107429号公報JP 2011-107429 A
 近年、クロストーク(光の混色)の軽減のため、カラーフィルタを薄膜化することが求められている。ここで、カラーフィルタを薄膜化しても分光波長の形はそのままであることが求められる。そうすると、着色硬化性組成物中の固形分中における着色剤の濃度を大幅に高めることが必要になる。
 また、着色剤であるハロゲン化フタロシアニンは、優れた着色剤として知られている。しかし、本願発明者らが検討した結果、高濃度、薄膜下(1μm以下)においてハロゲン化フタロシアニンを用いると、例えば図1に示すような微小異物1の発生が目立ち、カラーフィルタ(イメージセンサ)製造における歩留への影響があることが分かった。
 本願発明は、かかる問題点を解決するものであって、微小異物の発生が少ない着色層を形成できる着色硬化性組成物、特に薄膜化しても、微小異物の発生が少ない着色層を形成できる着色硬化性組成物を提供することを目的とする。
In recent years, in order to reduce crosstalk (color mixing of light), it is required to make a color filter thin. Here, even if the color filter is thinned, it is required that the spectral wavelength shape remains the same. If it does so, it will be necessary to raise the density | concentration of the coloring agent in solid content in a colored curable composition significantly.
Further, a halogenated phthalocyanine that is a colorant is known as an excellent colorant. However, as a result of examination by the inventors of the present application, when halogenated phthalocyanine is used at a high concentration and under a thin film (1 μm or less), for example, the generation of minute foreign matter 1 as shown in FIG. It has been found that there is an impact on yield.
The present invention solves this problem, and is a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matters, and particularly capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matters even when thinned. An object is to provide a curable composition.
 かかる状況のもと本願発明者が検討を行った結果、着色硬化性組成物中に、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤とラジカルトラップ剤とを配合することによって、微小異物の発生が少ない着色層を形成できることを見出した。
 この理由は推定であるが、以下のように考えられる。着色硬化性組成物中のラジカルトラップ剤がラジカルをトラップする際に、例えば図2に示すように、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料2におけるハロゲン原子およびフタロシアニン骨格と、ラジカルトラップ剤3とが相互作用をすることによって、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料2の凝集を低下させることにより、微小異物の発生を抑制できると考えられる。
 また、例えば図2および図3に示すように、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料2は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料4に比べて粒子径が小さい。このため、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料2とラジカルトラップ剤3とが相互作用した場合の粒子間立体反発能の方が、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料4とラジカルトラップ剤3とが相互作用した場合の粒子間立体反発能よりも大きくなると考えられる。結果として、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料2とラジカルトラップ剤3とが相互作用した後の凝集力変化が、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料4を用いた場合に比べて相対的に顕著に現れ、微小異物の発生をより抑制できると考えられる。
 具体的には、以下の解決手段<1>により、好ましくは、<2>~<18>により、上記課題は解決された。
<1>ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物、ラジカルトラップ剤、およびこれらを溶解する溶剤を含む着色硬化性組成物。
<2>ラジカルトラップ剤が、少なくとも1つ以上の環構造を含む化合物を少なくとも1種を含む、<1>に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
<3>ラジカルトラップ剤が、ヒンダードアミン化合物、紫外線吸収剤および熱重合防止剤から選択される少なくとも1種を含む、<1>または<2>に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
<4>ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料が、下記一般式(1)で表される、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物;一般式(1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 一般式(1)中、Z1~Z16は、それぞれ、水素原子または置換基であり、
 置換基の少なくとも1つは、ハロゲン原子であり、
 置換基の他の少なくとも1つは、芳香族基、または、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基である;
 Mは2つの水素原子、金属原子、金属酸化物または金属ハロゲン化物を表わす;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
<5>一般式(1)において、Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、
 下記一般式(1-2)で表される基、
 一般式(1-4)で表される基、並びに
 カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基、
 から選択される少なくとも1種を表す、<4>に記載の着色硬化性組成物;一般式(1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
一般式(1-2)中、Xは酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、A1は、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基、または、置換基を有していてもよいナフチル基である;一般式(1-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
一般式(1-4)中、R'は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R”は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
<6>一般式(1)において、Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、
 下記一般式(1-2)で表される基若しくは下記一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、かつ、少なくとも1つは一般式(1-2)で表される基である、または、
 下記一般式(1-2)で表される基、並びに、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基を表す、
 <4>または<5>に記載の着色硬化性組成物;一般式(1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
一般式(1-2)中、Xは酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、A1は、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基、または、置換基を有していてもよいナフチル基である;一般式(1-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
一般式(1-4)中、R'は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R”は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
<7>ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料が下記一般式(1-1)で表される、<1>~<3>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物;一般式(1-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
 一般式(1-1)中、Z1~Z16は、それぞれ、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、下記一般式(1-1-2)で表される基、下記一般式(1-3)で表される基、または、下記一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、
 Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、下記一般式(1-1-2)で表される基または下記一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、
 少なくとも1つはハロゲン原子であり、かつ、少なくとも1つは下記一般式(1-1-2)で表される基である;
 Mは2つの水素原子、金属原子、金属酸化物または金属ハロゲン化物を表わす;一般式(1-1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 一般式(1-1-2)中、X1は酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、A11は、1~5つの置換基Rを有するフェニル基、または1~7つの置換基Rを有するナフチル基であり、置換基Rは、ニトロ基、COOR1、OR2、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、シアノ基、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、下記一般式(4)~(6)のいずれかで表される基、または、下記一般式(X)から選択される基を表す;R1は下記一般式(1-3)で表される基または炭素数1~8のアルキル基である;R2は炭素数1~8のアルキル基である;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 一般式(4)中、R4は水素原子、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有してもよいジアリールアミノ基、または置換基を有してもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基を表す;
 一般式(5)中、dは0~2の整数を表し、dが0または1のとき、R5は、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、または置換基を有してもよいアリール基であり、dが2のとき、R5は、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基
を有してもよいジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有してもよいジアリールアミノ基、置換基をまたは置換基を有してもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基を表す;
 一般式(6)中、R6およびR7は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルカルボニル基、置換基を有してもよいアリールカルボニル基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルスルホニル基、置換基を有してもよいアリールスルホニル基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 一般式(X)中、R11は水素原子または炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す;
 n1は1~3の整数を表す;n1が2または3の場合、複数のR11は、それぞれ、同じでも異なっても良い;
 Y1は-O-、-S-、-NR13-、-SO2-、または、-C(=O)-を表す。R13は、水素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す;
 R12は1価の置換基を表す。
一般式(1-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 一般式(1-3)中、R3は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R4は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表し、nは1~4の整数を表す;一般式(1-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
 一般式(1-4)中、R'は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R”は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表す。
<8>Z1~Z16のうち、1~4つが、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を有する、<4>~<7>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
 式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
<9>着色剤が、黄色色素をさらに含む、<1>~<8>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物。
<10>熱硬化性化合物が1分子内にエポキシ基を2つ以上有する、<1>~<9>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物。
<11>着色剤の含有量の合計が、着色硬化性組成物の全固形分に対し60~90質量%である、<1>~<10>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物。
<12>ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料が多量体である、<1>~<11>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物。
<13><1>~<12>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物を硬化してなる硬化膜。<14><1>~<12>のいずれかに記載の着色硬化性組成物を用いた着色層を有するカラーフィルタ。
<15>着色層の厚さが0.1~0.8μmである、<14>に記載のカラーフィルタ。<16>ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物、ラジカルトラップ剤、およびこれらを溶解する溶剤を含む着色硬化性組成物を硬化して着色層を形成する工程、
 着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、
 露光および現像することによりフォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、および
 レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして着色層をドライエッチングする工程、
 を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
<17><14>または<15>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する液晶表示装置、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子または固体撮像素子。
<18><16>に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により製造されたカラーフィルタを有する液晶表示装置、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子または固体撮像素子。
As a result of the study by the present inventors under such circumstances, a colored layer in which the generation of minute foreign matters is reduced by blending a coloring agent containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye and a radical trapping agent in the colored curable composition. It was found that can be formed.
The reason for this is presumed, but is considered as follows. When the radical trapping agent in the colored curable composition traps radicals, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the halogen atom and phthalocyanine skeleton in the halogenated phthalocyanine dye 2 interact with the radical trapping agent 3. By reducing the aggregation of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye 2, it is considered that the generation of minute foreign matters can be suppressed.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the halogenated phthalocyanine dye 2 has a smaller particle diameter than the halogenated phthalocyanine pigment 4. Therefore, the interparticle steric repulsion when the halogenated phthalocyanine dye 2 and the radical trapping agent 3 interact with each other is more effective when the halogenated phthalocyanine pigment 4 and the radical trapping agent 3 interact with each other. It is considered to be larger than Noh. As a result, the cohesive force change after the interaction between the halogenated phthalocyanine dye 2 and the radical trapping agent 3 appears more remarkably as compared with the case where the halogenated phthalocyanine pigment 4 is used, and the generation of minute foreign matters is further increased. It can be suppressed.
Specifically, the above-mentioned problem has been solved by the following means <1>, preferably <2> to <18>.
<1> A colored curable composition comprising a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them.
<2> The colored curable composition according to <1>, wherein the radical trapping agent contains at least one compound containing at least one ring structure.
<3> The colored curable composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the radical trapping agent includes at least one selected from a hindered amine compound, an ultraviolet absorber, and a thermal polymerization inhibitor.
<4> The colored curable composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is represented by the following general formula (1);
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
In the general formula (1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
At least one of the substituents is a halogen atom;
At least one other substituent is an aromatic group, a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), or a group represented by the following formula (2A). A group containing at least one functional group selected from a group to be selected, an amino group and a thiol group;
M represents two hydrogen atoms, metal atoms, metal oxides or metal halides;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
In formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
In formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
<5> In the general formula (1), 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are
A group represented by the following general formula (1-2);
A group represented by the general formula (1-4), a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), and a group represented by the following formula (2A). A group containing at least one functional group selected from a group, an amino group, and a thiol group,
The colored curable composition according to <4>, which represents at least one selected from: General formula (1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
In general formula (1-2), X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. ; General formula (1-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
In general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ″ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
In formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
In formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
<6> In the general formula (1), 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are
It represents a group represented by the following general formula (1-2) or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4), and at least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-2) Or
A group represented by the following general formula (1-2), a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), and a group represented by the following formula (2A) Represents a group containing at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of amino group and thiol group,
<4> or the colored curable composition according to <5>; general formula (1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
In general formula (1-2), X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. ; General formula (1-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
In general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ″ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
In formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
In formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
<7> The colored curable composition according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is represented by the following general formula (1-1): General formula (1-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
In the general formula (1-1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2), or a group represented by the following general formula (1-3). Or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4),
1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 represent a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2) or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4),
At least one is a halogen atom, and at least one is a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2);
M represents two hydrogen atoms, a metal atom, a metal oxide or a metal halide; general formula (1-1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
In general formula (1-1-2), X 1 is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 11 is a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents R, or a naphthyl group having 1 to 7 substituents R. And the substituent R is represented by any one of the following general formulas (4) to (6): a nitro group, COOR 1 , OR 2 , a halogen atom, an aryl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Or a group selected from the following general formula (X); R 1 is a group represented by the following general formula (1-3) or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms; R 2 Is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
In general formula (4), R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an optionally substituted diarylamino group, or an optionally substituted alkylarylamino group;
In the general formula (5), d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 is an alkyl group that may have a substituent or an aryl that may have a substituent. And when d is 2, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. A diarylamino group which may have a substituent, a substituent or an alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent;
In general formula (6), R 6 and R 7 are each an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, An arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
In general formula (X), R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms;
n1 represents an integer of 1 to 3; when n1 is 2 or 3, the plurality of R 11 may be the same or different;
Y 1 represents —O—, —S—, —NR 13 —, —SO 2 —, or —C (═O) —. R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
R 12 represents a monovalent substituent.
General formula (1-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
In the general formula (1-3), R 3 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R 4 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 1 to 4; 1-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
In general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ″ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
<8> 1 to 4 of Z 1 to Z 16 are a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), or a group represented by the following formula (2A). The colored curable composition according to any one of <4> to <7>, which has at least one functional group selected from a group to be selected, an amino group, and a thiol group;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
In formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
In formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
<9> The colored curable composition according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the colorant further contains a yellow pigment.
<10> The colored curable composition according to any one of <1> to <9>, wherein the thermosetting compound has two or more epoxy groups in one molecule.
<11> The colored curable composition according to any one of <1> to <10>, wherein the total content of the colorant is 60 to 90% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored curable composition.
<12> The colored curable composition according to any one of <1> to <11>, wherein the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is a multimer.
<13> A cured film obtained by curing the colored curable composition according to any one of <1> to <12>. <14> A color filter having a colored layer using the colored curable composition according to any one of <1> to <12>.
<15> The color filter according to <14>, wherein the colored layer has a thickness of 0.1 to 0.8 μm. <16> a step of curing a colored curable composition containing a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them to form a colored layer;
Forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer;
A step of patterning a photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of dry etching a colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask,
A method for producing a color filter, comprising:
<17> A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence device or a solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to <14> or <15>.
<18> A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence element, or a solid-state imaging element having a color filter manufactured by the method for manufacturing a color filter according to <16>.
 本発明によれば、微小異物の発生が少ない着色層を形成できる着色硬化性組成物、特に薄膜化しても、微小異物の発生が少ない着色層を形成できる着色硬化性組成物を提供することが可能となった。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matter, and particularly a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matter even when thinned. It has become possible.
着色硬化性組成物を用いて得られた着色層中に存在する微小異物の一例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an example of the micro foreign material which exists in the colored layer obtained using the colored curable composition. ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料とラジカルトラップ剤とが相互作用したときの状態を説明するための概念図である。It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating a state when halogenated phthalocyanine dye and a radical trap agent interact. ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料とラジカルトラップ剤とが相互作用したときの状態を説明するための概念図である。It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating a state when a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment and a radical trap agent interact. カラーフィルタおよび固体撮像素子の構成例を示す概略断面図である。It is a schematic sectional drawing which shows the structural example of a color filter and a solid-state image sensor.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。尚、本願明細書において「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものも包含する。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)も包含する。
 また、本明細書中において、“(メタ)アクリレート”はアクリレートおよびメタクリレートを表し、“(メタ)アクリル”はアクリルおよびメタクリルを表し、“(メタ)アクリロイル”はアクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルを表す。
 「着色層」は、カラーフィルタに用いられる画素を意味する。
 「染料」とは、特定の溶剤に可溶する色素化合物を意味する。ここで、特定の溶剤とは、例えば、後述するハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物およびラジカルトラップ剤を少なくとも溶解する溶剤の欄で例示する有機溶剤が挙げられる。従って、これらの少なくとも1種の溶剤に溶解する色素化合物は、本発明における染料に該当する。
 「ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物およびラジカルトラップ剤を溶解する溶剤」は、例えば、23℃におけるハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物およびラジカルトラップ剤の溶剤への溶解度が1質量%以上であり、1%~90質量%溶解することが好ましく、5~50質量%溶解することがより好ましく、10~50質量%溶解することがさらに好ましい。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail. In the present specification, “to” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in this specification, the notation which does not describe substitution and unsubstituted includes what has a substituent with what does not have a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In the present specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents acrylate and methacrylate, “(meth) acryl” represents acryl and methacryl, and “(meth) acryloyl” represents acryloyl and methacryloyl.
“Colored layer” means a pixel used in a color filter.
“Dye” means a coloring compound that is soluble in a specific solvent. Here, the specific solvent includes, for example, an organic solvent exemplified in the column of a solvent that dissolves at least a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye described later, a thermosetting compound, and a radical trapping agent. Therefore, the pigment compound which dissolves in at least one of these solvents corresponds to the dye in the present invention.
“A solvent for dissolving a colorant, a thermosetting compound and a radical trapping agent containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye” refers to, for example, a solvent for a colorant, a thermosetting compound and a radical trapping agent containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye at 23 ° C. The solubility is 1% by mass or more, preferably 1% to 90% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass, and still more preferably 10 to 50% by mass.
 以下、本発明の着色硬化性組成物、カラーフィルタおよびその製造方法、固体撮像素子、液晶表示装置並びに有機EL表示装置について詳述する。以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されるものではない。 Hereinafter, the colored curable composition, the color filter and the manufacturing method thereof, the solid-state imaging device, the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device of the present invention will be described in detail. The description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
<着色硬化性組成物>
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物(以下、「本発明の組成物」ということがある)は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物、ラジカルトラップ剤、およびこれらを溶解する溶剤を含む。本発明によれば、微小異物の発生が少ない着色層を形成できる着色硬化性組成物、特に薄膜化しても、微小異物の発生が少ない着色層を形成できる着色硬化性組成物を提供することができる。これにより、カラーフィルタを製造する際の歩留を改善することができる。
 また、着色剤として、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料ではなくハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を用いることにより、顔料粒子サイズに起因する微細エリア領域における輝度差(分布)がより少なくなり、安定した分光性能を保持することができる。
<Colored curable composition>
The colored curable composition of the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the composition of the present invention”) comprises a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them. Including. According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matter, and particularly a colored curable composition capable of forming a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matter even when thinned. it can. Thereby, the yield at the time of manufacturing a color filter can be improved.
Further, by using a halogenated phthalocyanine dye instead of a halogenated phthalocyanine pigment as a colorant, the luminance difference (distribution) in a fine area region due to the pigment particle size is reduced, and stable spectral performance can be maintained. it can.
<<着色剤>>
 着色剤としては、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を必須とし、他の着色剤を含んでいてもよく、他の着色剤を含んでいることが好ましい。着色剤の合計量は、全固形分に対し65~85質量%であることが好ましく、70~80質量%であることがより好ましい。本発明の組成物によれば、組成物の全固形分に対する着色剤の含有量を多くした場合にも、微小異物の発生が少ない着色層を形成できるため、カラーフィルタを薄膜化することができる。ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。
<<ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料>>
 本発明の組成物は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む。ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料は、フタロシアニン骨格を有し、かつ、その置換基としてハロゲン原子を1つ以上含む化合物をいう。本発明では、ハロゲン原子を1分子中に4~15つ有することが好ましく、6~14つ有することがより好ましく、8~14つ有することがさらに好ましい。ハロゲン原子としては、塩素原子、フッ素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子等が例示され、塩素原子、フッ素原子または臭素原子が好ましく、塩素原子またはフッ素原子がより好ましく、塩素原子がさらに好ましい。
 本発明で用いられるハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料は、通常、極大吸収波長を600~800nmの領域に有し、好ましくは極大吸収波長を630~750nmの領域に有する化合物である。
<< Colorant >>
As the colorant, a halogenated phthalocyanine dye is essential and may contain other colorants, and preferably contains other colorants. The total amount of the colorant is preferably 65 to 85% by mass, more preferably 70 to 80% by mass with respect to the total solid content. According to the composition of the present invention, even when the content of the colorant with respect to the total solid content of the composition is increased, it is possible to form a colored layer with less generation of fine foreign matters, and thus the color filter can be thinned. . A halogenated phthalocyanine dye may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used together 2 or more types.
<< Halogenated phthalocyanine dye >>
The composition of the present invention comprises a halogenated phthalocyanine dye. The halogenated phthalocyanine dye refers to a compound having a phthalocyanine skeleton and having one or more halogen atoms as a substituent. In the present invention, it is preferable to have 4 to 15 halogen atoms in one molecule, more preferably 6 to 14, more preferably 8 to 14. Examples of the halogen atom include a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom. A chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, or a bromine atom is preferable, a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom is more preferable, and a chlorine atom is further preferable.
The halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention is usually a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the region of 600 to 800 nm, and preferably having a maximum absorption wavelength in the region of 630 to 750 nm.
 本発明で用いるハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料は、下記一般式(1)で表される化合物が好ましい。
一般式(1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
(一般式(1)中、Z1~Z16は、それぞれ、水素原子または置換基であり、置換基の少なくとも1つは、ハロゲン原子であり、置換基の他の少なくとも1つは、芳香族基または、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基である。Mは2つの水素原子、金属原子、金属酸化物または金属ハロゲン化物を表わす。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
(式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す。式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。)
The halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (1).
General formula (1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
(In the general formula (1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom or a substituent, at least one of the substituents is a halogen atom, and at least one of the other substituents is aromatic. A group or a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), a group represented by the following formula (2A), an amino group and a thiol group. (M is a group containing one functional group, M represents two hydrogen atoms, metal atoms, metal oxides or metal halides.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
(In Formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom. In Formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 are bonded to each other. And may form a ring.)
 ここで、一般式(1)における、Z1、Z4、Z5、Z8、Z9、Z12、Z13およびZ16は、フタロシアニン核の8箇所のα位に置換する置換基を表わすため、これらの置換基をα位の置換基とも称する。また、同様に、一般式(1)における、Z2、Z3、Z6、Z7、Z10、Z11、Z14およびZ15は、フタロシアニン核の8箇所のβ位に置換する置換基を表わすため、これらの置換基をβ位の置換基とも称する。
 なお、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料が後述するフタロシアニン多量体である場合、一般式(1)で表される化合物中、Z1~Z16のいずれかが多量体構造を含むことが好ましい。
Here, in the general formula (1), Z 1 , Z 4 , Z 5 , Z 8 , Z 9 , Z 12 , Z 13 and Z 16 represent substituents substituted at eight α positions of the phthalocyanine nucleus. Therefore, these substituents are also referred to as α-position substituents. Similarly, Z 2 , Z 3 , Z 6 , Z 7 , Z 10 , Z 11 , Z 14 and Z 15 in the general formula (1) are substituents substituted at eight β-positions of the phthalocyanine nucleus. These substituents are also referred to as β-position substituents.
When the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is a phthalocyanine multimer to be described later, any of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) preferably contains a multimeric structure.
 上述したカルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、上記式(1A)で表される基、上記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基の中では、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、上記式(1A)で表される基、上記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基が好ましく、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、上記式(1A)で表される基、上記式(2A)で表される基がより好ましく、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、3級アルキルエステル基、上記式(2A)で表される基がさらに好ましい。
 本発明で用いられるハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料は、通常、構造の末端部分に上記官能基を含む。ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料の構造の末端部分に、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、上記式(1A)で表される基、上記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を有することにより、本発明の効果をより効果的に達成することができる。
Among the carboxyl group, epoxy group, aryl ester group, tertiary alkyl ester group, group represented by the above formula (1A), group represented by the above formula (2A), amino group and thiol group, Group, epoxy group, aryl ester group, tertiary alkyl ester group, group represented by the above formula (1A), group represented by the above formula (2A), amino group and thiol group are preferable, carboxyl group, epoxy group , An aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the above formula (1A), and a group represented by the above formula (2A) are more preferable, a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, and the above formula. The group represented by (2A) is more preferable.
The halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention usually contains the above functional group at the terminal portion of the structure. In the terminal part of the structure of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the above formula (1A), a group represented by the above formula (2A), amino By having at least one functional group selected from a group and a thiol group, the effects of the present invention can be achieved more effectively.
<<<アリールエステル基>>>
 アリールエステル基としては、置換または無置換のアリールエステル基、置換または無置換のヘテロアリールエステル基が挙げられる。
 アリールエステル基中に含まれるアリール基としては、炭素数6~18のアリール基が好ましく、炭素数6~14のアリール基がより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリール基がさらに好ましい。具体的には、フェニル基、ナフチル基などが例示される。
 アリールエステル基中に含まれるヘテロアリール基としては、5員環または6員環が好ましい。また、ヘテロアリール基は、単環または縮合環であり、単環または2~8個の環が縮合した縮合環が好ましく、単環または2~4個の環が縮合した縮合環がより好ましく、単環がさらに好ましい。
 アリールエステル基の置換基としては、電子吸引性基が好ましく、例えば、ニトロ基、メトキシ基、シアノ基、カルボキシル基、ケトン基、アシルオキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、パーフルオロアルキル基、アルキルスルホン基、エトキシ基、イソプロポキシ基、t-ブトキシ基、ベンジルオキシ基等が挙げられる。
 本発明で用いられるアリールエステル基としては、例えば、下記構造で表されるものが好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
 上記アリールエステル基の構造中、Rは、水素原子または電子吸引性基を表し、nは、0~3の整数を表す。電子吸引性基としては、上述した電子吸引性基が挙げられ、ニトロ基およびパーフルオロアルキル基(特に、トリフルオロメチル基)が好ましい。Rの置換位置は、オルト位、メタ位およびパラ位のいずれであってもよいが、パラ位が好ましい。nは、0または1が好ましい。
<<< Aryl ester group >>>
Examples of the aryl ester group include a substituted or unsubstituted aryl ester group and a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl ester group.
The aryl group contained in the aryl ester group is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, more preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and further preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Specific examples include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
The heteroaryl group contained in the aryl ester group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The heteroaryl group is a single ring or a condensed ring, preferably a single ring or a condensed ring in which 2 to 8 rings are condensed, more preferably a single ring or a condensed ring in which 2 to 4 rings are condensed, A monocycle is more preferred.
The substituent of the aryl ester group is preferably an electron withdrawing group, for example, a nitro group, a methoxy group, a cyano group, a carboxyl group, a ketone group, an acyloxy group, a hydroxy group, a perfluoroalkyl group, an alkylsulfone group, an ethoxy group. , Isopropoxy group, t-butoxy group, benzyloxy group and the like.
As an aryl ester group used by this invention, what is represented by the following structure is preferable, for example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
In the structure of the aryl ester group, R represents a hydrogen atom or an electron-withdrawing group, and n represents an integer of 0 to 3. Examples of the electron-withdrawing group include the above-described electron-withdrawing group, and a nitro group and a perfluoroalkyl group (particularly, a trifluoromethyl group) are preferable. The substitution position of R may be any of the ortho-position, meta-position and para-position, but the para-position is preferred. n is preferably 0 or 1.
<<<3級アルキルエステル基>>>
 3級アルキルエステル基としては、置換または無置換の3級アルキルエステル基が挙げられる。3級アルキルエステル基における3級アルキル基としては、t-ブチル基、t-ペンチル基、t-ヘキシル基等が挙げられ、特に、t-ブチル基およびt-ペンチル基が好ましい。
<<< Tertiary alkyl ester group >>
The tertiary alkyl ester group includes a substituted or unsubstituted tertiary alkyl ester group. Examples of the tertiary alkyl group in the tertiary alkyl ester group include a t-butyl group, a t-pentyl group, a t-hexyl group, and the like, and a t-butyl group and a t-pentyl group are particularly preferable.
<<<式(1A)で表される基>>>
 上記式(1A)で表される基は、上記式(1A)中、R1がフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す。
 フッ素原子を有するアルキル基としては、フッ素原子を2つ以上有する炭素数が1~10のフッ素原子を有するアルキル基が好ましく、直鎖状、分岐鎖状および環状のいずれであってもよいが、直鎖状または分岐鎖状のものが好ましい。フッ素原子を有するアルキル基における炭素数は、1~10がより好ましく、1~5がさらに好ましく、1~4が特に好ましい。フッ素原子を有するアルキル基は、末端の構造が(-CF3)であることが好ましい。フッ素原子を有するアルキル基は、フッ素原子の置換率が、40~100%であることが好ましく、50~100%であることがより好ましい。ここで、フッ素原子の置換率とは、フッ素原子を有するアルキル基のうち、水素原子がフッ素原子に置換されている比率(%)のことをいう。
<<< Group Represented by Formula (1A) >>>
The group represented by the above formula (1A) represents an alkyl group in which R 1 has a fluorine atom in the above formula (1A).
The alkyl group having a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having 2 or more fluorine atoms and a fluorine atom having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, which may be linear, branched or cyclic, A linear or branched one is preferred. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group having a fluorine atom is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and particularly preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group having a fluorine atom preferably has a terminal structure of (—CF 3 ). The alkyl group having a fluorine atom preferably has a fluorine atom substitution rate of 40 to 100%, more preferably 50 to 100%. Here, the substitution rate of fluorine atoms refers to the ratio (%) in which hydrogen atoms are substituted with fluorine atoms in alkyl groups having fluorine atoms.
<<<式(2A)で表される基>>>
 上記式(2A)で表される基は、上記式(2A)中、R2およびR3が、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
 上記式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、置換または無置換のアルキル基のいずれであってもよく、また、直鎖状、分岐鎖状およびR2とR3が互いに結合した環状のいずれであってもよい。特に、直鎖状またはR2とR3が互いに結合した環状の炭素数3~5の無置換のアルキル基が好ましい。R2およびR3の少なくとも一方が直鎖状のアルキル基である場合、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、炭素数が1~5であることが好ましく、炭素数が1~4であることがより好ましい。
 特に、上記式(2A)中、R2およびR3としては、それぞれ独立して、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、またはブチル基であるか、R2とR3が互いに結合した炭素数4~6の環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
<<< Group Represented by Formula (2A) >>>
In the group represented by the formula (2A), in the formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 are bonded to each other to form a ring. May be.
In the above formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 each independently may be a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, and are linear, branched, and R 2 and R 3 are It may be any one of the rings bonded to each other. In particular, a linear or cyclic C3-C5 unsubstituted alkyl group in which R 2 and R 3 are bonded to each other is preferable. When at least one of R 2 and R 3 is a linear alkyl group, each of R 2 and R 3 preferably independently has 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and has 1 to 4 carbon atoms. More preferably.
In particular, in the above formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, or a butyl group, or 4 carbon atoms in which R 2 and R 3 are bonded to each other. A cyclic alkyl group of 6 to 6 is preferred.
<<本発明で用いられる置換基の結合形態>>
 本発明で用いられるハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料は、上述した官能基を有するが、この官能基は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料のフタロシアニン骨格に直接に結合していてもよいし、何らかの連結基を介して結合していてもよい。例えば、後述する置換基T群の置換基の水素原子が置換された形態する形態が挙げられる。
<< Binding Form of Substituent Used in the Present Invention >>
The halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention has the above-described functional group, but this functional group may be directly bonded to the phthalocyanine skeleton of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye, or may be bonded through any linking group. It may be. For example, the form which the hydrogen atom of the substituent of the substituent T group mentioned later is substituted is mentioned.
 一般式(1)において、Z1~Z16は、それぞれ、水素原子または置換基であり、置換基の少なくとも1つは、ハロゲン原子であり、置換基の他の少なくとも1つは、芳香族基を含む基である。ハロゲン原子を1分子中に5~15つ有することが好ましく、6~14つ有することがより好ましい。ハロゲン原子としては、塩素原子、フッ素原子または臭素原子が好ましく、塩素原子またはフッ素原子がより好ましく、塩素原子がさらに好ましい。
 芳香族基を含む基(好ましくは、後述する一般式(1-2)で表される基)中の芳香族基は、ベンゼン環基またはナフタレン環基が好ましく、ベンゼン環基がより好ましい。芳香族基を有する基の数は、1分子中、1~11つであることが好ましく、1~10つであることがより好ましく、2~7つであることがさらに好ましい。また、Z1~Z16は、ハロゲン原子以外の置換基がすべて、芳香族基を有する基である態様も好ましい。
 置換基としては、フタロシアニン化合物が染料としての機能を失わない限り特に定めるものではないが、後述する置換基Tが例示される。
In the general formula (1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom or a substituent, at least one of the substituents is a halogen atom, and at least one of the other substituents is an aromatic group. Is a group containing It is preferable to have 5 to 15 halogen atoms in one molecule, and more preferable to have 6 to 14 halogen atoms. As a halogen atom, a chlorine atom, a fluorine atom, or a bromine atom is preferable, a chlorine atom or a fluorine atom is more preferable, and a chlorine atom is further more preferable.
The aromatic group in the group containing an aromatic group (preferably a group represented by the general formula (1-2) described later) is preferably a benzene ring group or a naphthalene ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group. The number of groups having an aromatic group is preferably 1 to 11 per molecule, more preferably 1 to 10, and even more preferably 2 to 7. Also preferred is an embodiment in which Z 1 to Z 16 are all groups other than halogen atoms having an aromatic group.
The substituent is not particularly defined as long as the phthalocyanine compound does not lose its function as a dye, and examples thereof include substituent T described later.
 一般式(1)において、Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、下記一般式(1-2)で表される基、一般式(1-4)で表される基と、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、上記式(1A)で表される基、上記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基と、から選択される少なくとも1種を表すことが好ましい。
 特に、一般式(1)において、Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、(i)下記一般式(1-2)で表される基若しくは一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、かつ、少なくとも1つは一般式(1-2)で表される基である、または、(ii)下記一般式(1-2)で表される基、並びに、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基を表す、ことが好ましい。
 また、一般式(1)において、Z1~Z16のうち、少なくとも1つは一般式(1-2)
で表される基であることが好ましく、より好ましくは、Z1~Z16のうち、2~6つが一般式(1-2)で表される基または一般式(1-4)で表される基であり、かつ、少なくとも1つは一般式(1-2)で表される基である。
一般式(1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(一般式(1-2)中、Xは酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、A1は、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基、または、置換基を有していてもよいナフチル基である。)
一般式(1-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
(一般式(1-4)中、R'は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R”は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表す。)
In the general formula (1), 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are a group represented by the following general formula (1-2), a group represented by the general formula (1-4), a carboxyl group At least one functional group selected from a group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the above formula (1A), a group represented by the above formula (2A), an amino group, and a thiol group It is preferable to represent at least one selected from a group containing a group.
In particular, in the general formula (1), 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are represented by (i) a group represented by the following general formula (1-2) or a general formula (1-4). And at least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-2), or (ii) a group represented by the following general formula (1-2), and a carboxyl group, At least one functional group selected from an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), a group represented by the following formula (2A), an amino group, and a thiol group It preferably represents a containing group.
In the general formula (1), at least one of Z 1 to Z 16 represents the general formula (1-2).
And, more preferably, 2 to 6 of Z 1 to Z 16 are represented by the group represented by the general formula (1-2) or the general formula (1-4). And at least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-2).
Formula (1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
(In the general formula (1-2), X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. is there.)
General formula (1-4)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
(In the general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ″ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4)
 一般式(1-2)中、Xは酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、酸素原子が好ましい。Xが酸素原子であると、得られるフタロシアニン化合物の最大吸収波長を短波長側にシフトできる。
 A1は、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基、または、置換基を有していてもよいナフチル基であり、1~5つの置換基を有するフェニル基または1~7つの置換基を有するナフチル基が好ましく、1~5つの置換基を有するフェニル基がより好ましい。
In the general formula (1-2), X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and preferably an oxygen atom. When X is an oxygen atom, the maximum absorption wavelength of the obtained phthalocyanine compound can be shifted to the short wavelength side.
A 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent, and is a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents or 1 to 7 substituents. And a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents is more preferable.
 一般式(1-2)で表される基は、下記一般式(1-1-2)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
一般式(1-1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
(一般式(1-1-2)中、X1は酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、A11は、1~5つの置換基Rを有するフェニル基、または1~7つの置換基Rを有するナフチル基であり、置換基Rは、ニトロ基、COOR1(R1は一般式(1-3)で表される基または炭素数1~8のアルキル基である)、OR2(R2は炭素数1~8のアルキル基)、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、シアノ基、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、一般式(4)~(6)のいずれかで表される基、または、一般式(X)から選択される基を表す。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
(一般式(4)中、R4は水素原子、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有してもよいジアリールアミノ基、または置換基を有してもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基を表す。
 一般式(5)中、dは0~2の整数を表し、dが0または1のとき、R5は、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、または置換基を有してもよいアリール基であり、dが2のとき、R5は、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有してもよいジアリールアミノ基、置換基をまたは置換基を有してもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基を表す。
 一般式(6)中、R6およびR7は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルカルボニル基、置換基を有してもよいアリールカルボニル基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルスルホニル基、置換基を有してもよいアリールスルホニル基を表す。)
一般式(X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
(一般式(X)中、R11は水素原子または炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す。n1は1~3の整数を表す。n1が2または3の場合、複数のR11は、それぞれ、同じでも異なっても良い。Y1は-O-、-S-、-NR13-(R13は、水素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。)、-SO2-、または、-C(=O)-を表す。R12は1価の置換基を表す。)
The group represented by the general formula (1-2) is more preferably a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2).
Formula (1-1-2)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
(In the general formula (1-1-2), X 1 represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 11 represents a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents R, or a naphthyl having 1 to 7 substituents R. The substituent R is a nitro group, COOR 1 (R 1 is a group represented by the general formula (1-3) or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), OR 2 (R 2 is carbon An alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, an aryl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a group represented by any one of the general formulas (4) to (6), or a general formula ( Represents a group selected from X).)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
(In the general formula (4), R 4 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents a diarylamino group which may have a substituent or an alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent.
In the general formula (5), d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 is an alkyl group that may have a substituent or an aryl that may have a substituent. And when d is 2, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents a diarylamino group which may have a substituent, a substituent or an alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent.
In general formula (6), R 6 and R 7 are each an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, The arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, the alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, and the arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent are represented. )
Formula (X)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
(In the general formula (X), R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. N1 represents an integer of 1 to 3. When n1 is 2 or 3, a plurality of R 11 are each Y 1 may be —O—, —S—, —NR 13 — (R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms), —SO 2 —, or And —C (═O) —, R 12 represents a monovalent substituent.)
 一般式(1-1-2)中、X1は酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、酸素原子が好ましい。X1が酸素原子であると、得られるフタロシアニン化合物の最大吸収波長を短波長側にシフトできる。
 A11は、1~5つの置換基を有するフェニル基または1~7つの置換基を有するナフチル基であり、1~5つの置換基を有するフェニル基がより好ましい。
In general formula (1-1-2), X 1 is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, preferably an oxygen atom. When X 1 is an oxygen atom, the maximum absorption wavelength of the obtained phthalocyanine compound can be shifted to the short wavelength side.
A 11 is a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents or a naphthyl group having 1 to 7 substituents, and more preferably a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents.
 フェニル基の置換基数は、1~5の整数であるが、グラム吸光係数の観点から、より好ましくは1~3の整数を示し、置換基がハロゲン原子の場合には、置換基数は1~5の整数のいずれも好ましい。ナフチル基の置換基数は、1~7の整数であるが、グラム吸光係数(グラム当たりの吸光度)の観点から、1~5の整数であることが好ましく、1~3の整数であることがより好ましく、1または2であることがさらに好ましい。 The number of substituents of the phenyl group is an integer of 1 to 5, but more preferably an integer of 1 to 3 from the viewpoint of the Gram extinction coefficient. When the substituent is a halogen atom, the number of substituents is 1 to 5 Any integer of is preferred. The number of substituents of the naphthyl group is an integer of 1 to 7, but from the viewpoint of the gram extinction coefficient (absorbance per gram), it is preferably an integer of 1 to 5, more preferably an integer of 1 to 3. 1 or 2 is more preferable.
 ナフチル基とX1との結合位置は特に限定されず、下記1位(1-ナフチル基)または2位(2-ナフチル基)のいずれであってもよい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 同様にして、置換基のナフタレン環への結合位置もまた、特に制限されない。
 例えば、ナフチル基とX1との結合位置が1位(1-ナフチル基)である場合には、置換基のナフタレン環への結合位置は、2位、3位、4位、5位、6位、7位または8位のいずれでもよいが、耐熱性や溶剤溶解性などを考慮すると、2位、3位が好ましく、2位がより好ましい。また、ナフチル基とX1との結合位置が2位(2-ナフチル基)である場合には、置換基のナフタレン環への結合位置は、1位、3位、4位、5位、6位、7位または8位のいずれでもよいが、3位、6位が好ましく、耐熱性や溶剤溶解性などを考慮すると、3位がより好ましい。
The bonding position between the naphthyl group and X 1 is not particularly limited, and may be any of the following 1-position (1-naphthyl group) or 2-position (2-naphthyl group).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Similarly, the bonding position of the substituent to the naphthalene ring is not particularly limited.
For example, when the bonding position of the naphthyl group and X 1 is the 1-position (1-naphthyl group), the bonding position of the substituent to the naphthalene ring is the 2-position, 3-position, 4-position, 5-position, 6 However, in consideration of heat resistance and solvent solubility, the 2nd and 3rd positions are preferable, and the 2nd position is more preferable. When the bonding position between the naphthyl group and X 1 is the 2-position (2-naphthyl group), the bonding positions of the substituent to the naphthalene ring are the 1-position, 3-position, 4-position, 5-position, 6-position, However, the 3rd and 6th positions are preferable, and the 3rd position is more preferable in consideration of heat resistance and solvent solubility.
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基Rは、ニトロ基、COOR1(R1は一般式(1-3)で表される基または炭素数1~8のアルキル基である)、OR2(R2は炭素数1~8のアルキル基)、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、シアノ基、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、一般式(4)~(6)のいずれかで表される基、または、一般式(X)から選択される基である。 The substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is a nitro group, COOR 1 (R 1 is a group represented by the general formula (1-3) or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), OR 2 (R 2 Is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms), a halogen atom, an aryl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a group represented by any one of the general formulas (4) to (6), or It is a group selected from the formula (X).
 フェニル基またはナフチル基に置換基Rが複数存在する場合、複数のRは、同一であっても異なるものであってもよい。
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基RがCOOR1の場合、COOR1におけるR1は、置換されていてもよい炭素数1~8のアルキル基、または下記一般式(1-3)で表される基を表す。
一般式(1-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
(一般式(1-3)中、R3は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R4は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表し、nは1~4の整数を表す。)
When a plurality of substituents R are present in the phenyl group or naphthyl group, the plurality of Rs may be the same or different.
When the substituent R of the phenyl or naphthyl group is COOR 1, R 1 in the COOR 1 is represented by an alkyl group substituted by 1 carbon atoms which may be 1-8 or the following general formula, (1-3) Represents a group.
General formula (1-3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
(In the general formula (1-3), R 3 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R 4 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 1 to 4)
 R1が炭素数1~8のアルキル基の場合、炭素数1~8のアルキル基は、溶剤溶解性の点から、好ましくは炭素数1~3のアルキル基である。炭素数1~8のアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、iso-プロピル基、n-ブチル基、iso-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、n-ペンチル基、n-ヘキシル基、シクロヘキシル基、n-ヘプチル基、n-オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基等の直鎖、分岐または環状のアルキル基が挙げられる。「炭素数1~8のアルキル基に場合によっては存在する置換基」としては、炭素数1~8のアルキルオキシ基、ハロゲン原子またはアリール基が例示される。
 「炭素数1~8のアルキル基に場合によっては存在する置換基」である炭素数1~8のアルキルオキシ基としては、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、n-プロピルオキシ基、iso-プロピルオキシ基、n-ブチルオキシ基、iso-ブチルオキシ基、sec-ブチルオキシ基、t-ブチルオキシ基、n-ペンチルオキシ基、n-ヘキシルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基、n-ヘプチルオキシ基、n-オクチルオキシ基、2-エチルヘキシルオキシ基などの直鎖、分岐または環状のアルキルオキシ基が挙げられる。これらの中でも、炭素数1~4のアルキルオキシ基が好ましい。
 「炭素数1~8のアルキル基に場合によっては存在する置換基」であるハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子およびヨウ素原子が挙げられる。これらの中でも、フッ素原子または塩素原子が好ましい。
 「炭素数1~8のアルキル基に場合によっては存在する置換基」であるアリール基としては、フェニル基、p-メトキシフェニル基、p-t-ブチルフェニル基、p-クロロフェニル基などが挙げられる。これらの中でも、フェニル基が好ましい。これらの置換基は複数個存在していても良く、複数個存在する場合には同種若しくは異種のいずれであっても良く、同種の場合においても同一若しくは異なっていても良い。アルキル基の置換基の数は特に限定されるものではないが、1~3個であることが好ましく、1または2個であることが好ましい。
When R 1 is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of solvent solubility. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms include methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, iso-propyl group, n-butyl group, iso-butyl group, sec-butyl group, t-butyl group, and n-pentyl. And straight-chain, branched or cyclic alkyl groups such as n-hexyl group, cyclohexyl group, n-heptyl group, n-octyl group and 2-ethylhexyl group. Examples of the “substituent optionally present in the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms” include an alkyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a halogen atom or an aryl group.
Examples of the alkyloxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, which is a “substituent optionally present in an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms”, include a methoxy group, an ethoxy group, an n-propyloxy group, an iso-propyloxy group, n-butyloxy group, iso-butyloxy group, sec-butyloxy group, t-butyloxy group, n-pentyloxy group, n-hexyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group, n-heptyloxy group, n-octyloxy group, 2- Examples include linear, branched or cyclic alkyloxy groups such as an ethylhexyloxy group. Among these, an alkyloxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable.
Examples of the halogen atom as the “substituent optionally present in the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms” include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom. Among these, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom is preferable.
Examples of the aryl group that is a “substituent optionally present in an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms” include a phenyl group, a p-methoxyphenyl group, a pt-butylphenyl group, a p-chlorophenyl group, and the like. . Among these, a phenyl group is preferable. A plurality of these substituents may be present. When a plurality of these substituents are present, they may be the same or different, and even in the same case, they may be the same or different. The number of substituents on the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 1 or 2.
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基RがCOOR1であり、R1が一般式(1-3)で表される基の場合、一般式(1-3)で表される基におけるR3は、エーテル溶剤溶解性への効果の点から1~3のアルキレン基が好ましい。
 炭素数1~3のアルキレン基としては、メチレン基、エチレン基、n-プロピレン基、iso-プロピレン基が挙げられる。好ましくは、エチレン基、プロピレン基である。
 また、一般式(1-3)で表される基におけるR4は、分子量の観点から1~8のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは1~4のアルキル基である。炭素数1~8のアルキル基としては、上記R1の欄で記載されたものが挙げられる。一般式(1-3)で表される基におけるnは、分子量の観点から、1~4の整数であり、1~3の整数であることが好ましい。
When the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is COOR 1 and R 1 is a group represented by the general formula (1-3), R 3 in the group represented by the general formula (1-3) is From the viewpoint of the effect on ether solvent solubility, 1 to 3 alkylene groups are preferred.
Examples of the alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms include a methylene group, an ethylene group, an n-propylene group, and an iso-propylene group. Preferably, they are an ethylene group and a propylene group.
R 4 in the group represented by the general formula (1-3) is an alkyl group of 1 to 8, more preferably an alkyl group of 1 to 4, from the viewpoint of molecular weight. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms include those described in the above R 1 column. N in the group represented by the general formula (1-3) is an integer of 1 to 4, and preferably an integer of 1 to 3, from the viewpoint of molecular weight.
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基RがOR2の場合、OR2におけるR2は、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、好ましくは色素の結晶性及び取扱性の良さの点から、炭素数1~3のアルキル基を示す。
 R2で表される炭素数1~8のアルキル基としては、上記置換基Rの一例であるCOOR1のR1において記載したものと同様の置換基が挙げられ、好ましい範囲も同義である。
When the substituent R of the phenyl or naphthyl group is OR 2, R 2 in OR 2 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably from the viewpoint of crystallinity and better handling property of the dye, a C1- 3 alkyl groups are shown.
Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms represented by R 2 include the same substituents as those described in R 1 of COOR 1 which is an example of the substituent R, and the preferred range is also synonymous.
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基Rがハロゲン原子の場合、ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子およびヨウ素原子が挙げられ、フッ素原子、塩素原子またはヨウ素原子であることが好ましい。中でも、色素の分子量が小さくなり、グラム吸光係数が高くなるため、塩素原子、フッ素原子が好ましい。 When the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is a halogen atom, examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom and an iodine atom, and a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom or an iodine atom is preferable. Among them, a chlorine atom and a fluorine atom are preferable because the molecular weight of the dye is reduced and the gram absorption coefficient is increased.
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基Rがアリール基の場合、アリール基としては、フェニル基、p-メトキシフェニル基、p-t-ブチルフェニル基、p-クロロフェニル基、等のアリール基が挙げられる。中でも、色素の分子量が小さくなり、グラム吸光係数が高くなるため、フェニル基が好ましい。 When the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is an aryl group, examples of the aryl group include aryl groups such as a phenyl group, a p-methoxyphenyl group, a pt-butylphenyl group, and a p-chlorophenyl group. Among them, a phenyl group is preferable because the molecular weight of the dye is reduced and the gram extinction coefficient is increased.
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基Rがアルキル基の場合、炭素数1~8のアルキル基としては、上記置換基Rの一例であるCOOR1のR1において記載したものと同様の置換基が挙げられ、好ましい範囲も同義である。好ましくは、色素の結晶性及び取扱性の良さの点から、炭素数1~3のアルキル基である。
 置換基Rがアルキル基の場合にこのアルキル基に存在しうる置換基としては、ハロゲン原子が例示され、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子およびヨウ素原子が好ましく、フッ素原子または塩素原子がより好ましい。アルキル基の置換基であるハロゲン原子は複数個存在していても良く、複数個存在する場合には同一若しくは異なっていても良い。アルキル基の置換基の数は特に限定されるものではないが、1~3個であることが好ましい。
When the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is an alkyl group, examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms include the same substituents as those described in R 1 of COOR 1 as an example of the substituent R. The preferred range is also synonymous. Preferably, it is an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of crystallinity of the dye and good handleability.
When the substituent R is an alkyl group, examples of the substituent that may be present in the alkyl group include a halogen atom, preferably a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, and more preferably a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom. There may be a plurality of halogen atoms as substituents for the alkyl group, and when there are a plurality of halogen atoms, they may be the same or different. The number of substituents on the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 3.
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基Rが上記一般式(4)~(6)から選択される基である場合について説明する。
 一般式(4)中のR4は水素原子、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基を表し、置換基を有してもよいジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有してもよいジアリールアミノ基、または置換基を有してもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基を表し、水素原子、総炭素数1~20のアルキル基、総炭素数6~20のアリール基、総炭素数2~20のジアルキルアミノ基、総炭素数12~20のジアリールアミノ基、または、総炭素数7~20アルキルアリールアミノ基が好ましく、総炭素数1~20のアルキル基、総炭素数2~20のジアルキルアミノ基、総炭素数12~20のジアリールアミノ基、または総炭素数7~20アルキルアリールアミノ基がさらに好ましく、総炭素数12~20のジアリールアミノ基または総炭素数2~20のジアルキルアミノ基が特に好ましい。
 上記アルキル部位およびアリール部位はさらに置換基を有しても良く、置換基としては、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基またはハロゲン原子等が好ましく、アルコキシ基がより好ましく、メトキシ基またはエトキシ基がさらに好ましい。また、置換基を有していない態様も好ましい。
The case where the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is a group selected from the above general formulas (4) to (6) will be described.
R 4 in the general formula (4) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, a substituted group A diarylamino group which may have a group or an alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, A dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkylarylamino group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and a total carbon number. More preferred is a dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms in total, or an alkylarylamino group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms in total, and a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms in total or Dialkylamino groups of primes 2-20 is particularly preferred.
The alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety may further have a substituent, and the substituent is preferably an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group or a halogen atom, and an alkoxy group Are more preferable, and a methoxy group or an ethoxy group is more preferable. Moreover, the aspect which does not have a substituent is also preferable.
 一般式(5)中、dは0~2の整数を表し、R5は、dが0または1のとき、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、または置換基を有してもよいアリール基であり、dが2のとき、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有してもよいジアリールアミノ基、または置換基を有してもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基を表す。R5は、dが2のとき、炭素数2~20のジアルキルアミノ基、炭素数12~20のジアリールアミノ基、炭素数7~20アルキルアリールアミノ基が好ましい。
 上記アルキル部位およびアリール部位はさらに置換基を有しても良く、その置換基は、後述する置換基Tが例示され、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基またはハロゲン原子等が好ましく、アルコキシ基がより好ましく、メトキシ基またはエトキシ基がさらに好ましい。また、置換基を有していない態様も好ましい。
In the general formula (5), d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and R 5 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent when d is 0 or 1, or an aryl which may have a substituent. And when d is 2, the alkyl group which may have a substituent, the aryl group which may have a substituent, the dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, and the substituent Or a diarylamino group which may be substituted or an alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent. R 5 is preferably a dialkylamino group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a diarylamino group having 12 to 20 carbon atoms, or an alkylarylamino group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms when d is 2.
The alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later. An alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylthio group, and an arylthio group. Or a halogen atom etc. are preferable, an alkoxy group is more preferable, and a methoxy group or an ethoxy group is further more preferable. Moreover, the aspect which does not have a substituent is also preferable.
 一般式(6)中、R6およびR7は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルカルボニル基、置換基を有してもよいアリールカルボニル基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルスルホニル基、置換基を有してもよいアリールスルホニル基を表し、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~20のアリール基、炭素数2~20のアルキルカルボニル基、炭素数7~20のアリールカルボニル基、炭素数1~20のアルキルスルホニル基、炭素数6~20のアリールスルホニル基が好ましく、炭素数2~20のアルキルカルボニル基、炭素数7~20のアリールカルボニル基、炭素数1~20のアルキルスルホニル基、炭素数6~20のアリールスルホニル基がより好ましい。
 上記アルキル部位およびアリール部位はさらに置換基を有しても良く、その置換基は、後述する置換基Tが例示され、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基またはハロゲン原子等が好ましく、アルコキシ基がより好ましく、メトキシ基またはエトキシ基がさらに好ましい。また、置換基を有していない態様も好ましい。置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基等の例は、後述する。
In general formula (6), R 6 and R 7 are each an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, An arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a carbon number of 6 An aryl group having ˜20, an alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are preferable. An alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, an arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms are more preferable.
The alkyl moiety and the aryl moiety may further have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later. An alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylthio group, and an arylthio group. Or a halogen atom etc. are preferable, an alkoxy group is more preferable, and a methoxy group or an ethoxy group is further more preferable. Moreover, the aspect which does not have a substituent is also preferable. Examples of the alkyl group and the like which may have a substituent will be described later.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアルキル基の好適な例を示す。置換基を有してもよいアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、ドデシル基、ヘキサデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、1-ノルボルニル基、1-アダマンチル基、フェノキシエチル基、ベンジル基、フェニルエチル基、N-ブチルアミノスルホニルプロピル基、N-ブチルアミノカルボニルメチル基、N,N-ジブチルアミノスルホニルプロピル基、エトキシエトキシエチル基、2-クロロエチル基が挙げられ、さらに好ましくはメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、tert-ブチル基、フェノキシエチル基、ベンジル基、フェニルエチル基、N-ブチルアミノスルホニルプロピル基、N-ブチルアミノカルボニルメチル基、N,N-ジブチルアミノスルホニルプロピル基、エトキシエトキシエチル基が挙げられ、特に好ましくはメチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、tert-ブチル基、フェノキシエチル基、ベンジル基、フェニルエチル基、N-ブチルアミノスルホニルプロピル基、N-ブチルアミノカルボニルメチル基、N,N-ジブチルアミノスルホニルプロピル基、エトキシエトキシエチル基が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the alkyl group that may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of the alkyl group which may have a substituent include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, a heptyl group, an octyl group, a 2-ethylhexyl group, a dodecyl group, Hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-norbornyl group, 1-adamantyl group, phenoxyethyl group, benzyl group, phenylethyl group, N-butylaminosulfonylpropyl group, N-butylaminocarbonylmethyl group, N, N-dibutylaminosulfonylpropyl group, ethoxyethoxyethyl group, 2-chloroethyl group can be mentioned, more preferably methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, tert-butyl group, phenoxyethyl group, benzyl group, Phenylethyl group, N-butyl Examples thereof include aminosulfonylpropyl group, N-butylaminocarbonylmethyl group, N, N-dibutylaminosulfonylpropyl group, and ethoxyethoxyethyl group. Particularly preferred are methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, tert-butyl group, phenoxyethyl. Group, benzyl group, phenylethyl group, N-butylaminosulfonylpropyl group, N-butylaminocarbonylmethyl group, N, N-dibutylaminosulfonylpropyl group and ethoxyethoxyethyl group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアリール基の好適な例を示す。この様なアリール基としては、フェニル基、2-クロロフェニル基、2-メトキシフェニル基、4-ブトキシカルボニルフェニル基、4-N,N-ジブチルアミノカルボニルフェニル基、4-N-ブチルアミノスルホニルフェニル基、4-N,N-ジブチルアミノスルホニルフェニル基が挙げられ、さらに好ましくはフェニル基、4-ブトキシカルボニルフェニル基、4-N,N-ジブチルアミノカルボニルフェニル基、4-N-ブチルアミノスルホニルフェニル基、4-N,N-ジブチルアミノスルホニルフェニル基が挙げられ、特に好ましくはフェニル基、4-ブトキシカルボニルフェニル基、4-N,N-ジブチルアミノカルボニルフェニル基、4-N,N-ジブチルアミノスルホニルフェニル基が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the aryl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Such aryl groups include phenyl, 2-chlorophenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl, 4-N, N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl, 4-N-butylaminosulfonylphenyl 4-N, N-dibutylaminosulfonylphenyl group, more preferably phenyl group, 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl group, 4-N, N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl group, 4-N-butylaminosulfonylphenyl group. 4-N, N-dibutylaminosulfonylphenyl group, particularly preferably phenyl group, 4-butoxycarbonylphenyl group, 4-N, N-dibutylaminocarbonylphenyl group, 4-N, N-dibutylaminosulfonyl group. A phenyl group is mentioned.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いジアルキルアミノ基の好適な例を示す。この様なジアルキルアミノ基としては、N,N-ジメチルアミノ基、N,N-ジブチルアミノ基、N,N-ジ(2-エチルヘキシル)アミノ基、N-メチル-N-ベンジルアミノ基、N,N-ジ(2-エトキシエチル)アミノ基、N.N-ジ(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ基が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the dialkylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of such a dialkylamino group include N, N-dimethylamino group, N, N-dibutylamino group, N, N-di (2-ethylhexyl) amino group, N-methyl-N-benzylamino group, N, N-di (2-ethoxyethyl) amino group, N.I. N-di (2-hydroxyethyl) amino group may be mentioned.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いジアリールアミノ基の好適な例を示す。この様なジアリールアミノ基としては、N,N-ジフェニルアミノ基、N,N-ジ(4-メトキシフェニル)アミノ基、N,N-ジ(4-アシルフェニル)アミノ基が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the diarylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of such a diarylamino group include an N, N-diphenylamino group, an N, N-di (4-methoxyphenyl) amino group, and an N, N-di (4-acylphenyl) amino group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアルキルアリールアミノ基の好適な例を示す。この様なアルキルアリールアミノ基としては、N-メチルーN-フェニルアミノ基、N-ベンジル-N-フェニルアミノ基、N-メチル-N-(4-メトキシフェニル)アミノ基が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of such an alkylarylamino group include an N-methyl-N-phenylamino group, an N-benzyl-N-phenylamino group, and an N-methyl-N- (4-methoxyphenyl) amino group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアルキルカルボニル基の好適な例を示す。この様なアルキルカルボニル基としては、アセチル基、プロピルカルボニル基、ヘプチル-3-カルボニル基、2-エチルヘキシルオキシメチルカルボニル基、フェノキシメチルカルボニル基、2-エチルヘキシルオキシカルボニルメチルカルボニル基が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of such an alkylcarbonyl group include an acetyl group, a propylcarbonyl group, a heptyl-3-carbonyl group, a 2-ethylhexyloxymethylcarbonyl group, a phenoxymethylcarbonyl group, and a 2-ethylhexyloxycarbonylmethylcarbonyl group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアリールカルボニル基の好適な例を示す。この様なアリールカルボニル基としては、ベンゾイル基、4-メトキシベンゾイル基、4-エトキシカルボニルベンゾイル基、が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of such arylcarbonyl groups include benzoyl group, 4-methoxybenzoyl group, and 4-ethoxycarbonylbenzoyl group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアルキルスルホニル基の好適な例を示す。この様なアルキルスルホニル基としては、メタンスルホニル基、オクタンスルホニル基、ドデシルスルホニル基、ベンジルスルホニル基、フェノキシプロピルスルホニル基が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of such an alkylsulfonyl group include a methanesulfonyl group, an octanesulfonyl group, a dodecylsulfonyl group, a benzylsulfonyl group, and a phenoxypropylsulfonyl group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアリールスルホニル基の好適な例を示す。この様なアリールスルホニル基としては、フェニルスルホニル基、2-メトキシフェニルスルホニル基、4-エトキシカルボニルフェニルスルホニル基、が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of such an arylsulfonyl group include a phenylsulfonyl group, a 2-methoxyphenylsulfonyl group, and a 4-ethoxycarbonylphenylsulfonyl group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアルキルスルホニルアミノ基の好適な例を示す。この様なアルキルスルホニルアミノ基としては、メチルスルホニルアミノ基、ブチルスルホニルアミノ基、ヒドロキシプロピルスルホニルアミノ基、2-エチルヘキシルスルホニルアミノ基、n-オクチルスルホニルアミノ基、フェノキシエチルスルホニルアミノ基、アリルスルホニルアミノ基が挙げられる。 Preferred examples of the alkylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent in the general formulas (4) to (6) are shown below. Examples of such an alkylsulfonylamino group include a methylsulfonylamino group, a butylsulfonylamino group, a hydroxypropylsulfonylamino group, a 2-ethylhexylsulfonylamino group, an n-octylsulfonylamino group, a phenoxyethylsulfonylamino group, and an allylsulfonylamino group. Is mentioned.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有してもよいビニルスルホニルアミノ基としては、ビニルスルホニルアミノ基、1-メチルビニルスルホニルアミノ基が挙げられる。 In the general formulas (4) to (6), examples of the vinylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent include a vinylsulfonylamino group and a 1-methylvinylsulfonylamino group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアリールスルホニルアミノ基としては、フェニルスルホニルアミノ基、p-メトキシフェニルスルホニルアミノ基、p-エトキシカルボニルスルホニルアミノ基、等が挙げられる。
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアルキルカルボニルアミノ基としては、メチルカルボニルアミノ基、2-エチルヘキサノイルアミノ基、n-ヘプチルカルボニルアミノ基、エトキシエトキシメチルカルボニルアミノ基等が挙げられる。
In the general formulas (4) to (6), the arylsulfonylamino group which may have a substituent includes a phenylsulfonylamino group, a p-methoxyphenylsulfonylamino group, a p-ethoxycarbonylsulfonylamino group, and the like. Is mentioned.
In the above general formulas (4) to (6), the alkylcarbonylamino group which may have a substituent is a methylcarbonylamino group, a 2-ethylhexanoylamino group, an n-heptylcarbonylamino group, an ethoxyethoxy group. Examples include a methylcarbonylamino group.
 上記一般式(4)~(6)中の、置換基を有しても良いアリールカルボニルアミノ基としては、ベンゾイルアミノ基、2-メトキシベンゾイルアミノ基、4-ビニルベンゾイルアミノ基等が挙げられる。 In the general formulas (4) to (6), examples of the arylcarbonylamino group which may have a substituent include a benzoylamino group, a 2-methoxybenzoylamino group, and a 4-vinylbenzoylamino group.
 以下に、置換基Tの例を示す。
 アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~24の、直鎖、分岐鎖、または環状のアルキル基で、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基、オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、ドデシル基、ヘキサデシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、1-ノルボルニル基、1-アダマンチル基)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~18のアルケニル基で、例えば、ビニル基、アリル基、3-ブテン-1-イル基)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~24のアリール基で、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基)、ヘテロ環基(好ましくは炭素数1~18のヘテロ環基で、例えば、2-チエニル基、4-ピリジル基、2-フリル基、2-ピリミジニル基、1-ピリジル基、2-ベンゾチアゾリル基、1-イミダゾリル基、1-ピラゾリル基、ベンゾトリアゾール-1-イル基)、シリル基(好ましくは炭素数3~18のシリル基で、例えば、トリメチルシリル基、トリエチルシリル基、トリブチルシリル基、tert-ブチルジメチルシリル基、tert-ヘキシルジメチルシリル基)、ヒドロキシル基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のアルコキシ基で、例えば、メトキシ基、エトキシ基、1-ブトキシ基、2-ブトキシ基、イソプロポキシ基、tert-ブトキシ基、ドデシルオキシ基、また、シクロアルキルオキシ基であれば、例えば、シクロペンチルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルオキシ基)、アリールオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数6~24のアリールオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシ基、1-ナフトキシ基)、ヘテロ環オキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~18のヘテロ環オキシ基で、例えば、1-フェニルテトラゾール-5-オキシ基、2-テトラヒドロピラニルオキシ基)、シリルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~18のシリルオキシ基で、例えば、トリメチルシリルオキシ基、tert-ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ基、ジフェニルメチルシリルオキシ基)、アシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~24のアシルオキシ基で、例えば、アセトキシ基、ピバロイルオキシ基、ベンゾイルオキシ基、ドデカノイルオキシ基)、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~24のアルコキシカルボニルオキシ基で、例えば、エトキシカルボニルオキシ基、tert-ブトキシカルボニルオキシ基、また、シクロアルキルオキシカルボニルオキシ基であれば、例えば、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニルオキシ基)、アリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数7~24のアリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルオキシ基)、カルバモイルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のカルバモイルオキシ基で、例えば、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイルオキシ基、N-ブチルカルバモイルオキシ基、N-フェニルカルバモイルオキシ基、N-エチル-N-フェニルカルバモイルオキシ基)、スルファモイルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のスルファモイルオキシ基で、例えば、N,N-ジエチルスルファモイルオキシ基、N-プロピルスルファモイルオキシ基)、アルキルスルホニルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のアルキルスルホニルオキシ基で、例えば、メチルスルホニルオキシ基、ヘキサデシルスルホニルオキシ基、シクロヘキシルスルホニルオキシ基)、アリールスルホニルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数6~24のアリールスルホニルオキシ基で、例えば、フェニルスルホニルオキシ基)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のアシル基で、例えば、ホルミル基、アセチル基、ピバロイル基、ベンゾイル基、テトラデカノイル基、シクロヘキサノイル基)、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~24のアルコキシカルボニル基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニル基、エトキシカルボニル基、オクタデシルオキシカルボニル基、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基、2,6-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-メチルシクロヘキシルオキシカルボニル基)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数7~24のアリールオキシカルボニル基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニル基)、カルバモイル基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のカルバモイル基で、例えば、カルバモイル基、N,N-ジエチルカルバモイル基、N-エチル-N-オクチルカルバモイル基、N,N-ジブチルカルバモイル基、N-プロピルカルバモイル基、N-フェニルカルバモイル基、N-メチルN-フェニルカルバモイル基、N,N-ジシクロへキシルカルバモイル基)、アミノ基(好ましくは炭素数24以下のアミノ基で、例えば、アミノ基、メチルアミノ基、N,N-ジブチルアミノ基、テトラデシルアミノ基、2-エチルへキシルアミノ基、シクロヘキシルアミノ基)、アニリノ基(好ましくは6~24のアニリノ基で、例えば、アニリノ基、N-メチルアニリノ基)、ヘテロ環アミノ基(好ましくは1~18のヘテロ環アミノ基で、例えば、4-ピリジルアミノ基)、カルボンアミド基(好ましくは2~24のカルボンアミド基で、例えば、アセトアミド基、ベンズアミド基、テトラデカンアミド基、ピバロイルアミド基、シクロヘキサンアミド基)、ウレイド基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のウレイド基で、例えば、ウレイド基、N,N-ジメチルウレイド基、N-フェニルウレイド基)、イミド基(好ましくは炭素数24以下のイミド基で、例えば、N-スクシンイミド基、N-フタルイミド基)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~24のアルコキシカルボニルアミノ基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニルアミノ基、エトキシカルボニルアミノ基、tert-ブトキシカルボニルアミノ基、オクタデシルオキシカルボニルアミノ基、シクロヘキシルオキシカルボニルアミノ基)、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数7~24のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ基)、スルホンアミド基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のスルホンアミド基で、例えば、メタンスルホンアミド基、ブタンスルホンアミド基、ベンゼンスルホンアミド基、ヘキサデカンスルホンアミド基、シクロヘキサンスルホンアミド基)、スルファモイルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のスルファモイルアミノ基で、例えば、N、N-ジプロピルスルファモイルアミノ基、N-エチル-N-ドデシルスルファモイルアミノ基)、アゾ基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のアゾ基で、例えば、フェニルアゾ基、3-ピラゾリルアゾ基)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のアルキルチオ基で、例えば、メチルチオ基、エチルチオ基、オクチルチオ基、シクロヘキシルチオ基)、アリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数6~24のアリールチオ基で、例えば、フェニルチオ基)、ヘテロ環チオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~18のヘテロ環チオ基で、例えば、2-ベンゾチアゾリルチオ基、2-ピリジルチオ基、1-フェニルテトラゾリルチオ基)、アルキルスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のアルキルスルフィニル基で、例えば、ドデカンスルフィニル基)、アリールスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~24のアリールスルフィニル基で、例えば、フェニルスルフィニル基)、アルキルスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のアルキルスルホニル基で、例えば、メチルスルホニル基、エチルスルホニル基、プロピルスルホニル基、ブチルスルホニル基、イソプロピルスルホニル基、2-エチルヘキシルスルホニル基、ヘキサデシルスルホニル基、オクチルスルホニル基、シクロヘキシルスルホニル基)、アリールスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~24のアリールスルホニル基で、例えば、フェニルスルホニル基、1-ナフチルスルホニル基)、スルファモイル基(好ましくは炭素数24以下のスルファモイル基で、例えば、スルファモイル基、N,N-ジプロピルスルファモイル基、N-エチル-N-ドデシルスルファモイル基、N-エチル-N-フェニルスルファモイル基、N-シクロヘキシルスルファモイル基)、スルホ基、ホスホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のホスホニル基で、例えば、フェノキシホスホニル基、オクチルオキシホスホニル基、フェニルホスホニル基)、ホスフィノイルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~24のホスフィノイルアミノ基で、例えば、ジエトキシホスフィノイルアミノ基、ジオクチルオキシホスフィノイルアミノ基)を表す。
Examples of the substituent T are shown below.
An alkyl group (preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, Hexyl group, heptyl group, octyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, dodecyl group, hexadecyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, 1-norbornyl group, 1-adamantyl group), alkenyl group (preferably having a carbon number of 2 to 18 alkenyl groups such as vinyl group, allyl group, 3-buten-1-yl group), aryl groups (preferably aryl groups having 6 to 24 carbon atoms such as phenyl group, naphthyl group), heterocyclic ring Group (preferably a heterocyclic group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms such as 2-thienyl group, 4-pyridyl group, 2-furyl group, 2- Limidinyl group, 1-pyridyl group, 2-benzothiazolyl group, 1-imidazolyl group, 1-pyrazolyl group, benzotriazol-1-yl group), silyl group (preferably a silyl group having 3 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, trimethylsilyl Group, triethylsilyl group, tributylsilyl group, tert-butyldimethylsilyl group, tert-hexyldimethylsilyl group), hydroxyl group, cyano group, nitro group, alkoxy group (preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, , Methoxy group, ethoxy group, 1-butoxy group, 2-butoxy group, isopropoxy group, tert-butoxy group, dodecyloxy group, and cycloalkyloxy group, for example, cyclopentyloxy group, cyclohexyloxy group) An aryloxy group (preferably having 6 to 2 carbon atoms) Aryloxy groups such as phenoxy group and 1-naphthoxy group, and heterocyclic oxy groups (preferably heterocyclic oxy groups having 1 to 18 carbon atoms such as 1-phenyltetrazole-5-oxy group, 2- Tetrahydropyranyloxy group), silyloxy group (preferably a silyloxy group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, for example, trimethylsilyloxy group, tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy group, diphenylmethylsilyloxy group), acyloxy group (preferably carbon number) An acyloxy group having 2 to 24, for example, an acetoxy group, a pivaloyloxy group, a benzoyloxy group, a dodecanoyloxy group), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyloxy group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, ethoxycarbonyloxy Tert-butoki In the case of a sicarbonyloxy group or a cycloalkyloxycarbonyloxy group, for example, a cyclohexyloxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (preferably an aryloxycarbonyloxy group having 7 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, phenoxy Carbonyloxy group), carbamoyloxy group (preferably a carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy group, N-butylcarbamoyloxy group, N-phenylcarbamoyloxy group, N-ethyl -N-phenylcarbamoyloxy group), sulfamoyloxy group (preferably a sulfamoyloxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, N, N-diethylsulfamoyloxy group, N-propylsulfamoyloxy group) Group), alkyls A phonyloxy group (preferably an alkylsulfonyloxy group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a methylsulfonyloxy group, a hexadecylsulfonyloxy group, a cyclohexylsulfonyloxy group), an arylsulfonyloxy group (preferably an aryl having 6 to 24 carbon atoms) A sulfonyloxy group such as a phenylsulfonyloxy group, an acyl group (preferably an acyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as a formyl group, an acetyl group, a pivaloyl group, a benzoyl group, a tetradecanoyl group, a cyclohexanoyl group; Group), an alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a methoxycarbonyl group, an ethoxycarbonyl group, an octadecyloxycarbonyl group, a cyclohexyloxycarbonyl group, 2,6-di-tert- Til-4-methylcyclohexyloxycarbonyl group), an aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably an aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 24 carbon atoms, such as a phenoxycarbonyl group), a carbamoyl group (preferably a carbamoyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms) For example, carbamoyl group, N, N-diethylcarbamoyl group, N-ethyl-N-octylcarbamoyl group, N, N-dibutylcarbamoyl group, N-propylcarbamoyl group, N-phenylcarbamoyl group, N-methylN- Phenylcarbamoyl group, N, N-dicyclohexylcarbamoyl group), amino group (preferably an amino group having 24 or less carbon atoms, for example, amino group, methylamino group, N, N-dibutylamino group, tetradecylamino group) , 2-ethylhexylamino group, cyclohexyl Amino group), anilino group (preferably 6 to 24 anilino group such as anilino group, N-methylanilino group), heterocyclic amino group (preferably 1 to 18 heterocyclic amino group such as 4-pyridylamino Group), a carbonamide group (preferably a carbonamide group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms, such as an acetamido group, a benzamide group, a tetradecanamide group, a pivaloylamide group, a cyclohexaneamide group), a ureido group (preferably a ureido having 1 to 24 carbon atoms Group, for example, ureido group, N, N-dimethylureido group, N-phenylureido group), imide group (preferably an imide group having 24 or less carbon atoms, for example, N-succinimide group, N-phthalimide group), An alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably an alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 24 carbon atoms) For example, methoxycarbonylamino group, ethoxycarbonylamino group, tert-butoxycarbonylamino group, octadecyloxycarbonylamino group, cyclohexyloxycarbonylamino group), aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably aryloxy having 7 to 24 carbon atoms) A carbonylamino group such as a phenoxycarbonylamino group, a sulfonamide group (preferably a sulfonamide group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as a methanesulfonamide group, a butanesulfonamide group, a benzenesulfonamide group, a hexadecanesulfonamide Group, cyclohexanesulfonamido group), sulfamoylamino group (preferably a sulfamoylamino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, N, N-dipropylsulfamoylamino group, Ru-N-dodecylsulfamoylamino group), an azo group (preferably an azo group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, a phenylazo group, a 3-pyrazolylazo group), an alkylthio group (preferably having 1 to 24 carbon atoms). Alkylthio group, for example, methylthio group, ethylthio group, octylthio group, cyclohexylthio group), arylthio group (preferably arylthio group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, for example, phenylthio group), heterocyclic thio group (preferably having carbon number) 1 to 18 heterocyclic thio groups such as 2-benzothiazolylthio group, 2-pyridylthio group, 1-phenyltetrazolylthio group), alkylsulfinyl group (preferably alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms) For example, dodecanesulfinyl group), arylsulfinyl group (preferably having 6 to 24 carbon atoms) An arylsulfinyl group such as a phenylsulfinyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group (preferably an alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as a methylsulfonyl group, an ethylsulfonyl group, a propylsulfonyl group, a butylsulfonyl group, an isopropylsulfonyl group 2-ethylhexylsulfonyl group, hexadecylsulfonyl group, octylsulfonyl group, cyclohexylsulfonyl group), arylsulfonyl group (preferably an arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms, such as phenylsulfonyl group, 1-naphthylsulfonyl group) Sulfamoyl group (preferably a sulfamoyl group having 24 or less carbon atoms, such as sulfamoyl group, N, N-dipropylsulfamoyl group, N-ethyl-N-dodecylsulfamoyl group, N-ethyl N-phenylsulfamoyl group, N-cyclohexylsulfamoyl group), sulfo group, phosphonyl group (preferably phosphonyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as phenoxyphosphonyl group, octyloxyphosphonyl group, phenylphosphonic group Nyl group) and a phosphinoylamino group (preferably a phosphinoylamino group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms, such as a diethoxyphosphinoylamino group and a dioctyloxyphosphinoylamino group).
 上述した置換基が置換可能な基である場合には、上述した各基のいずれかによってさらに置換されていてもよい。なお、2個以上の置換基を有している場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 When the above-described substituent is a substitutable group, it may be further substituted with any of the above-described groups. In addition, when it has two or more substituents, those substituents may be the same or different.
 フェニル基またはナフチル基の置換基Rが、一般式(X)で表される基である場合について説明する。
 R11は水素原子または炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表し、水素原子またはメチル基が好ましく、水素原子がさらに好ましい。
 n1は1~3の整数を表し、1または2がより好ましい。n1が2または3の場合、複数のR11は同じでも異なっても良い。
 Y1は-O-、-S-、-NR13-、-SO2-、または、-C(=O)-を表し、-O-、-SO2-、または、-C(=O)-が好ましく、-O-またはC(=O)-がより好ましい。R13は、水素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。
 R12は1価の置換基を表し、置換基としては、上記の置換基Tが例示され、これらの置換基Tは、さらに、置換基Tによって置換されていてもよい。R12は好ましくは、置換基を有しても良いアルキル基、置換基を有しても良いアシル基、置換基を有しても良いスルホニル基、置換基を有しても良いアルコキシ基、または置換基を有しても良いアルキルアミノ基であり、より好ましくは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~12のアルコキシ基、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~12のアルキルアミノ基である。
 1分子あたりのR12の部分の質量は、200~2500であることが好ましく、250~1500であることがより好ましい。
The case where the substituent R of the phenyl group or naphthyl group is a group represented by the general formula (X) will be described.
R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom.
n1 represents an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2. When n1 is 2 or 3, the plurality of R 11 may be the same or different.
Y 1 represents —O—, —S—, —NR 13 —, —SO 2 —, or —C (═O) —, and represents —O—, —SO 2 —, or —C (═O). -Is preferred, and -O- or C (= O)-is more preferred. R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
R 12 represents a monovalent substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above-described substituent T. The substituent T may be further substituted with the substituent T. R 12 is preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an acyl group which may have a substituent, a sulfonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkoxy group which may have a substituent, Or an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, and 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. And an alkylamino group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
The mass of the R 12 portion per molecule is preferably 200 to 2500, and more preferably 250 to 1500.
 上述した1価の基がさらに置換可能な基である場合には、上述した各基のいずれかによってさらに置換されていてもよい。なお、2個以上の置換基を有している場合には、それらの置換基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。 When the above-described monovalent group is a further substitutable group, it may be further substituted with any of the above-described groups. In addition, when it has two or more substituents, those substituents may be the same or different.
 次に、一般式(1-4)について説明する。
 一般式(1-4)において、R’はエーテル溶解性への効果と分子量の点から、炭素数1~3のアルキレン基である。炭素数1~3のアルキレン基としては、メチレン基、エチレン基、n-プロピレン基、iso-プロピレン基が挙げられる。好ましくは、エチレン基、プロピレン基である。
 R”はエーテル溶解性への効果と分子量の点から、炭素数1~8のアルキル基であり、好ましくは1~2のアルキル基である。炭素数1~8のアルキル基としては、一般式(1-3)におけるR3と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同義である。
 n1は、エーテル溶解性への効果と分子量の観点から、0~4の整数であり、1~2の整数であることがより好ましい。
Next, general formula (1-4) will be described.
In the general formula (1-4), R ′ is an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of ether solubility and molecular weight. Examples of the alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms include a methylene group, an ethylene group, an n-propylene group, and an iso-propylene group. Preferably, they are an ethylene group and a propylene group.
R ″ is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms from the viewpoint of ether solubility and molecular weight. The alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms may be represented by the general formula: It is synonymous with R 3 in (1-3), and the preferred range is also synonymous.
n1 is an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 1 to 2, from the viewpoint of ether solubility and molecular weight.
 次に、一般式(1)の中心部分であるMについて述べる。一般式(1)において、Mは、2つの水素原子、金属原子、金属酸化物または金属ハロゲン化物を表わす。金属原子としては、鉄、マグネシウム、ニッケル、コバルト、銅、パラジウム、亜鉛、バナジウム、チタン、インジウム、錫等が挙げられる。金属酸化物としては、チタニル、バナジル等が挙げられる。金属ハロゲン化物としては、塩化アルミニウム、塩化インジウム、塩化ゲルマニウム、塩化錫(II)、塩化錫(IV)、塩化珪素等が挙げられる。好ましくは、金属原子、金属酸化物または金属ハロゲン化物であり、具体的には、銅、亜鉛、コバルト、ニッケル、鉄、バナジル、チタニル、塩化インジウム、塩化錫(II)であり、より好ましくは銅、バナジルおよび亜鉛であり、さらに好ましくは亜鉛または銅であり、特に好ましくは銅である。中心金属が亜鉛または銅であると、耐熱性が高いため好ましい。また、中心金属が亜鉛または銅であると、アセトン、メタノール、メチルセルソルブといった汎用性溶剤に対する溶剤溶解性が高く、また樹脂に対する溶解性が高くコントラストが高くなるため、特に好ましい。 Next, M, which is the central part of the general formula (1), will be described. In the general formula (1), M represents two hydrogen atoms, a metal atom, a metal oxide, or a metal halide. Examples of the metal atom include iron, magnesium, nickel, cobalt, copper, palladium, zinc, vanadium, titanium, indium, and tin. Examples of the metal oxide include titanyl and vanadyl. Examples of the metal halide include aluminum chloride, indium chloride, germanium chloride, tin (II) chloride, tin (IV) chloride, and silicon chloride. Preferably, it is a metal atom, a metal oxide or a metal halide, specifically, copper, zinc, cobalt, nickel, iron, vanadyl, titanyl, indium chloride, tin (II) chloride, more preferably copper. , Vanadyl and zinc, more preferably zinc or copper, and particularly preferably copper. It is preferable that the central metal is zinc or copper because of high heat resistance. Further, it is particularly preferable that the central metal is zinc or copper because the solvent solubility in general-purpose solvents such as acetone, methanol, and methyl cellosolve is high, and the solubility in the resin is high and the contrast becomes high.
 一般式(1)で表される化合物は、下記一般式(1-1)で表されることがより好ましい。
一般式(1-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
(一般式(1-1)中、Z1~Z16は、それぞれ、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、下記一般式(1-1-2)で表される基、下記一般式(1-3)で表される基、または、下記一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、一般式(1-1-2)
で表される基または一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、少なくとも1つはハロゲン原子であり、かつ、少なくとも1つは一般式(1-1-2)で表される基である。Mは2つの水素原子、金属原子、金属酸化物または金属ハロゲン化物を表わす。)
The compound represented by the general formula (1) is more preferably represented by the following general formula (1-1).
General formula (1-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
(In the general formula (1-1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2), or a general formula (1-3) Or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4), and 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are represented by the general formula (1-1-2)
Or a group represented by the general formula (1-4), at least one is a halogen atom, and at least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-1-2) It is. M represents two hydrogen atoms, a metal atom, a metal oxide or a metal halide. )
 一般式(1-1)における一般式(1-1-2)、一般式(1-3)、一般式(1-4)は、上記一般式(1)で説明した一般式(1-1-2)、一般式(1-3)、一般式(1-4)と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同義である。従って、一般式(1-1)におけるZ1~Z16は、それぞれ、一般式(1)の1~Z16は、同じ範囲がより好ましい。
 一般式(1-1)のMは、上記一般式(1)におけるMと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同義である。
The general formula (1-1-2), the general formula (1-3), and the general formula (1-4) in the general formula (1-1) are represented by the general formula (1-1) described in the general formula (1). -2), synonymous with general formula (1-3) and general formula (1-4), and a preferred range is also synonymous. Therefore, Z 1 to Z 16 in the general formula (1-1) are more preferably in the same range as 1 to Z 16 in the general formula (1).
M in the general formula (1-1) has the same meaning as M in the general formula (1), and a preferred range is also the same.
 以下に、本発明で用いられる一般式(1)および一般式(1-1)における、Z1~Z16の例を挙げるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Examples of Z 1 to Z 16 in the general formula (1) and general formula (1-1) used in the present invention will be given below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 以下に本発明で用いられるフタロシアニン化合物の例を挙げるが、本発明がこれらに限定されるものではないことはいうまでもない。下記表は、下記一般式に示される置換基とその数を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
 下記表中のArは下記構造を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000055
 上記表1において、Phはフェニル基である。
Although the example of the phthalocyanine compound used by this invention is given to the following, it cannot be overemphasized that this invention is not limited to these. The following table shows the substituents represented by the following general formula and their numbers.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Ar in the following table represents the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000055
In Table 1 above, Ph is a phenyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 上記の化合物の略称において、Pcはフタロシアニン核を表わし、Znは中心金属を表わし、「α-」の付いている部分がα位の置換基を表し、「β-」の付いている部分がβ位の置換基を表す。
 x、yは置換基数を0以上とする0以上の数である。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
In the abbreviations of the above compounds, Pc represents a phthalocyanine nucleus, Zn represents a central metal, a portion with “α-” represents a substituent at the α-position, and a portion with “β-” represents β Represents a substituent at the position.
x and y are numbers of 0 or more, where the number of substituents is 0 or more.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000058
 フタロシアニン化合物は置換位置や置換数が異なる混合物となるため、構造式として一義的に記述することが難しい。また、次の表で示す置換数は混合物中の置換基の数の平均値が近似された値であり、少数も取り得る。 Since the phthalocyanine compound is a mixture having different substitution positions and substitution numbers, it is difficult to uniquely describe it as a structural formula. Further, the number of substitutions shown in the following table is a value obtained by approximating the average value of the number of substituents in the mixture, and may be a small number.
 また、本発明で用いられるフタロシアニン染料としては、以下の具体例も挙げられるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。例えば、下記具体例G-1~G-21、G’-1~G’-3において、上述したZ1~Z16の例として挙げたS-1が、S-2~S-47のうちいずれかに置き換わったものであってもよい。
 下記一般式中、Rは、上述したカルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、上記式(1A)で表される基、上記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を有する置換基を表し、β位に結合していることが好ましい。Sは、本発明で用いられるフタロシアニン染料が有していてもよい他の置換基を表す。Xは、本発明で用いられるフタロシアニン染料が有していてもよいハロゲン原子を表す。
Moreover, although the following specific examples are also mentioned as a phthalocyanine dye used by this invention, this invention is not limited to these. For example, in the following specific examples G-1 to G-21 and G′-1 to G′-3, S-1 given as an example of Z 1 to Z 16 described above is one of S-2 to S-47. It may be replaced with either one.
In the following general formula, R is the carboxyl group, epoxy group, aryl ester group, tertiary alkyl ester group, group represented by the above formula (1A), group represented by the above formula (2A), amino group And a substituent having at least one functional group selected from thiol groups and preferably bonded to the β-position. S represents another substituent which the phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention may have. X represents a halogen atom that the phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention may have.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
<ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料の製造方法>
 本発明で用いるフタロシアニン染料の製造方法は、特に制限されるものではなく、従来公知の方法を利用することができる。溶融状態または有機溶剤中で、フタロニトリル化合物と金属塩とを環化反応する方法が特に好ましく使用できる。以下、フタロシアニン染料の製造方法の好ましい実施形態を記載する。しかしながら、本発明は、下記好ましい実施形態に制限されるものではない。
 すなわち、下記式(I)で表されるフタロニトリル化合物(1)、
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
下記式(II)で表されるフタロニトリル化合物(2)、
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
下記式(III)で表されるフタロニトリル化合物(3)、
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
および下記式(IV)で表されるフタロニトリル化合物(4)、
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
これらを、金属原子、金属酸化物、金属カルボニル、金属ハロゲン化物および有機酸金属(本明細書中では、一括して「金属化合物」とも称する)からなる群から選ばれる一種と環化反応させることによって、フタロシアニン化合物が製造できる。
 なお、上記式(I)~(IV)中、Z1~Z16は、所望のフタロシアニン化合物(1)
の構造によって規定される。具体的には、上記式(I)~(IV)中、Z1~Z16は、それぞれ、上記一般式(1)中のZ1~Z16の定義と同様であるため、ここでは説明を省略する。
<Method for producing halogenated phthalocyanine dye>
The method for producing the phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known method can be used. A method of cyclizing a phthalonitrile compound and a metal salt in a molten state or in an organic solvent can be particularly preferably used. Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the method for producing a phthalocyanine dye will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to the following preferred embodiments.
That is, the phthalonitrile compound (1) represented by the following formula (I),
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
A phthalonitrile compound (2) represented by the following formula (II):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000064
A phthalonitrile compound (3) represented by the following formula (III):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000065
And a phthalonitrile compound (4) represented by the following formula (IV):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000066
These are cyclized with one selected from the group consisting of metal atoms, metal oxides, metal carbonyls, metal halides, and organic acid metals (also collectively referred to as “metal compounds” in this specification). Thus, a phthalocyanine compound can be produced.
In the above formulas (I) to (IV), Z 1 to Z 16 are the desired phthalocyanine compounds (1)
Defined by the structure of Specifically, in the above formulas (I) to (IV), Z 1 to Z 16 are the same as the definitions of Z 1 to Z 16 in the general formula (1), respectively. Omitted.
 環化反応は、特開昭64-45474号公報に記載の方法などの、従来公知方法を用いることができる。
 上記態様において、環化反応は、式(I)~(IV)のフタロニトリル化合物と金属、金属酸化物、金属カルボニル、金属ハロゲン化物および有機酸金属からなる群から選ばれる一種を溶融状態または有機溶剤中で反応させることが好ましい。この際使用できる金属、金属酸化物、金属カルボニル、金属ハロゲン化物および有機酸金属としては、反応後に得られるフタロシアニン化合物の中心部(一般式(1)のM)に相当するものが得られるものであれば、特に制限されるものではない。従って、上記一般式(1)におけるMの項で列挙された鉄、銅、亜鉛、バナジウム、チタン、インジウムおよびスズ等の金属、この金属の、塩化物、臭化物、ヨウ化物等の金属ハロゲン化合物、酸化バナジウム、酸化チタニルおよび酸化銅等の金属酸化物、酢酸塩等の有機酸金属、ならびにアセチルアセトナート等の錯体化合物およびカルボニル鉄等の金属カルボニル等が挙げられる。具体的には、鉄、銅、亜鉛、バナジウム、チタン、インジウム、マグネシウムおよびスズ等の金属;この金属の、塩化物、臭化物、ヨウ化物等の金属ハロゲン化合物、例えば、塩化バナジウム、塩化チタン、塩化銅、塩化亜鉛、塩化コバルト、塩化ニッケル、塩化鉄、塩化インジウム、塩化アルミニウム、塩化錫、塩化ガリウム、塩化ゲルマニウム、塩化マグネシウム、ヨウ化銅、ヨウ化亜鉛、ヨウ化コバルト、ヨウ化インジウム、ヨウ化アルミニウム、ヨウ化ガリウム、臭化銅、臭化亜鉛、臭化コバルト、臭化アルミニウム、臭化ガリウム;一酸化バナジウム、三酸化バナジウム、四酸化バナジウム、五酸化バナジウム、二酸化チタン、一酸化鉄、三二酸化鉄、四三酸化鉄、酸化マンガン、一酸化ニッケル、一酸化コバルト、三二酸化コバルト、二酸化コバルト、酸化第一銅、酸化第二銅、三二酸化銅、酸化バラジウム、酸化亜鉛、一酸化ゲルマニウム、および二酸化ゲルマニウム等の金属酸化物;酢酸銅、酢酸亜鉛、酢酸コバルト、安息香酸銅、安息香酸亜鉛等の有機酸金属;ならびにアセチルアセトナート等の錯体化合物およびコバルトカルボニル、鉄カルボニル、ニッケルカルボニル等の金属カルボニルなどが挙げられる。これらのうち、好ましくは金属、金属酸化物および金属ハロゲン化物であり、より好ましくは金属ハロゲン化物であり、さらに好ましくは、ヨウ化バナジウム、ヨウ化銅およびヨウ化亜鉛であり、特に好ましくは、ヨウ化銅およびヨウ化亜鉛であり、最も好ましくはヨウ化亜鉛である。ヨウ化亜鉛を用いる場合、中心金属は、亜鉛ということになる。金属ハロゲン化物のうち、ヨウ化物を用いることが好適な理由は、溶剤や樹脂に対する溶解性に優れ、得られるフタロシアニン化合物のスペクトルがシャープであり、所望の波長である640~750nmに収まりやすいためである。環化反応の際にヨウ化物を用いた場合にスペクトルがシャープになる詳細なメカニズムは不明であるが、ヨウ化物を用いた場合、反応後にフタロシアニン化合物中に残存するヨウ素が、フタロシアニン化合物と何らかの相互作用を起こして、フタロシアニン化合物の層間にヨウ素が存在するようになるためであると推定される。しかしながら、上記メカニズムに限定されるものではない。環化反応に金属ヨウ化物を用いた場合と同様の効果を得るために、得られたフタロシアニン化合物をヨウ素で処理してもよい。
For the cyclization reaction, a conventionally known method such as the method described in JP-A No. 64-45474 can be used.
In the above embodiment, the cyclization reaction is carried out by melting one kind selected from the group consisting of the phthalonitrile compounds of formulas (I) to (IV) and a metal, a metal oxide, a metal carbonyl, a metal halide and an organic acid metal in a molten state or It is preferable to react in a solvent. The metal, metal oxide, metal carbonyl, metal halide, and organic acid metal that can be used at this time are those corresponding to the central part of the phthalocyanine compound obtained after the reaction (M in the general formula (1)). If there is, there is no particular limitation. Therefore, metals such as iron, copper, zinc, vanadium, titanium, indium and tin listed in the item M in the above general formula (1), metal halides such as chlorides, bromides and iodides of these metals, Examples thereof include metal oxides such as vanadium oxide, titanyl oxide and copper oxide, organic acid metals such as acetate, complex compounds such as acetylacetonate, and metal carbonyls such as carbonyl iron. Specifically, metals such as iron, copper, zinc, vanadium, titanium, indium, magnesium and tin; metal halides such as chloride, bromide, iodide, etc. of this metal, such as vanadium chloride, titanium chloride, chloride Copper, zinc chloride, cobalt chloride, nickel chloride, iron chloride, indium chloride, aluminum chloride, tin chloride, gallium chloride, germanium chloride, magnesium chloride, copper iodide, zinc iodide, cobalt iodide, indium iodide, iodide Aluminum, gallium iodide, copper bromide, zinc bromide, cobalt bromide, aluminum bromide, gallium bromide; vanadium monoxide, vanadium trioxide, vanadium tetroxide, vanadium pentoxide, titanium dioxide, iron monoxide, three Iron dioxide, triiron tetroxide, manganese oxide, nickel monoxide, cobalt monoxide, cobalt dioxide Metal oxides such as cobalt dioxide, cuprous oxide, cuprous oxide, cupric oxide, copper trioxide, barium oxide, zinc oxide, germanium monoxide, and germanium dioxide; copper acetate, zinc acetate, cobalt acetate, copper benzoate And organic acid metals such as zinc benzoate; and complex compounds such as acetylacetonate and metal carbonyls such as cobalt carbonyl, iron carbonyl and nickel carbonyl. Of these, metals, metal oxides and metal halides are preferable, metal halides are more preferable, vanadium iodide, copper iodide and zinc iodide are more preferable, and iodine is particularly preferable. Copper iodide and zinc iodide, most preferably zinc iodide. When zinc iodide is used, the central metal is zinc. Among metal halides, it is preferable to use iodide because it has excellent solubility in solvents and resins, and the spectrum of the resulting phthalocyanine compound is sharp and easily fits within the desired wavelength range of 640 to 750 nm. is there. The detailed mechanism of sharpening the spectrum when using iodide during the cyclization reaction is unknown, but when iodide is used, the iodine remaining in the phthalocyanine compound after the reaction may have some interaction with the phthalocyanine compound. It is presumed that iodine is present between the layers of the phthalocyanine compound due to the action. However, the mechanism is not limited to the above mechanism. In order to obtain the same effect as when metal iodide is used for the cyclization reaction, the obtained phthalocyanine compound may be treated with iodine.
 また、上記態様において、環化反応は、無溶剤中でも行なえるが、有機溶剤を使用して行なうのが好ましい。有機溶剤は、出発原料としてのフタロニトリル化合物との反応性の低い、好ましくは反応性を示さない不活性な溶剤であればいずれでもよく、例えば、ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、ニトロベンゼン、モノクロロベンゼン、o-クロロトルエン、ジクロロベンゼン、トリクロロベンゼン、1-クロロナフタレン、1-メチルナフタレン、エチレングリコール、およびベンゾニトリル等の不活性溶剤;メタノール、エタノール、1-プロパノ-ル、2-プロパノ-ル、1-ブタノール、1-ヘキサノール、1-ペンタノール、1-オクタノール等のアルコール;ならびにピリジン、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチル-2-ピロリジノン、N,N-ジメチルアセトフェノン、トリエチルアミン、トリ-n-ブチルアミン、ジメチルスルホキシド、スルホラン等の非プロトン性極性溶剤等が挙げられる。
 これらのうち、好ましくは、1-クロロナフタレン、1-メチルナフタレン、1-オクタノール、ジクロロベンゼンおよびベンゾニトリルが使用され、より好ましくは、1-オクタノール、ジクロロベンゼンおよびベンゾニトリルが使用される。これらの溶剤は1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。
Moreover, in the said aspect, although a cyclization reaction can be performed even without a solvent, it is preferable to carry out using an organic solvent. The organic solvent may be any inert solvent that has a low reactivity with the phthalonitrile compound as a starting material, and preferably exhibits no reactivity. For example, benzene, toluene, xylene, nitrobenzene, monochlorobenzene, o -Inert solvents such as chlorotoluene, dichlorobenzene, trichlorobenzene, 1-chloronaphthalene, 1-methylnaphthalene, ethylene glycol, and benzonitrile; methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, 2-propanol, 1- Alcohols such as butanol, 1-hexanol, 1-pentanol, 1-octanol; and pyridine, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, N, N-dimethylacetophenone, Triethylamine, tri n- butylamine, dimethyl sulfoxide, aprotic polar solvents such as sulfolane.
Of these, 1-chloronaphthalene, 1-methylnaphthalene, 1-octanol, dichlorobenzene and benzonitrile are preferably used, and 1-octanol, dichlorobenzene and benzonitrile are more preferably used. These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 上記態様における式(I)~(IV)のフタロニトリル化合物と金属化合物との反応条件は、この反応が進行する条件であれば特に制限されるものではないが、例えば、有機溶剤100質量部に対して、上記式(I)~(IV)のフタロニトリル化合物を1~500質量部、好ましくは10~350質量部の範囲の合計量で、かつ金属化合物をフタロニトリル化合物4モルに対して、好ましくは0.8~2.0モル、より好ましくは0.8~1.5モルの範囲で仕込む。環化の際の反応温度は、特に限定されるものではないが、好ましくは30~250℃、より好ましくは80~200℃の範囲とする。反応時間は、特に限定されるものではないが、好ましくは3~20時間である。なお、反応後は、従来公知のフタロシアニン化合物の合成方法に従って、ろ過、洗浄、乾燥することにより、次工程に用いることのできるフタロシアニン化合物を効率よく、しかも高純度で得ることができる。 The reaction conditions for the phthalonitrile compound of the formulas (I) to (IV) and the metal compound in the above embodiment are not particularly limited as long as this reaction proceeds. On the other hand, the total amount of the phthalonitrile compounds of the above formulas (I) to (IV) is 1 to 500 parts by weight, preferably 10 to 350 parts by weight, and the metal compound is 4 moles of the phthalonitrile compound. The charge is preferably in the range of 0.8 to 2.0 mol, more preferably 0.8 to 1.5 mol. The reaction temperature during cyclization is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 30 to 250 ° C., more preferably 80 to 200 ° C. The reaction time is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20 hours. After the reaction, a phthalocyanine compound that can be used in the next step can be efficiently and highly purified by filtration, washing, and drying according to a conventionally known method for synthesizing phthalocyanine compounds.
 上記態様において、出発原料である式(I)~(IV)のフタロニトリル化合物は、従来既知の方法により合成でき、また、市販品を用いることもできる。 In the above embodiment, the starting phthalonitrile compounds of formulas (I) to (IV) can be synthesized by a conventionally known method, or commercially available products can also be used.
<ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体>
 本発明に用いるハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料は、多量体(ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体)であってもよい。本明細書において多量体とは、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン構造を2以上含む化合物であり、二量体、三量体又はポリマーなどの構造を包含する。
<Halogenated phthalocyanine multimer>
The halogenated phthalocyanine dye used in the present invention may be a multimer (halogenated phthalocyanine multimer). In the present specification, a multimer is a compound containing two or more halogenated phthalocyanine structures, and includes a structure such as a dimer, trimer or polymer.
 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、下記一般式(A)、一般式(B)、及び、一般式(C)で表される構成単位の少なくとも一つを含んでなるハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体、又は、一般式(D)で表されるハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体が好ましい。
一般式(A)で表される構成単位
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
 一般式(A)中、X1は重合によって形成される連結基を表し、L1は単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。DyeIはハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造を表す。
The halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is a halogenated phthalocyanine multimer comprising at least one of structural units represented by the following general formula (A), general formula (B), and general formula (C), or general A halogenated phthalocyanine multimer represented by the formula (D) is preferred.
Structural unit represented by general formula (A)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000067
In general formula (A), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization, and L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. DyeI represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton.
 上記一般式(A)中、X1は重合によって形成される連結基を表す。すなわち重合反応で形成される主鎖に相当する繰り返し単位を形成する部分を指す。なお、2つの*で表された部位が繰り返し単位となる。X1としては、公知の重合可能なモノマーから形成される連結基であれば特に制限ないが、特に下記(XX-1)~(X-24)で表される連結基が好ましく、(XX-1)及び(XX-2)で表される(メタ)アクリル系連結鎖、(XX-10)~(XX-17)で表されるスチレン系連結鎖、及び(XX-24)で表されるビニル系連結鎖であることがより好ましい。(XX-1)~(X-24)中、*で示された部位でL1と連結していることを表す。Meはメチル基を表す。また、(XX-18)及び(XX-19)中のRは水素原子、炭素数1~5のアルキル基又はフェニル基を表す。 In the above general formula (A), X 1 represents a linking group formed by polymerization. That is, it refers to a portion that forms a repeating unit corresponding to the main chain formed by the polymerization reaction. Two sites represented by * are repeating units. X 1 is not particularly limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer, but is particularly preferably a linking group represented by the following (XX-1) to (X-24): 1) (meth) acrylic linking chains represented by (XX-2), styrene linking chains represented by (XX-10) to (XX-17), and (XX-24) More preferably, it is a vinyl type connecting chain. In (XX-1) to (X-24), it is linked to L 1 at the site indicated by *. Me represents a methyl group. R in (XX-18) and (XX-19) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000068
 一般式(A)中、L1は単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。L1が2価の連結基を表す場合の2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキレン基(例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基など)、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリーレン基(例えば、フェニレン基、ナフタレン基等)、置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-C(=O)-、-CO2-、-NR-、-CONR-、-O2C-、-SO-、-SO2-及びこれらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基を表す。ここで、Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロ環基を表す。
 一般式(A)中、DyeIはハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造、すなわち、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体におけるハロゲン化フタロシアニンに由来する部分構造を表す。
 DyeIが上述した一般式(1)で表される化合物に由来する構造である場合、一般式(1)で表される化合物中のZ1~Z16のいずれかが一般式(A)中のL1と結合していることが好ましい。
 一般式(A)についての詳細は、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0138~0152を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
In general formula (A), L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. In the case where L 1 represents a divalent linking group, the divalent linking group may be a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene group). Etc.), substituted or unsubstituted arylene groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, phenylene group, naphthalene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic linking groups, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S— , —C (═O) —, —CO 2 —, —NR—, —CONR—, —O 2 C—, —SO—, —SO 2 — and a linking group formed by linking two or more thereof. Represents. Here, R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
In the general formula (A), DyeI represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton, that is, a partial structure derived from a halogenated phthalocyanine in a halogenated phthalocyanine multimer.
When DyeI is a structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (1), any one of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) is It is preferably bonded to L 1 .
For details of the general formula (A), paragraphs 0138 to 0152 of JP 2013-29760 A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
一般式(B)で表される構成単位
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
Structural unit represented by general formula (B)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000069
 一般式(B)中、X2は上記一般式(A)中のX1と同義である。L2は上記一般式(A)中のL1と同義である。Y2はDyeIIとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基を表す。DyeIIはハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造を表す。 In general formula (B), X 2 has the same meaning as X 1 in general formula (A). L 2 has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (A). Y 2 represents a group capable of ionic bonding or coordination bonding with DyeII. DyeII represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton.
 一般式(B)中、X2は上記一般式(A)中のX2と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。L2は上記一般式(A)中のL1と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。Y2はDyeIIとイオン結合もしくは配位結合可能な基であればよく、アニオン性基又はカチオン性基のどちらでもよい。アニオン性基としては、COO-、PO3-、SO3 -、-SO3NH-、-SO3-CO-等が挙げられるが、COO-、PO3-、SO3 -が好ましい。
 カチオン性基としては、置換又は無置換のオニウムカチオン(例えば、アンモニウム、ピリジニウム、イミダゾリウム及びホスホニウム等)が挙げられ、特にアンモニウムカチオンが好ましい。
 Y2は、DyeIIが有しているアニオン部(COO-、SO3 -、O-等)やカチオン部(上記オニウムカチオンや金属カチオン等)と結合することが出来る。
 DyeIIが、上述した一般式(1)で表される化合物に由来する構造である場合、一般式(1)で表される化合物中のZ1~Z16のいずれかが一般式(B)中のY2と結合していることが好ましい。
 一般式(B)の詳細については、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0156~0161を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
In general formula (B), X 2 has the same meaning as X 2 in general formula (A), and the preferred range is also the same. L 2 has the same meaning as L 1 in the general formula (A), and the preferred range is also the same. Y 2 may be any group capable of ionic bonding or coordination bonding with Dye II, and may be either an anionic group or a cationic group. Examples of the anionic group include COO , PO 3 H , SO 3 , —SO 3 NH , —SO 3 N CO— and the like, and COO , PO 3 H and SO 3 are preferable. .
Examples of the cationic group include substituted or unsubstituted onium cations (for example, ammonium, pyridinium, imidazolium, phosphonium and the like), and ammonium cations are particularly preferable.
Y 2 can be bonded to an anion part (COO , SO 3 , O etc.) or a cation part (the onium cation, metal cation etc.) of DyeII.
When DyeII has a structure derived from the compound represented by the general formula (1) described above, any one of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) is present in the general formula (B). It is preferably bonded to Y 2 of
For details of the general formula (B), paragraphs 0156 to 0161 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
一般式(C)で表される構成単位
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
 一般式(C)中、L3は単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。DyeIIIは、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造を表す。mは0又は1を表す。
Structural unit represented by general formula (C)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000070
In general formula (C), L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. DyeIII represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton. m represents 0 or 1;
 上記一般式(C)中、L3で表される2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換の直鎖、分岐もしくは環状アルキレン基(例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基など)、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリーレン基(例えば、フェニレン基、ナフタレン基等)、置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-NR-(Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロ環基を表す。)、-C(=O)-、-SO-、-SO2-,及び、これらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基が好適に挙げられる。mは0又は1を表すが、1であることが好ましい。
 DyeIIIが、上述した一般式(1)で表される化合物に由来する構造である場合、一般式(1)で表される化合物中のZ1~Z16のいずれかが一般式(C)中のL3と結合していることが好ましい。
In the general formula (C), the divalent linking group represented by L 3 is a substituted or unsubstituted linear, branched or cyclic alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (for example, a methylene group, an ethylene group, Trimethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, phenylene group, naphthalene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH— , —O—, —S—, —NR— (R each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group), —C (═O) —, —SO—, Preferred examples include —SO 2 — and a linking group formed by linking two or more of these. m represents 0 or 1, but is preferably 1.
When DyeIII has a structure derived from the compound represented by the above general formula (1), any one of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) is represented in the general formula (C). it is preferred that the of L 3 are bound.
 以下に一般式(C)中のL3で表される2価の連結基として好適に使用される具体例を記載するが、本発明のL3としてはこれらに限定されるものではない。
 一般式(C)の詳細については、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0165~0167を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
It describes a specific example which is suitably used as the divalent linking group represented by L 3 in the general formula (C) below, but not limited to as L 3 of the present invention.
For details of the general formula (C), paragraphs 0165 to 0167 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000071
 一般式(D)で表されるハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
(一般式(D)中、L4はn価の連結基を表す。nは2~20の整数を表す。nが2以上のときは、DyeIVの構造は同じであっても異なっていてもよい。DyeIVは、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造を表す。)
 上記一般式(D)中、nは好ましくは3~15であり、特に好ましくは3~6である。
 一般式(D)において、nが2の場合、L4で表される2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキレン基(例えば、メチレン基、エチレン基、トリメチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基など)、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリーレン基(例えば、フェニレン基、ナフタレン基等)、置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環連結基、-CH=CH-、-O-、-S-、-NR-(Rは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はヘテロ環基を表す。)、-C(=O)-、-SO-、-SO2-,及び、これらを2個以上連結して形成される連結基が好適に挙げられる。
Halogenated phthalocyanine multimer represented by the general formula (D)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000072
(In general formula (D), L 4 represents an n-valent linking group. N represents an integer of 2 to 20. When n is 2 or more, the structures of DyeIV may be the same or different. DyeIV represents a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton.)
In the above general formula (D), n is preferably 3 to 15, particularly preferably 3 to 6.
In the general formula (D), when n is 2, the divalent linking group represented by L 4 is a substituted or unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, methylene group, ethylene group, trimethylene). Group, propylene group, butylene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms (eg, phenylene group, naphthalene group, etc.), substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic linking group, —CH═CH—, —O—, —S—, —NR— (R each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group), —C (═O) —, —SO—, — Preferable examples include SO 2 — and a linking group formed by linking two or more of these.
 nが3以上のn価の連結基は、置換もしくは無置換のアリーレン基(1,3,5-フェニレン基、1,2,4-フェニレン基、1,4,5,8-ナフタレン基など)、へテロ環連結基(例えば、1,3,5-トリアジン基など)、アルキレン連結基等を中心母核とし、上記2価の連結基が置換して形成される連結基が挙げられる。
 DyeIVが、上述した一般式(1)で表される化合物に由来する構造である場合、一般式(1)で表される化合物中のZ1~Z16のいずれかが一般式(D)中のL4と結合していることが好ましい。
An n-valent linking group where n is 3 or more is a substituted or unsubstituted arylene group (1,3,5-phenylene group, 1,2,4-phenylene group, 1,4,5,8-naphthalene group, etc.) And a linking group formed by substituting the divalent linking group with a heterocyclic linking group (for example, 1,3,5-triazine group, etc.), an alkylene linking group or the like as a central mother nucleus.
When DyeIV has a structure derived from the compound represented by the above general formula (1), any one of Z 1 to Z 16 in the compound represented by the general formula (1) is represented in the general formula (D). it is preferred that the of L 4 are attached.
 以下に一般式(D)中のL4の具体例を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。
 一般式(D)の詳細については、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0173~0178を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
Specific examples of L 4 in the general formula (D) are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
For details of the general formula (D), paragraphs 0173 to 0178 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 一般式(A)、一般式(B)及び一般式(C)のうちいずれかで表される構成単位を有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体、及び、一般式(D)で表されるハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体のうち、一般式(A)及び一般式(C)で表される構成単位を有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体、及び一般式(D)で表されるハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、共有結合で連結されているため、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体を含有する着色硬化性組成物は耐熱性に優れ、着色硬化性組成物を複数色の着色パターン形成に適用した場合において、隣接する他の着色パターンへの色移り抑制に効果があるため好ましい。また、特に一般式(A)で表される化合物は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体の分子量の制御がし易く好ましい。 A halogenated phthalocyanine multimer having a structural unit represented by any one of general formula (A), general formula (B) and general formula (C), and a halogenated phthalocyanine large amount represented by general formula (D) The halogenated phthalocyanine multimer having a structural unit represented by general formula (A) and general formula (C) and the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer represented by general formula (D) are linked by a covalent bond. Therefore, the colored curable composition containing the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is excellent in heat resistance, and when the colored curable composition is applied to the formation of a colored pattern of multiple colors, This is preferable because it is effective in suppressing color migration. In particular, the compound represented by the general formula (A) is preferable because the molecular weight of the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is easily controlled.
 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、上述したハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体のハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造部分に他の官能基を有していても良い。他の官能基としては、重合性基、酸基およびアルカリ可溶性基(例えば、カルボン酸、スルホン酸、リン酸及びフェノール性水酸基)等が例示される。
 また、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、上述したハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造を含む繰り返し単位の他に、他の繰り返し単位を含んでいても良い。他の繰り返し単位は、官能基を有していても良い。他の繰り返し単位としては、重合性基、酸基およびアルカリ可溶性基の少なくとも1種を含む繰り返し単位が例示される。すなわち、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、上記一般式(A)~(D)で表される繰り返し単位のほかに、他の繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。他の繰り返し単位は、1つのハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体中に、1種類のみ含まれていても良いし、2種類以上含まれていてもよい。
 また、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、上記一般式(A)~(D)で表されるハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体中に、他の官能基を有していても良い。
The halogenated phthalocyanine multimer may have another functional group in the structural portion including the halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton of the above-described halogenated phthalocyanine multimer. Examples of other functional groups include polymerizable groups, acid groups, and alkali-soluble groups (for example, carboxylic acid, sulfonic acid, phosphoric acid, and phenolic hydroxyl group).
Moreover, the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit including the structure containing the halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton described above. Other repeating units may have a functional group. As another repeating unit, the repeating unit containing at least 1 sort (s) of a polymeric group, an acid group, and an alkali-soluble group is illustrated. That is, the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer may have other repeating units in addition to the repeating units represented by the general formulas (A) to (D). One type of other repeating unit may be contained in one halogenated phthalocyanine multimer, or two or more types may be contained.
The halogenated phthalocyanine multimer may have other functional groups in the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer represented by the general formulas (A) to (D).
 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、重合性基を含むことが好ましい。重合性基は1種類のみ含んでいても良いし、2種類以上含んでいても良い。
 重合性基は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造が重合性基を含んでいても良いし、他の部分が含んでいても良い。本発明では、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造が重合性基を含むことが好ましい。
 また、本発明では、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン骨格を含む構造以外の他の部分が重合性基を含む態様も好ましい。
 重合性基としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な公知の重合性基を用いることができる。例えば、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基、環状エーテル基(エポキシ基、オキセタン基)、メチロール基等が挙げられる。特にエチレン性不飽和結合を含む基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロイル基がさらに好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジルおよび3,4-エポキシーシクロヘキシルメチル(メタ)アクリレート由来の(メタ)アクリロイル基がさらに好ましい。
 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、ラジカル重合性基を1つ有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン化合物に由来する繰り返し単位を有する重合体であることが好ましい。
The halogenated phthalocyanine multimer preferably contains a polymerizable group. One type of polymerizable group may be included, or two or more types may be included.
As for the polymerizable group, a structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton may contain a polymerizable group, or may contain other parts. In the present invention, the structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton preferably contains a polymerizable group.
Moreover, in this invention, the aspect in which other parts other than the structure containing a halogenated phthalocyanine skeleton contain a polymeric group is also preferable.
As the polymerizable group, a known polymerizable group that can be crosslinked by a radical, an acid, or heat can be used. Examples thereof include a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetane group), and a methylol group. In particular, a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond is preferable, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable, and a (meth) acryloyl group derived from glycidyl (meth) acrylate and 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth) acrylate is more preferable.
The halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is preferably a polymer having a repeating unit derived from a halogenated phthalocyanine compound having one radical polymerizable group.
 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体は、エポキシ基を有することも好ましい。エポキシ基を有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体としては、例えばラジカル重合性基を1つ有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、エポキシ基を有するラジカル重合性モノマー(例えばグリシジルアクリレート、グリシジルメタクリレートなど)に由来する繰り返し単位を有する重合体が挙げられる。 It is also preferred that the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer has an epoxy group. Examples of the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer having an epoxy group include a repeating unit derived from a halogenated phthalocyanine compound having one radical polymerizable group and a radical polymerizable monomer having an epoxy group (for example, glycidyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, etc.). Examples thereof include a polymer having a repeating unit derived therefrom.
 重合性基の導入方法としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0180~0188を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 例えば、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体を得る方法は、ラジカル重合性基を1つ有するハロゲン化フタロシアニン化合物と、反応性基を有するラジカル重合性モノマーを含むモノマー混合物をラジカル重合して得られる重合体に対して、反応性基と反応する基とエチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物を付加させる方法が挙げられる。
 上記反応性基としては、例えばカルボキシル基、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。上記反応性基を有するラジカル重合性モノマーとしては、例えばアクリル酸、メタクリル酸、ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート、ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートなどが挙げられる。
 上記反応性基と反応する基としては、例えば、エポキシ基、イソシアネート基などが挙げられる。
 上記エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する化合物としては、例えば、グリシジルアクリレート、グリシジルメタクリレート、2-アクリロイルオキシエチルイソシアネート、2-メタクリロイルオキシエチルイソシアネートなどが挙げられる。
As a method for introducing a polymerizable group, for example, paragraphs 0180 to 0188 in JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
For example, a method of obtaining a halogenated phthalocyanine multimer having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond is obtained by radicalizing a monomer mixture containing a halogenated phthalocyanine compound having one radical polymerizable group and a radical polymerizable monomer having a reactive group. The method of adding the compound which reacts with a reactive group and the compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated double bond with respect to the polymer obtained by superposition | polymerization is mentioned.
Examples of the reactive group include a carboxyl group and a hydroxy group. Examples of the radical polymerizable monomer having a reactive group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, hydroxyethyl acrylate, and hydroxyethyl methacrylate.
Examples of the group that reacts with the reactive group include an epoxy group and an isocyanate group.
Examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond include glycidyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, 2-acryloyloxyethyl isocyanate, 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate, and the like.
 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体が有する重合性基量は、染料1gに対し0.1~2.0mmolであることが好ましく、0.2~1.5mmolであることがより好ましく、0.3~1.0mmolであることがさらに好ましい。 The amount of polymerizable groups possessed by the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is preferably 0.1 to 2.0 mmol, more preferably 0.2 to 1.5 mmol, and more preferably 0.3 to 1. More preferably, it is 0 mmol.
 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体の重量平均分子量は、2,000~20,000であることが好ましく、3,000~15,000であることがより好ましく、4,000~10,000であることがさらに好ましい。また、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体の重量平均分子量/数平均分子量の比は1.0~3.0であることが好ましく、1.6~2.5であることがより好ましく、1.6~2.0であることがさらに好ましい。重合体の重量平均分子量及び分散度は、GPC測定によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。本明細書において、重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、例えば、HLC-8220(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとしてTSKgel Super AWM―H(東ソー(株)製、6.0mmID×15.0cmを、溶離液として10mmol/L リチウムブロミドNMP(N-メチルピロリジノン)溶液を用いることによって求めることができる。 The weight average molecular weight of the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is preferably 2,000 to 20,000, more preferably 3,000 to 15,000, and further preferably 4,000 to 10,000. preferable. The weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight ratio of the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer is preferably 1.0 to 3.0, more preferably 1.6 to 2.5, and more preferably 1.6 to 2 More preferably, it is 0.0. The weight average molecular weight and degree of dispersion of the polymer are defined as polystyrene conversion values by GPC measurement. In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polymer are, for example, HLC-8220 (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), and TSKgel Super Super AWM-H (Tosoh Corporation) as a column. 6.0 mm ID × 15.0 cm can be obtained by using a 10 mmol / L lithium bromide NMP (N-methylpyrrolidinone) solution as an eluent.
 本発明の組成物におけるハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料の配合量は、全固形分に対し、好ましくは20~70質量%であることが好ましく、30~60質量%であることがより好ましく、40~50質量%であることがさらに好ましい。
 また、本発明の組成物に含まれる着色剤のうち、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料の配合量は、55~80質量%であることが好ましく、60~75質量%であることがより好ましい。
 本発明の組成物における、ハロゲン原子を含まないフタロシアニン化合物の配合量は、全固形分に対し、5質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましい。このような範囲とすることにより、本発明の効果がより効果的に発揮される。
The blending amount of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye in the composition of the present invention is preferably 20 to 70% by mass, more preferably 30 to 60% by mass, and more preferably 40 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content. % Is more preferable.
In the colorant contained in the composition of the present invention, the blending amount of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is preferably 55 to 80% by mass, more preferably 60 to 75% by mass.
The blending amount of the phthalocyanine compound containing no halogen atom in the composition of the present invention is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total solid content. By setting it as such a range, the effect of this invention is exhibited more effectively.
<ラジカルトラップ剤>
 本発明の組成物は、ラジカルトラップ剤を含む。ラジカルトラップ剤は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。
 本発明におけるラジカルトラップ剤は、少なくとも1つ以上の環構造を有することが好ましい。ラジカルトラップ剤が環構造を有することにより、その立体的嵩高さから、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料とラジカルトラップ剤とが相互作用した場合の粒子間立体反発能が助長されると推定される。また、フタロシアニン環に対してラジカルトラップ剤の環構造が水平に向いた場合、フタロシアニン間のTT-TT相互作用(スタッキング)への阻害効果も大きいのではないかと推定される。
 本発明の組成物は、ラジカルトラップ剤として、ナフタレン誘導体、チオエーテル化合物、ヒンダードアミン化合物、紫外線吸収剤および熱重合防止剤から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。特に、本発明の組成物は、ラジカルトラップ剤として、ヒンダードアミン化合物、紫外線吸収剤および熱重合防止剤から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましい。
<Radical trapping agent>
The composition of the present invention contains a radical trapping agent. A radical trap agent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used together 2 or more types.
The radical trapping agent in the present invention preferably has at least one ring structure. When the radical trapping agent has a ring structure, it is presumed that the steric bulk of the radical trapping agent promotes the interparticle steric repulsion ability when the halogenated phthalocyanine dye interacts with the radical trapping agent. Moreover, when the ring structure of the radical trapping agent is oriented horizontally with respect to the phthalocyanine ring, it is presumed that the inhibitory effect on the TT-TT interaction (stacking) between phthalocyanines is also great.
The composition of the present invention preferably contains at least one selected from a naphthalene derivative, a thioether compound, a hindered amine compound, an ultraviolet absorber, and a thermal polymerization inhibitor as a radical trapping agent. In particular, the composition of the present invention more preferably contains at least one selected from a hindered amine compound, an ultraviolet absorber and a thermal polymerization inhibitor as a radical trapping agent.
 ナフタレン誘導体としては、例えば、ナフトヒドロキノンスルホナートオニウム塩等のナフトヒドロキノン化合物などが挙げられ、1,4-ジヒドロキシナフタレン、6-アミノ-2,3-ジヒドロ-5,8-ジヒドロキシナフタレン-1,4-ジオン、6-メチルアミノ-2,3-ジヒドロ-5,8-ジヒドロキシナフタレン-1,4-ジオン、6-エチルアミノ-2,3-ジヒドロ-5,8-ジヒドロキシナフタレン-1,4-ジオン、6-プロピルアミノ-2,3-ジヒドロ-5,8-ジヒドロキシナフタレン-1,4-ジオン、6-ブチルアミノ-2,3-ジヒドロ-5,8-ジヒドロキシナフタレン-1,4-ジオン、2-(α,α-ジメチル)ナフタレン、2-(α,αジメチルベンジル)ナフタレン、2-t-アミルナフタレン、2-トリメチルシリル-1,4,5,8,-ジメチル-1,2,3,4,4a,5,8,8a-オクタヒドロナフタレン等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、1,4-ジヒドロキシナフタレンが特に好ましい。 Examples of naphthalene derivatives include naphthohydroquinone compounds such as naphthohydroquinone sulfonate onium salts, and the like, and 1,4-dihydroxynaphthalene, 6-amino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4 -Dione, 6-methylamino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4-dione, 6-ethylamino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4-dione 6-propylamino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4-dione, 6-butylamino-2,3-dihydro-5,8-dihydroxynaphthalene-1,4-dione, -(Α, α-dimethyl) naphthalene, 2- (α, αdimethylbenzyl) naphthalene, 2-t-amylnaphthalene , 2-trimethylsilyl -1,4,5,8, - dimethyl-1,2,3,4,4a, 5,8,8a-octahydronaphthalene and the like. Among these, 1,4-dihydroxynaphthalene is particularly preferable.
 チオエーテル化合物としては、例えば、分子内に少なくとも一個のチオエーテル基を有する化合物であれば特に限定されない。例えば、3,3’-チオジプロピオン酸ジメチル、ジヘキシルチオジプロピオネート、ジノニルチオジプロピオネート、ジデシルチオジプロピオネート、ジウンデシルチオジプロピオネート、ジドデシルチオジプロピオネート、ジトリデシルチオジプロピオネート、ジテトラデシルチオジプロピオネート、ジペンタデシルチオジプロピオネート、ヘキサデシルチオジプロピオネート、ジヘプタデシルチオジプロピオネート、ジオクタデシルチオジプロピオネート、ジヘキシルチオジブチレート、ジノニルチオジブチレート、ジデシルチオジブチレート、ジウンデシルチオジブチレート、ジドデシルチオジブチレート、ジトリデシルチオジブチレート、ジテトラデシルチオジブチレート、ジペンタデシルチオジブチレート、ヘキサデシルチオジブチレート、3-メトキシ-2-[2-[シクロプロピル(3-フルオロフェニルイミノ)メチルチオメチル]フェニル]アクリル酸メチルエステル、ジヘプタデシルチオジブチレート等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、3,3’-チオジプロピオン酸ジメチルが特に好ましい。 The thioether compound is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound having at least one thioether group in the molecule, for example. For example, dimethyl 3,3′-thiodipropionate, dihexylthiodipropionate, dinonylthiodipropionate, didecylthiodipropionate, diundecylthiodipropionate, didodecylthiodipropionate, ditridecylthio Dipropionate, Ditetradecylthiodipropionate, Dipentadecylthiodipropionate, Hexadecylthiodipropionate, Diheptadecylthiodipropionate, Dioctadecylthiodipropionate, Dihexylthiodibutyrate, Dinonylthio Dibutyrate, Didecylthiodibutyrate, Diundecylthiodibutyrate, Didodecylthiodibutyrate, Ditridecylthiodibutyrate, Ditetradecylthiodibutyrate, Dipentadecylthiodibutyrate, Hexadecylthiodi Chireto, 3-methoxy-2- [2- [cyclopropyl- (3-fluorophenyl) methyl thio methyl] phenyl] methyl acrylate, di heptadecyl thio dibutyrate and the like. Of these, dimethyl 3,3'-thiodipropionate is particularly preferred.
 ヒンダードアミン化合物としては、例えば、下記式(RT1)で表される部分構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。
式(RT1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
(式(RT1)において、R1~R4はそれぞれ独立して水素原子またはアルキル基を表し、R5はアルキル基、アルコキシ基、またはアリールオキシ基を表す。)
 上記アルキル基としては、直鎖状の炭素数1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基がより好ましい。アルコキシ基に用いられるアルキル基としては、直鎖状の炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。アリールオキシ基に用いられるアリール基としては、フェニル基、ナフチル基などが挙げられる。
 また、ヒンダードアミン化合物の分子量は、2000以下が好ましく、1000以下がより好ましい。また市場での入手の容易性を考慮すると、ヒンダードアミン化合物の分子量は、400~700が好ましい。
 以上のようなヒンダードアミン化合物としては、市販されているBASF社製のTINUVIN123、TINUVIN144、TINUVIN152や、アデカ社製のアデカスタブLA-52などを好ましく用いることができる。
Examples of the hindered amine compound include compounds having a partial structure represented by the following formula (RT1).
Formula (RT1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000074
(In Formula (RT1), R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and R 5 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an aryloxy group.)
As the alkyl group, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable. The alkyl group used for the alkoxy group is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Examples of the aryl group used for the aryloxy group include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group.
Further, the molecular weight of the hindered amine compound is preferably 2000 or less, and more preferably 1000 or less. In view of easy availability in the market, the molecular weight of the hindered amine compound is preferably 400 to 700.
As such a hindered amine compound, commercially available TINUVIN123, TINUVIN144, TINUVIN152 manufactured by BASF, Adeka Stub LA-52 manufactured by Adeka, and the like can be preferably used.
 紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、サリシレート系、ベンゾフェノン系、ベンゾトリアゾール系、シアノアクリレート系、ニッケルキレート系などが挙げられ、ベンゾトリアゾール系の化合物が好ましい。
 ベンゾトリアゾール系の化合物としては、例えば、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4,6-ビス(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)フェノール、2-(2’-ヒドロキシ-5’-メルフェニル)ベンゾトリアゾール、2-(2’-ヒドロキシ-3’-t-ブチル-5’-メチルフェニル)-5-クロロベンゾトリアゾール、2-[2-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ビス(α,α-ジメチルベンジル)フェニル]-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4,6-ビス(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)フェノールが特に好ましい。市販されているベンゾトリアゾール系の化合物としては、BASF社製のTINUVIN900、TINUVIN928、TINUVIN P、TINUVIN234、TINUVIN326、TINUVIN329などを用いることができる。
 その他、本発明で用いることができる紫外線吸収剤としては、フェニルサリシレート、4-t-ブチルフェニルサリシレート、2,4-ジ-t-ブチルフェニル-3 ’,5’-ジ-t-ブチル-4’-ヒドロキシベンゾエート、2,4-ジヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2-ヒドロキシ-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン、2-ヒドロキシ-4-n-オクチルオキシベンゾフェノン、エチル-2-シアノ-3,3-ジフェニルアクリレート、2,2’-ヒドロキシ-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン、ニッケルジブチルジチオカーバメート、ビス(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピぺリジン)-セバケート、4-ヒドロキシ-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン縮合物、コハク酸-ビス(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジン)エステル、7-{[4-クロロ-6-(ジエチルアミノ)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル]アミノ}-3-フェニルクマリン等が挙げられる。
Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include salicylates, benzophenones, benzotriazoles, cyanoacrylates, nickel chelates, and the like, and benzotriazole compounds are preferred.
Examples of benzotriazole compounds include 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4,6-bis (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) phenol and 2- (2′-hydroxy-5 ′). -Merphenyl) benzotriazole, 2- (2′-hydroxy-3′-t-butyl-5′-methylphenyl) -5-chlorobenzotriazole, 2- [2-hydroxy-3,5-bis (α, α-dimethylbenzyl) phenyl] -2H-benzotriazole and the like. Among these, 2- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4,6-bis (1-methyl-1-phenylethyl) phenol is particularly preferable. Examples of commercially available benzotriazole compounds include TINUVIN900, TINUVIN928, TINUVINP, TINUVIN234, TINUVIN326, and TINUVIN329 manufactured by BASF.
Other ultraviolet absorbers that can be used in the present invention include phenyl salicylate, 4-t-butylphenyl salicylate, 2,4-di-t-butylphenyl-3 ′, 5′-di-t-butyl-4 '-Hydroxybenzoate, 2,4-dihydroxybenzophenone, 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, 2-hydroxy-4-n-octyloxybenzophenone, ethyl-2-cyano-3,3-diphenyl acrylate, 2,2' -Hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, nickel dibutyldithiocarbamate, bis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidine) -sebacate, 4-hydroxy-2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine Condensate, succinic acid-bis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidine) S Le, 7 - {[4-chloro-6- (diethylamino) -1,3,5-triazin-2-yl] amino} -3-phenyl coumarin, and the like.
 熱重合防止剤としては、例えば、ハイドロキノン、ハイドロキノンモノメチルエーテル、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2-メルカプトベンズイミダゾール、フェノチアジン、ペンタエリトリトールテトラキス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオナート]等が挙げられ、p-メトキシフェノールおよびペンタエリトリトールテトラキス[3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオナート]から選択される少なくとも1種を用いることが好ましい。
 市販品としては、例えば、ADEKA(株)社製 アデカスタブAO-60を用いることができる。
Examples of the thermal polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, hydroquinone monomethyl ether, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl- 6-t-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, phenothiazine, pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl- 4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] and the like, and at least one selected from p-methoxyphenol and pentaerythritol tetrakis [3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate] is used. It is preferable.
As a commercially available product, for example, ADK STAB AO-60 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation can be used.
 本発明の組成物には、上述したラジカルトラップ剤以外にも、特開2011-141534号公報の段落0183~0210に記載の酸化剤、特開2011-253174号公報の段落0103~0153に記載のラジカル捕捉能を有する重合性化合物(例えば、ヒンダードアミン型、ヒンダードフェノール型重合性化合物)等を用いることができ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 In addition to the radical trapping agent described above, the composition of the present invention includes an oxidizing agent described in paragraphs 0183 to 0210 of JP2011-141534A, and paragraphs 0103 to 0153 described in JP2011-253174A. A polymerizable compound having a radical scavenging ability (for example, a hindered amine type or a hindered phenol type polymerizable compound) or the like can be used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 本発明の組成物におけるラジカルトラップ剤の配合量は、全固形分に対し、好ましくは1~20質量%であることが好ましく、2~15質量%であることがさらに好ましく、3~10質量%であることが特に好ましい。
 また、本発明の組成物中のハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料に対するラジカルトラップ剤のモル比は、0.1~5であることが好ましく、0.2~1であることがさらに好ましい。
The blending amount of the radical trapping agent in the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 20% by mass, more preferably 2 to 15% by mass, and more preferably 3 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content. It is particularly preferred that
The molar ratio of the radical trapping agent to the halogenated phthalocyanine dye in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 5, and more preferably 0.2 to 1.
<他の着色剤>
 本発明の組成物は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン化合物に加えて、他の着色剤を含んでいてもよく、他の着色剤を含んでいる方が好ましい。他の着色剤としては、黄色色素が好ましく用いられ、染料でも顔料でも、染料と顔料の混合系でもよい。他の着色剤は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。
<Other colorants>
The composition of the present invention may contain other colorants in addition to the halogenated phthalocyanine compound, and preferably contains other colorants. As the other colorant, a yellow pigment is preferably used, and it may be a dye, a pigment, or a mixed system of a dye and a pigment. Other colorants may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 顔料としては、従来公知の種々の無機顔料または有機顔料を挙げることができる。また、無機顔料であれ有機顔料であれ、高透過率であることが好ましいことを考慮すると、平均粒子径がなるべく小さい顔料の使用が好ましく、ハンドリング性を考慮すると、上記顔料の平均粒子径は、0.01μm~0.1μmが好ましく、0.01μm~0.05μmがより好ましい。 Examples of the pigment include conventionally known various inorganic pigments or organic pigments. Further, considering that it is preferable to have a high transmittance, whether it is an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, it is preferable to use a pigment having an average particle size as small as possible, and considering the handling properties, the average particle size of the pigment is 0.01 μm to 0.1 μm is preferable, and 0.01 μm to 0.05 μm is more preferable.
 本発明において好ましく用いることができる顔料として、以下のものを挙げることができる。但し本発明は、これらに限定されるものではない。
 C.I.Pigment Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214
 これら有機顔料は、単独若しくは色純度を上げるため種々組合せて用いることができる。
Examples of the pigment that can be preferably used in the present invention include the following. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
C. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 17 , 175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214
These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to increase color purity.
 着色剤が染料である場合には、組成物中に均一に溶解した状態の着色硬化性組成物を得ることができる。染料としては特に制限はなく、従来カラーフィルタ用として公知の染料が使用できる。
 化学構造としては、例えば、アゾ系(例えば、C.I.solvent yellow 162)、メチン系(C.I.solvent yellow 93)などが挙げられる。
 メチン系染料としては、モノメチン染料が好ましく、下記一般式(5)で表されるモノメチン染料がより好ましい。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
(一般式(5)中、R11は、それぞれ、アルキル基またはビニル基を表し、R12は、それぞれ、置換基を有する芳香族環基を表す。)
 R11は炭素数1~12のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
12は、フェニル基、ナフチル基が好ましく、置換基としては、アルキルスルホニルアミノ基、ビニルスルホニルアミノ基、アリールスルホニルアミノ基、アルキルカルボニルアミノ基、ビニルカルボニルアミノ基、アリールカルボニルアミノ基が好ましく、特にアルキルスルホニルアミノ基が好ましい。炭素数1~12アルキル基は、不飽和結合を有しても良く、その様な置換基としては、アリルスルホニルアミノ基が挙げられる。
When the colorant is a dye, a colored curable composition in a state of being uniformly dissolved in the composition can be obtained. There is no restriction | limiting in particular as dye, A well-known dye can be used for conventional color filters.
Examples of the chemical structure include azo series (for example, CI solvent yellow 162) and methine series (CI solvent yellow 93).
As the methine dye, a monomethine dye is preferable, and a monomethine dye represented by the following general formula (5) is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000075
(In General Formula (5), R 11 represents an alkyl group or a vinyl group, and R 12 represents an aromatic ring group having a substituent.)
R 11 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
R 12 is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and the substituent is preferably an alkylsulfonylamino group, a vinylsulfonylamino group, an arylsulfonylamino group, an alkylcarbonylamino group, a vinylcarbonylamino group, or an arylcarbonylamino group. An alkylsulfonylamino group is preferred. The alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms may have an unsaturated bond, and examples of such a substituent include an allylsulfonylamino group.
 また、着色剤としては、酸性染料および/またはその誘導体が好適に使用できる場合がある。
 その他、直接染料、塩基性染料、媒染染料、酸性媒染染料、アゾイック染料、分散染料、油溶染料、食品染料、および/または、これらの誘導体等も有用に使用することができる。
Moreover, as a coloring agent, an acid dye and / or a derivative thereof may be suitably used.
In addition, a direct dye, a basic dye, a mordant dye, an acid mordant dye, an azoic dye, a disperse dye, an oil-soluble dye, a food dye, and / or a derivative thereof can be usefully used.
 以下に酸性染料の具体例を挙げるが、これらに限定されるものではない。例えば、以下のものを挙げることができる。
 acid yellow 1,3,7,9,11,17,23,25,29,34,36,38,40、42,54,65,72,73,76,79,98,99,111,112,113,114,116,119,123,128,134,135,138,139,140,144,150、155,157,160,161,163,168,169,172,177,178,179,184,190,193,196,197,199,202,203,204,205,207,212,214,220,221,228,230,232,235,238,240,242,243,251;
Specific examples of the acid dye are shown below, but are not limited thereto. For example, the following can be mentioned.
acid yellow 1,3,7,9,11,17,23,25,29,34,36,38,40,42,54,65,72,73,76,79,98,99,111,112, 113, 114, 116, 119, 123, 128, 134, 135, 138, 139, 140, 144, 150, 155, 157, 160, 161, 163, 168, 169, 172, 177, 178, 179, 184 190,193,196,197,199,202,203,204,205,207,212,214,220,221,228,230,232,235,238,240,242,243,251;
 Direct Yellow 2,33,34,35,38,39,43,47,50,54,58,68,69,70,71,86,93,94,95,98,102,108,109,129,136,138,141;
 Food Yellow 3;
 Mordant Yellow 5,8,10,16,20,26,30,31,33,42,43,45,56,50,61,62,65;
 およびこれらの染料の誘導体。
Direct Yellow 2,33,34,35,38,39,43,47,50,54,58,68,69,70,71,86,93,94,95,98,102,108,109,129, 136, 138, 141;
Food Yellow 3;
Modern Yellow 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 26, 30, 31, 33, 42, 43, 45, 56, 50, 61, 62, 65;
And derivatives of these dyes.
 本発明で用いる黄色色素は、特に、アゾ系色素および/またはメチン系色素が好ましく、アゾ系色素がより好ましい。 The yellow dye used in the present invention is particularly preferably an azo dye and / or a methine dye, and more preferably an azo dye.
<顔料分散物>
 本発明の組成物の調製に顔料を用いる場合には、顔料分散物としておくことが好ましい。顔料の分散性を向上させる観点から、顔料分散剤を添加することが好ましい。
<Pigment dispersion>
When a pigment is used for preparing the composition of the present invention, it is preferably a pigment dispersion. From the viewpoint of improving the dispersibility of the pigment, it is preferable to add a pigment dispersant.
 本発明に用いうる顔料分散剤としては、高分子分散剤〔例えば、ポリアミドアミンとその塩、ポリカルボン酸とその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン、アルカノールアミン、顔料誘導体等を挙げることができる。
 高分子分散剤は、その構造から更に直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子に分類することができる。
Examples of pigment dispersants that can be used in the present invention include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamines and salts thereof, polycarboxylic acids and salts thereof, high molecular weight unsaturated acid esters, modified polyurethanes, modified polyesters, and modified poly (meth) acrylates. , (Meth) acrylic copolymers, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensates], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate esters, polyoxyethylene alkyl amines, alkanol amines, pigment derivatives, and the like.
The polymer dispersant can be further classified into a linear polymer, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer from the structure thereof.
 高分子分散剤は顔料の表面に吸着することで、顔料の再凝集を防止するように作用する。そのため、顔料分散剤としては、顔料表面へのアンカー部位を有する末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、ブロック型高分子が好ましい構造として挙げることができる。
 一方で、顔料誘導体は顔料表面を改質することで、高分子分散剤の吸着を促進させる効果を有する。
The polymer dispersant acts to prevent re-aggregation of the pigment by adsorbing on the surface of the pigment. Therefore, as the pigment dispersant, a terminal-modified polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface, a graft polymer, and a block polymer can be mentioned as preferred structures.
On the other hand, the pigment derivative has an effect of promoting the adsorption of the polymer dispersant by modifying the pigment surface.
 本発明に用いうる顔料分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能である。そのような具体例としては、以下のものが挙げられる。
 BYKChemie社製「Disperbyk-101(ポリアミドアミン燐酸塩)、107(カルボン酸エステル)、110(酸基を含む共重合物)、130(ポリアミド)、161、162、163、164、165、166、170(高分子共重合物)」、「BYK-P104、P105(高分子量不飽和ポリカルボン酸)、EFKA社製「EFKA4047、4050~4010~4165(ポリウレタン系)、EFKA4330~4340(ブロック共重合体)、4400~4402(変性ポリアクリレート)、5010(ポリエステルアミド)、5765(高分子量ポリカルボン酸塩)、6220(脂肪酸ポリエステル)、6745(フタロシアニン誘導体)、6750(アゾ顔料誘導体)」、味の素ファンテクノ社製「アジスパーPB821、PB822」、共栄社化学社製「フローレンTG-710(ウレタンオリゴマー)」、「ポリフローNo.50E、No.300(アクリル系共重合体)」、楠本化成社製「ディスパロンKS-860、873SN、874、#2150(脂肪族多価カルボン酸)、#7004(ポリエーテルエステル)、DA-703-50、DA-705、DA-725」、花王社製「デモールRN、N(ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)、MS、C、SN-B(芳香族スルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)」、「ホモゲノールL-18(高分子ポリカルボン酸)」、「エマルゲン920、930、935、985(ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル)」、「アセタミン86(ステアリルアミンアセテート)」、ルーブリゾール社製「ソルスパース5000(フタロシアニン誘導体)、22000(アゾ顔料誘導体)、13240(ポリエステルアミン)、3000、17000、27000(末端部に機能部を有する高分子)、24000、28000、32000、38500(グラフト型高分子)」、日光ケミカル者製「ニッコールT106(ポリオキシエチレンソルビタンモノオレート)、MYS-IEX(ポリオキシエチレンモノステアレート)」等。
The pigment dispersant that can be used in the present invention is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples include the following.
“Disperbyk-101 (polyamideamine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester), 110 (copolymer containing an acid group)”, 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 manufactured by BYK Chemie (Polymer copolymer) ”,“ BYK-P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) ”,“ EFKA 4047, 4050-4010-4165 (polyurethane) ”, EFKA 4330-4340 (block copolymer) manufactured by EFKA 4400-4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyesteramide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylate), 6220 (fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (azo pigment derivative) ", Ajinomoto Fan Techno Co., Ltd. Made by Addis -PB821, PB822 "," Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer) "manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.," Polyflow No. 50E, No. 300 (acrylic copolymer) "," Disparon KS-860, 873SN "manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd. , 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polyvalent carboxylic acid), # 7004 (polyetherester), DA-703-50, DA-705, DA-725, “Demol RN, N (naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin) manufactured by Kao Corporation Polycondensate), MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid formalin polycondensate) ”,“ homogenol L-18 (polymer polycarboxylic acid) ”,“ Emulgen 920, 930, 935, 985 (polyoxy) Ethylene nonylphenyl ether) ”,“ Acetamine 86 (stearylamine acetate) ”, Lube “Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative), 22000 (azo pigment derivative), 13240 (polyesteramine), 3000, 17000, 27000 (polymer having a functional part at the terminal), 24000, 28000, 32000, 38500 (graft) Type polymer), “Nikkor T106 (polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate), MYS-IEX (polyoxyethylene monostearate)” manufactured by Nikko Chemical.
 また、特開2011-070156号公報の段落番号0028~0124に記載の分散剤や特開2007-277514号公報に記載の分散剤も好ましく用いられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 In addition, a dispersant described in paragraphs 0028 to 0124 of JP2011-070156A and a dispersant described in JP2007-277514A are preferably used, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 これらの顔料分散剤は、単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。本発明においては、特に、顔料誘導体と高分子分散剤とを組み合わせて使用することが好ましい。 These pigment dispersants may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the present invention, it is particularly preferable to use a combination of a pigment derivative and a polymer dispersant.
 本発明の組成物における顔料分散剤の含有量としては、顔料100質量部に対して、1~80質量部であることが好ましく、5~70質量部がより好ましく、10~60質量部であることが更に好ましい。
 具体的には、高分子分散剤を用いる場合であれば、その使用量としては、顔料100質量部に対して、質量換算で5~100質量部の範囲が好ましく、10~80質量部の範囲であることがより好ましい。
 また、顔料誘導体を併用する場合、顔料誘導体の使用量としては、顔料100質量部に対し、質量換算で1~30質量部の範囲にあることが好ましく、3~20質量部の範囲にあることがより好ましく、5~15質量部の範囲にあることが特に好ましい。
The content of the pigment dispersant in the composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 80 parts by mass, more preferably 5 to 70 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment, and 10 to 60 parts by mass. More preferably.
Specifically, when a polymer dispersant is used, the amount thereof used is preferably in the range of 5 to 100 parts by mass in terms of mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment, and in the range of 10 to 80 parts by mass. It is more preferable that
When the pigment derivative is used in combination, the amount of the pigment derivative used is preferably in the range of 1 to 30 parts by mass, preferably in the range of 3 to 20 parts by mass, with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. Is more preferable, and the range of 5 to 15 parts by mass is particularly preferable.
-顔料誘導体-
 着色剤が顔料を含有する場合、顔料に対する分散樹脂の吸着性を上げるため、更に、顔料誘導体を含有することが好ましい。顔料誘導体とは、有機顔料の一部分を、酸性基、塩基性基またはフタルイミドメチル基で置換した構造を有する化合物である。顔料誘導体としては、分散性および分散安定性の観点から、酸性基または塩基性基を含有することが好ましい。
-Pigment derivatives-
When the colorant contains a pigment, it is preferable to further contain a pigment derivative in order to increase the adsorptivity of the dispersion resin to the pigment. The pigment derivative is a compound having a structure in which a part of an organic pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group or a phthalimidomethyl group. The pigment derivative preferably contains an acidic group or a basic group from the viewpoint of dispersibility and dispersion stability.
 顔料誘導体を構成するための有機顔料としては、ジケトピロロピロール系顔料、アゾ系顔料、フタロシアニン系顔料、アントラキノン系顔料、キナクリドン系顔料、ジオキサジン系顔料、ペリノン系顔料、ペリレン系顔料、チオインジゴ系顔料、イソインドリン系顔料、イソインドリノン系顔料、キノフタロン系顔料、スレン系顔料、金属錯体系顔料等が挙げられる。
 また、顔料誘導体が有する酸性基としては、スルホン酸、カルボン酸およびその4級アンモニウム塩が好ましく、カルボン酸基およびスルホン酸基がさらに好ましく、スルホン酸基が特に好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基が好ましく、特に三級アミノ基が好ましい。
Examples of the organic pigment for constituting the pigment derivative include diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, perinone pigments, perylene pigments, thioindigo pigments , Isoindoline pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, selenium pigments, metal complex pigments, and the like.
Moreover, as an acidic group which a pigment derivative has, a sulfonic acid, carboxylic acid, and its quaternary ammonium salt are preferable, a carboxylic acid group and a sulfonic acid group are more preferable, and a sulfonic acid group is especially preferable. The basic group possessed by the pigment derivative is preferably an amino group, particularly preferably a tertiary amino group.
 顔料誘導体としては、特に、キノリン系、ベンズイミダゾロン系およびイソインドリン系の顔料誘導体が好ましく、キノリン系およびベンズイミダゾロン系の顔料誘導体がさらに好ましい。下記一般式(P)で表わされる構造を有する顔料誘導体が特に好ましい。 As the pigment derivative, quinoline-based, benzimidazolone-based and isoindoline-based pigment derivatives are particularly preferable, and quinoline-based and benzimidazolone-based pigment derivatives are more preferable. A pigment derivative having a structure represented by the following general formula (P) is particularly preferred.
一般式(P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
General formula (P)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000076
 一般式(P)中、Aは、下記一般式(PA-1)~(PA-3)から選ばれる部分構造を表す。Bは単結合、または(t+1)価の連結基を表す。Cは、単結合、-NH-、-CONH-、-CO2-、-SO2NH-、-O-、-S-またはSO2-を表す。Dは、単結合、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基またはアリーレン基を表す。Eは、-SO3H、-SO3M(Mはアルカリ金属原子を表す)、-CO2HまたはN(Rpa)(Rpb)を表す。RpaおよびRpbは、各々独立して、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、RpaおよびRpbは互いに連結して環を形成してもよい。tは1~5の整数を表す。 In the general formula (P), A represents a partial structure selected from the following general formulas (PA-1) to (PA-3). B represents a single bond or a (t + 1) -valent linking group. C represents a single bond, —NH—, —CONH—, —CO 2 —, —SO 2 NH—, —O—, —S— or SO 2 —. D represents a single bond, an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group or an arylene group. E represents —SO 3 H, —SO 3 M (M represents an alkali metal atom), —CO 2 H or N (Rpa) (Rpb). Rpa and Rpb each independently represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and Rpa and Rpb may be linked to each other to form a ring. t represents an integer of 1 to 5.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000077
 一般式(PA-1)および(PA-2)中、Rp1は、炭素数1~5のアルキル基またはアリール基を表す。一般式(PA-3)中、Rp2は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、またはヒドロキシル基を表す。sは、1~4の整数を表す。sが2以上の場合、複数のRp2は、互いに同じであっても、異なっていてもよい。一般式(PA-1)および一般式(PA-3)中、Rp3は、単結合、-NH-、-CONH-、-CO2-、-SO2NH-、-O-、-S-またはSO2-を表す。*は一般式(P)中のBとの連結部を表す。 In the general formulas (PA-1) and (PA-2), Rp1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or an aryl group. In General Formula (PA-3), Rp2 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, or a hydroxyl group. s represents an integer of 1 to 4. When s is 2 or more, the plurality of Rp2s may be the same as or different from each other. In general formula (PA-1) and general formula (PA-3), Rp3 represents a single bond, —NH—, —CONH—, —CO 2 —, —SO 2 NH—, —O—, —S— or Represents SO 2 —. * Represents a connecting part with B in the general formula (P).
 一般式(P)中、Rp1は、特にメチル基またはフェニル基が好ましく、メチル基が最も好ましい。一般式(PA-3)中、Rp2は、水素原子またはハロゲン原子が好ましく、水素原子または塩素原子が最も好ましい。 In general formula (P), Rp1 is particularly preferably a methyl group or a phenyl group, and most preferably a methyl group. In general formula (PA-3), Rp2 is preferably a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and most preferably a hydrogen atom or a chlorine atom.
 一般式(P)中、Bで表される(t+1)価の連結基としては、例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アリーレン基およびヘテロアリーレン基が挙げられる。これらのうちでも、特に、下記構造式(PA-4)~(PA-9)で表される連結基が好ましい。 In the general formula (P), examples of the (t + 1) -valent linking group represented by B include an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an arylene group, and a heteroarylene group. Among these, linking groups represented by the following structural formulas (PA-4) to (PA-9) are particularly preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000078
 構造式(PA-4)~(PA-9)のうちでも、特にBとして、構造式(PA-5)または(PA-8)で表される連結基を有する顔料誘導体が、分散性により優れることから好ましい。 Among structural formulas (PA-4) to (PA-9), pigment derivatives having a linking group represented by the structural formula (PA-5) or (PA-8), particularly as B, are more excellent in dispersibility. This is preferable.
 一般式(P)中、Dで表されるアルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基およびアリーレン基としては、例えば、メチレン、エチレン、プロピレン、ブチレン、ペンチレン、ヘキシレン、デシレン、シクロプロピレン、シクロブチレン、シクロペンチレン、シクロヘキシレン、シクロオクチレン、シクロデシレン、フェニレン、ナフチレン等が挙げられる。これらのうちでも、Dとしては、特にアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルキレンが最も好ましい。 In general formula (P), examples of the alkylene group, cycloalkylene group and arylene group represented by D include methylene, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, decylene, cyclopropylene, cyclobutylene, cyclopentylene, Examples include cyclohexylene, cyclooctylene, cyclodecylene, phenylene, naphthylene, and the like. Among these, as D, an alkylene group is particularly preferable, and alkylene having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is most preferable.
 一般式(P)中、Eが-N(Rpa)(Rpb)を表す場合に、RpaおよびRpbにおけるアルキル基およびアリール基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、イソペンチル基、ネオペンチル基、ヘキシル基、オクチル基、デシル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、シクロオクチル基、シクロデシル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基等を挙げることができる。RpaおよびRpbとしては、特にアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が最も好ましい。上記tは1または2が好ましい。 In the general formula (P), when E represents —N (Rpa) (Rpb), examples of the alkyl group and aryl group in Rpa and Rpb include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, and a butyl group. , Sec-butyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, isopentyl group, neopentyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, decyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, cyclooctyl group, cyclodecyl group, phenyl Group, naphthyl group and the like. As Rpa and Rpb, an alkyl group is particularly preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is most preferable. T is preferably 1 or 2.
 顔料誘導体の具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-64998号公報の段落0217~0222の化合物を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 As specific examples of pigment derivatives, for example, the compounds of paragraphs 0217 to 0222 of JP2013-64998A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物における顔料誘導体の含有量は、顔料の全質量に対し、1~30質量%が好ましく、3~20質量%がさらに好ましい。顔料誘導体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 The content of the pigment derivative in the colored curable composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 3 to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the pigment. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
-溶剤-
 顔料分散物における溶剤としては、一般の顔料分散性組成物に用いられる有機溶剤であれば特に限定されない。溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。例えば、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、乳酸エチル、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、n-プロパノール、2-プロパノール、n-ブタノール、シクロヘキサノール、エチレングリコール、ジエチレングリコール、トルエン、キシレンなどの溶剤を挙げることができ、融点や粘度、顔料の分散性を調整するためにこれらのうち複数を併用することも可能である。
-solvent-
The solvent in the pigment dispersion is not particularly limited as long as it is an organic solvent used in general pigment dispersible compositions. A solvent may be used individually by 1 type and may be used together 2 or more types. For example, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, ethyl lactate, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, n-propanol , 2-propanol, n-butanol, cyclohexanol, ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, toluene, xylene, and the like, and a plurality of these may be used in combination to adjust the melting point, viscosity, and pigment dispersibility. Is also possible.
 顔料分散物における溶剤の含有量は、顔料分散物の用途などに応じて適宜選択される。
 顔料分散物が後述する着色硬化性組成物の調製に用いられる場合には、取り扱い性の観点から、「顔料と顔料分散剤との総和」が「顔料分散物の溶剤を除いた総質量」に対して5~50質量%となるように含有することができる。
The content of the solvent in the pigment dispersion is appropriately selected according to the use of the pigment dispersion.
When the pigment dispersion is used for the preparation of a colored curable composition described later, from the viewpoint of handleability, the “total sum of the pigment and the pigment dispersant” is changed to “the total mass excluding the solvent of the pigment dispersion”. The content can be 5 to 50% by mass.
 上記他の着色剤の含有量は、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で使用でき、本発明の着色硬化性組成物の全固形分に対して、10~55質量%であることが好ましく、15~45質量%であることがより好ましい。また、吸収強度比(450nmの吸収/650nmの吸収)が、0.95~1.05の範囲となるように、着色硬化性組成物に添加されることが好ましい。 The content of the other colorant can be used within a range not impairing the effects of the present invention, and is preferably 10 to 55% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored curable composition of the present invention. More preferably, it is ˜45 mass%. Further, it is preferably added to the colored curable composition so that the absorption intensity ratio (absorption at 450 nm / absorption at 650 nm) is in the range of 0.95 to 1.05.
<熱硬化性化合物>
 本発明の組成物は、熱硬化性化合物を少なくとも一種を含有する。熱硬化性化合物と光硬化性化合物を併用してもよい。ここで、熱硬化性化合物とは、加熱により膜硬化が行なえるものをいい、通常、180℃以上の加熱で硬化する化合物をいう。また、光硬化性化合物とは、光により膜硬化が行なえるものをいう。本発明において、熱硬化性化合物は単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 本発明で用いる熱硬化性化合物は、例えば、熱硬化性官能基を有する化合物を用いることができる。熱硬化性官能基としては、例えば、エポキシ基、メチロール基、アルコキシメチル基、アシルオキシメチル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、イソシアネート基、ビニル基、およびメルカプト基から選ばれる少なくとも1つの基を有するものが好ましい。熱硬化性化合物としては、1分子内に熱硬化性官能基を2つ以上有するものがより好ましく、1分子内にエポキシ基を2つ以上有する化合物がさらに好ましい。
 また、本発明で用いる熱硬化性化合物は、エポシキ化合物、メラミン化合物(例えば、アルコキシメチル化、アシルオキシメチル化メラミン化合物)、ウレア化合物(例えば、アルコキシメチル化、アシルオキシメチル化ウレア化合物)、フェノール化合物(例えば、ヒドロキシメチル化またはアルコキシメチル化フェノール化合物または樹脂、およびアルコキシメチルエーテル化フェノール化合物)等が好ましい例として挙げられ、エポキシ化合物、メラミン化合物がより好ましく、エポキシ化合物がさらに好ましい。
<Thermosetting compound>
The composition of the present invention contains at least one thermosetting compound. You may use a thermosetting compound and a photocurable compound together. Here, the thermosetting compound refers to a compound that can be cured by heating, and generally refers to a compound that is cured by heating at 180 ° C. or higher. Moreover, a photocurable compound means what can perform film | membrane hardening with light. In this invention, a thermosetting compound may be used independently and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
As the thermosetting compound used in the present invention, for example, a compound having a thermosetting functional group can be used. Examples of the thermosetting functional group include those having at least one group selected from an epoxy group, a methylol group, an alkoxymethyl group, an acyloxymethyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, an isocyanate group, a vinyl group, and a mercapto group. preferable. As the thermosetting compound, those having two or more thermosetting functional groups in one molecule are more preferable, and compounds having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule are more preferable.
The thermosetting compound used in the present invention includes epoxy compounds, melamine compounds (for example, alkoxymethylated, acyloxymethylated melamine compounds), urea compounds (for example, alkoxymethylated, acyloxymethylated urea compounds), phenol compounds ( For example, preferred examples include hydroxymethylated or alkoxymethylated phenol compounds or resins, and alkoxymethyl etherified phenol compounds), epoxy compounds and melamine compounds are more preferred, and epoxy compounds are more preferred.
 本発明で用いる熱硬化性化合物は、低分子化合物(例えば、分子量2000未満、さらには、分子量1000未満)でもよいし、高分子化合物(例えば、分子量1000以上、ポリマーの場合は、重量平均分子量が1000以上)のいずれでもよい。本発明では、分子量1000以上のものが好ましく、2000~100000のものがより好ましい。本発明では特に、1分子中に2つ以上のエポキシ基を有し、分子量が1000以上の化合物が好ましい。
 上記重量平均分子量は、上述したハロゲン化フタロシアニン多量体の重量平均分子量と同様の方法で求めることができる。
The thermosetting compound used in the present invention may be a low molecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 2000, and further a molecular weight of less than 1000), or a high molecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of 1000 or more, in the case of a polymer, the weight average molecular weight is 1000 or more). In the present invention, those having a molecular weight of 1000 or more are preferred, and those having a molecular weight of 2000 to 100,000 are more preferred. In the present invention, a compound having 2 or more epoxy groups in one molecule and a molecular weight of 1000 or more is particularly preferable.
The said weight average molecular weight can be calculated | required by the method similar to the weight average molecular weight of the halogenated phthalocyanine multimer mentioned above.
<エポキシ化合物>
 エポキシ化合物が低分子化合物の場合、下記一般式(EP1)で表される化合物が挙げられる。
<Epoxy compound>
When the epoxy compound is a low molecular compound, a compound represented by the following general formula (EP1) can be mentioned.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000079
 式(EP1)中、REP1~REP3は、それぞれ、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基を表し、このアルキル基は、環状構造を有するものであってもよく、また、置換基を有していてもよい。またREP1とREP2、REP2とREP3は、互いに結合して環構造を形成していてもよい。アルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては例えば、ヒドロキシル基、シアノ基、アルコキシ基、アルキルカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アルキルスルホン基、アルキルスルホニル基、アルキルアミノ基、アルキルアミド基、などが挙げられる。
 QEPは単結合若しくはnEP価の有機基を表す。REP1~REP3は、QEPとも結合して環構造を形成していても良い。
 nEPは2以上の整数を表し、好ましくは2~10、更に好ましくは2~6である。但しQEPが単結合の場合、nEPは2である。
In the formula (EP1), R EP1 to R EP3 each represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an alkyl group, and the alkyl group may have a cyclic structure, and has a substituent. May be. R EP1 and R EP2 and R EP2 and R EP3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure. Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group may have include a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, an alkoxy group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, an alkylthio group, an alkylsulfone group, an alkylsulfonyl group, and an alkylamino group. Groups, alkylamide groups, and the like.
QEP represents a single bond or an nEP- valent organic group. R EP1 ~ R EP3 combines with Q EP may form a ring structure.
nEP represents an integer of 2 or more, preferably 2 to 10, and more preferably 2 to 6. However, n EP is 2 when Q EP is a single bond.
 QEPがnEP価の有機基の場合、QEPとしては、鎖状若しくは環状のnEP価の飽和炭化水素基(炭素数2~20が好ましい)、nEP価の芳香環基(炭素数6~30が好ましい)、または鎖状若しくは環状の飽和炭化水素若しくは芳香族炭化水素に、エーテル基、エステル基、アミド基、スルホンアミド基、アルキレン基(炭素数1~4が好ましく、メチレン基がより好ましい)等の2価の連結基、-N(-)2等の3価の連結基またはこれらの組み合わせが連結した構造を有するnEP価の有機基などが好ましい。 When QEP is an nEP- valent organic group, QEP includes a chain or cyclic nEP- valent saturated hydrocarbon group (preferably having 2 to 20 carbon atoms), an nEP- valent aromatic ring group (carbon number). 6-30 are preferred), or a chain or cyclic saturated hydrocarbon or aromatic hydrocarbon, ether group, ester group, amide group, sulfonamide group, alkylene group (preferably having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, methylene group is A divalent linking group such as —N (—) 2 , an n EP valent organic group having a structure in which a combination of these is connected, or the like is preferable.
 エポキシ構造を有する化合物の具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-64998号公報の段落0200を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 As specific examples of the compound having an epoxy structure, for example, paragraph 0200 of JP2013-64998A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 本発明で用いるエポキシ化合物は、側鎖にエポキシ基を有するオリゴマーやポリマーも好ましい。このような化合物としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等を挙げることができる。
 これらの化合物は、市販品を用いてもよいし、ポリマーの側鎖へエポキシ基を導入することによっても得られる。
The epoxy compound used in the present invention is also preferably an oligomer or polymer having an epoxy group in the side chain. Examples of such compounds include bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, phenol novolac type epoxy resins, cresol novolac type epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins and the like.
These compounds may be commercially available or can be obtained by introducing an epoxy group into the side chain of the polymer.
 市販品としては、例えば、以下のものが挙げられる。
 ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂としては、JER827、JER828、JER834、JER1001、JER1002、JER1003、JER1055、JER1007、JER1009、JER1010(以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン(株)製)、EPICLON860、EPICLON1050、EPICLON1051、EPICLON1055(以上、DIC(株)製)等である。
 ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂としては、JER806、JER807、JER4004、JER4005、JER4007、JER4010(以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン(株)製)、EPICLON830、EPICLON835(以上、DIC(株)製)、LCE-21、RE-602S(以上、日本化薬(株)製)等である。
 フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂としては、JER152、JER154、JER157S70、JER157S65、(以上、ジャパンエポキシレジン(株)製)、EPICLON N-740、EPICLON N-740、EPICLON N-770、EPICLON N-775(以上、DIC(株)製)等である。
 クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂としては、EPICLON N-660、EPICLON N-665、EPICLON N-670、EPICLON N-673、EPICLON N-680、EPICLON N-690、EPICLON N-695(以上、DIC(株)製)、EOCN-1020(以上、日本化薬(株)製)等である。
 脂肪族エポキシ樹脂としては、ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S、同EP-4085S、同EP-4088S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)セロキサイド2021P、セロキサイド2081、セロキサイド2083、セロキサイド2085、EHPE3150、EPOLEAD PB 3600、同PB 4700(以上、ダイセル化学工業(株)製)、デナコール EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L(以上、ナガセケムテックス(株)製)等である。
 その他にも、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、JER1031S(ジャパンエポキシレジン(株)製)等が挙げられる。
As a commercial item, the following are mentioned, for example.
Examples of bisphenol A type epoxy resins include JER827, JER828, JER834, JER1001, JER1002, JER1003, JER1055, JER1007, JER1009, JER1010 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resins Co., Ltd.), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050, EPICLON1051, EPICLON1055 Etc.).
Examples of the bisphenol F type epoxy resin include JER806, JER807, JER4004, JER4005, JER4007, JER4010 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLON 830, EPICLON 835 (above, made by DIC Corporation), LCE-21, RE- 602S (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
Phenol novolac type epoxy resins include JER152, JER154, JER157S70, JER157S65 (above, manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.), EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-740, EPICLON N-770, EPICLON N-775 (above, DIC Corporation).
Cresol novolac type epoxy resins include EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) ), EOCN-1020 (above, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
Aliphatic epoxy resins include ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085S, EP-4088S (above, manufactured by ADEKA) Celoxide 2021P, Celoxide 2081, Celoxide 2083, Celoxide 2085, EHPE3150, EPOLEAD PB 3600, PB 4700 (above, manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.), Denacol EX-212L, EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L (above, manufactured by Nagase ChemteX Corporation).
In addition, ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD-1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), JER1031S (manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 ポリマー側鎖へ導入して合成する場合、導入反応は、例えばトリエチルアミン、ベンジルメチルアミン等の3級アミン、ドデシルトリメチルアンモニウムクロライド、テトラメチルアンモニウムクロライド、テトラエチルアンモニウムクロライド、等の4級アンモニウム塩、ピリジン、トリフェニルフォスフィン等を触媒として有機溶剤中、反応温度50~150℃で数~数十時間反応させることにより行える。脂環式エポキシ不飽和化合物の導入量は、得られるポリマーの酸価が5~200KOH・mg/gを満たす範囲になるように制御すると好ましい。また、分子量は重量平均で500~5000000、更には1000~500000の範囲が好ましい。
 エポキシ不飽和化合物としてはグリシジル(メタ)アクリレートやアリルグリシジルエーテル等のエポキシ基としてグリシジル基を有するものも使用可能であるが、好ましいものは脂環式エポキシ基を有する不飽和化合物である。このようなものとしては、以下の化合物を例示することができる。
In the case of synthesizing by introducing into a polymer side chain, for example, the introduction reaction includes tertiary amines such as triethylamine and benzylmethylamine, quaternary ammonium salts such as dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium chloride, tetraethylammonium chloride, pyridine, The reaction can be carried out in an organic solvent at a reaction temperature of 50 to 150 ° C. for several to several tens of hours using triphenylphosphine as a catalyst. The amount of the alicyclic epoxy unsaturated compound introduced is preferably controlled so that the acid value of the obtained polymer satisfies the range of 5 to 200 KOH · mg / g. The molecular weight is preferably in the range of 500 to 5000000, more preferably 1000 to 500000 on a weight average.
As the epoxy unsaturated compound, those having a glycidyl group as an epoxy group such as glycidyl (meth) acrylate and allyl glycidyl ether can be used, but preferred are unsaturated compounds having an alicyclic epoxy group. Examples of such compounds include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000080
 また、本発明で用いられる熱硬化性化合物としては、少なくとも1個の付加重合可能なエチレン基を有する、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つエチレン性不飽和基を持つ化合物も好ましく、単官能(メタ)アクリレート、2官能(メタ)アクリレート、3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート(例えば、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート)が好ましい。
 その例としては、以下のものを挙げることができる。
 ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、等の単官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレート;
 ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオール(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(アクリロイルオキシプロピル)エーテル、トリ(アクリロイロキシエチル)イソシアヌレート、グリセリンやトリメチロールエタン等の多官能アルコールにエチレンオキサイドやプロピレンオキサイドを付加させた後(メタ)アクリレート化したもの、
 特公昭48-41708号、特公昭50-6034号、特開昭51-37193号各公報に記載されているようなウレタン(メタ)アクリレート類、特開昭48-64183号、特公昭49-43191号および特公昭52-30490号各公報に記載されているポリエステルアクリレート類、
 エポキシポリマーと(メタ)アクリル酸との反応生成物であるエポキシアクリレート類等の多官能のアクリレートやメタアクリレート、
 およびこれらの混合物。
 中でも、エチレンオキシ変性ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としてはNKエステルATM-35E;新中村化学社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-330;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD D-320;日本化薬株式会社製)ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬株式会社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としては KAYARAD DPHA ;日本化薬株式会社製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール残基を介している構造が好ましい。またこれらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。
The thermosetting compound used in the present invention is also preferably a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group having at least one addition-polymerizable ethylene group and a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure. (Meth) acrylate, bifunctional (meth) acrylate, trifunctional or higher (meth) acrylate (for example, 3 to 6 functional (meth) acrylate) is preferable.
The following can be mentioned as the example.
Monofunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate and phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate;
Polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate , Ethylene with polyfunctional alcohols such as dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, hexanediol (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (acryloyloxypropyl) ether, tri (acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, glycerin and trimethylolethane (Meth) acrylated after adding oxide or propylene oxide,
Urethane (meth) acrylates as described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-B-50-6034, JP-A-51-37193, JP-A-48-64183, JP-B-49-43191 And polyester acrylates described in JP-B-52-30490,
Polyfunctional acrylates and methacrylates such as epoxy acrylates, which are reaction products of epoxy polymers and (meth) acrylic acid,
And mixtures of these.
Among them, ethyleneoxy-modified pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercially available product, NK ester ATM-35E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol triacrylate (as a commercially available product, KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-320; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipenta Erythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are via ethylene glycol and propylene glycol residues are preferred. These oligomer types can also be used.
<メラミン化合物、ウレア化合物、その他の熱硬化性化合物>
 本発明で用いる熱硬化性化合物としては、以下のN-ヒドロキシメチル基、N-アルコキシメチル基、若しくはN-アシルオキシメチル基を有する化合物も好ましい。このような化合物は、通常、メラミン化合物、ウレア化合物として提供される。
 これらの化合物については、例えば、特開2013-064998号公報の段落0172~0194を参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
<Melamine compounds, urea compounds, other thermosetting compounds>
As the thermosetting compound used in the present invention, compounds having the following N-hydroxymethyl group, N-alkoxymethyl group, or N-acyloxymethyl group are also preferable. Such a compound is usually provided as a melamine compound or a urea compound.
As for these compounds, for example, paragraphs 0172 to 0194 of JP2013-066498A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 本発明の組成物中における熱硬化性化合物の総含有量としては、素材により異なるが、着色硬化性組成物の全固形分(質量)に対して、5~50質量%が好ましく、7~35質量%がより好ましく、10~30%が特に好ましい。本発明では、このような熱硬化性化合物の配合量とすることにより、耐薬品性に優れた硬化膜を得られるという効果が得られる。 The total content of the thermosetting compound in the composition of the present invention varies depending on the material, but is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, preferably 7 to 35% with respect to the total solid content (mass) of the colored curable composition. % By mass is more preferable, and 10 to 30% is particularly preferable. In this invention, the effect that the cured film excellent in chemical-resistance can be obtained by setting it as the compounding quantity of such a thermosetting compound is acquired.
<溶剤>
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物は、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤と、熱硬化性化合物と、ラジカルトラップ剤と、を少なくとも溶解する溶剤を含む。この溶剤としては、通常、有機溶剤が用いられる。溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。
 有機溶剤としては、例えば、以下のものが挙げられる。
 エステル類としては、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、酢酸イソブチル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、オキシ酢酸アルキル(例:オキシ酢酸メチル、オキシ酢酸エチル、オキシ酢酸ブチル(例:メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等))、3-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例:3-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-オキシプロピオン酸エチル等(例:3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等))、2-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル類(例:2-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(例:2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル))、2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチルおよび2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(例:2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等)、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル等が挙げられる。
 エーテル類としては、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート等が挙げられる。
 ケトン類としては、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン等が挙げられる。
 芳香族炭化水素類としては、トルエン、キシレン等が挙げられる。
<Solvent>
The colored curable composition of the present invention includes a solvent that dissolves at least a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, and a radical trapping agent. As this solvent, an organic solvent is usually used. A solvent may be used individually by 1 type and may be used together 2 or more types.
Examples of the organic solvent include the following.
Esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, alkyl oxyacetate (examples) : Methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)), 3-oxypropionic acid alkyl esters (example: 3 -Methyl oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate, etc. (eg, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate)), 2-oxy Propionate alkyl ester (Eg, methyl 2-oxypropionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate, etc. (eg, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, 2 -Methyl ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate)), methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate and ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate (eg methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, And ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate and the like.
Examples of ethers include diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl Examples include ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate and the like.
Examples of ketones include methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, and 3-heptanone.
Aromatic hydrocarbons include toluene, xylene and the like.
 これらの溶剤は、塗布面状の改良などの観点から、2種以上を混合する形態も好ましい。この場合、特に好ましくは、上記の3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチルエーテル、およびプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテートから選択される2種以上で構成される混合溶液である。 These solvents are preferably mixed in two or more types from the viewpoint of improving the coated surface. In this case, particularly preferably, the above-mentioned methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether, and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
 溶剤の着色硬化性組成物中における含有量は、塗布性の観点から、組成物の全固形分濃度が5~30質量%になる量とすることが好ましく、7~25質量%が更に好ましく、10~20質量%が特に好ましい。 The content of the solvent in the colored curable composition is preferably such that the total solid content of the composition is 5 to 30% by mass, more preferably 7 to 25% by mass, from the viewpoint of applicability. 10 to 20% by mass is particularly preferable.
<界面活性剤>
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物は、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を添加してもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を組み合わせてもよい。
<Surfactant>
Various colored surfactants may be added to the colored curable composition of the present invention from the viewpoint of further improving coatability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used. Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be combined.
 特に、本発明の着色硬化性組成物は、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有することで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上することから、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。
 即ち、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有する着色硬化性組成物を適用した塗布液を用いて膜形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力を低下させることにより、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、少量の液量で数μm程度の薄膜を形成した場合であっても、厚みムラの小さい均一厚の膜形成をより好適に行える点で有効である。
In particular, the colored curable composition of the present invention contains a fluorosurfactant, so that the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved, so that the coating thickness is uniform. And the liquid-saving property can be further improved.
That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a colored curable composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, by reducing the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid, The wettability is improved, and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, even when a thin film of about several μm is formed with a small amount of liquid, it is effective in that it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3質量%~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5質量%~30質量%であり、特に好ましくは7質量%~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、着色硬化性組成物中における溶解性も良好である。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックF781(以上、DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。
 着色硬化性組成物は、界面活性剤を含有してもしなくても良いが、含有する場合、界面活性剤の添加量は、着色硬化性組成物の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~2.0質量%が好ましく、より好ましくは0.005質量%~1.0質量%である。
The fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3% by mass to 40% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7% by mass to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content in this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in a colored curable composition.
Examples of the fluorine-based surfactant include Megafac F781 (manufactured by DIC Corporation).
The colored curable composition may or may not contain a surfactant, but when it is contained, the addition amount of the surfactant is 0.001% by mass relative to the total mass of the colored curable composition. The content is preferably -2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% -1.0% by mass.
<重合開始剤>
 本発明の組成物は、重合開始剤を含んでいてもよい。重合開始剤は1種類のみでも、2種類以上でもよい。本発明の組成物中の重合開始剤の含有量は、0.01~30質量%が好ましく、0.1~20質量%がより好ましく、0.1~15質量%が特に好ましい。
 重合開始剤としては、光、熱のいずれか或いはその双方により重合性化合物の重合を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、目的に応じて適宜選択することができる。光で重合を開始させる場合、紫外線領域から可視の光線に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、熱で重合を開始させる場合には、150~250℃で分解する重合開始剤が好ましい。
<Polymerization initiator>
The composition of the present invention may contain a polymerization initiator. Only one type of polymerization initiator may be used, or two or more types may be used. The content of the polymerization initiator in the composition of the present invention is preferably 0.01 to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass.
The polymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound by light or heat, or both, and can be appropriately selected according to the purpose. When polymerization is initiated by light, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferred. In addition, when the polymerization is initiated by heat, a polymerization initiator that decomposes at 150 to 250 ° C. is preferable.
 本発明に用いうる重合開始剤としては、少なくとも芳香族基を有する化合物であることが好ましく、例えば、アシルホスフィン化合物、アセトフェノン系化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、ベンゾフェノン系化合物、ベンゾインエーテル系化合物、ケタール誘導体化合物、チオキサントン化合物、オキシム化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、トリハロメチル化合物、アゾ化合物、有機過酸化物、ジアゾニウム化合物、ヨードニウム化合物、スルホニウム化合物、アジニウム化合物、ベンゾインエーテル系化合物、ケタール誘導体化合物、メタロセン化合物等のオニウム塩化合物、有機硼素塩化合物、ジスルホン化合物などが挙げられる。
 感度の観点から、オキシム化合物、アセトフェノン系化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、トリハロメチル化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、および、チオール化合物が好ましい。
The polymerization initiator that can be used in the present invention is preferably a compound having at least an aromatic group. For example, an acylphosphine compound, an acetophenone compound, an α-aminoketone compound, a benzophenone compound, a benzoin ether compound, a ketal derivative Compounds, thioxanthone compounds, oxime compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, trihalomethyl compounds, azo compounds, organic peroxides, diazonium compounds, iodonium compounds, sulfonium compounds, azinium compounds, benzoin ether compounds, ketal derivative compounds, metallocene compounds, etc. Onium salt compounds, organoboron salt compounds, disulfone compounds, and the like.
From the viewpoint of sensitivity, oxime compounds, acetophenone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, trihalomethyl compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, and thiol compounds are preferred.
 アセトフェノン系化合物、トリハロメチル化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オキシム化合物としては、具体的には、特開2012-208494号公報段落0506~0510(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/0235099号明細書の[0622~0628])等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 Specific examples of acetophenone compounds, trihalomethyl compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, and oxime compounds include paragraphs 0506 to 0510 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding to US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0235099). [0622-0628]) and the like can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 オキシム化合物としては、例えば、特開2012-208494号公報段落0513(対応する米国特許出願公開第2012/235099号明細書の[0632])以降の式(OX-1)または(OX-2)で表される化合物の説明を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 オキシム化合物としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)、IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)を用いることができる。アセトフェノン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369、および、IRGACURE-379(商品名:いずれもBASFジャパン社製)を用いることができる。またアシルホスフィン系開始剤としては市販品であるIRGACURE-819やDAROCUR-TPO(商品名:いずれもBASFジャパン社製)を用いることができる。
 また、TRONLY TR-PBG-304、TRONLY TR-PBG-309、TRONLY TR-PBG-305(常州強力電子新材料有限公司社(CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO.,LTD)製)などの市販品が使用できる。また、アデカアークルズNCI-831、アデカアークルズNCI-930(ADEKA社製)などの市販品も使用できる。
Examples of the oxime compound include those represented by the following formula (OX-1) or (OX-2) in paragraph 0513 of JP2012-208494A (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2012/235099, [0632]). Reference can be made to the description of the compounds represented, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
As the oxime compound, commercially available products IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the acetophenone-based initiator, commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) can be used. As the acylphosphine initiator, commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.) can be used.
Also, commercial products such as TRONLY TR-PBG-304, TRONLY TR-PBG-309, TRONLY TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO., LTD) are used. it can. Commercial products such as Adeka Arkles NCI-831 and Adeka Arkles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA) can also be used.
<各種添加物>
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物は、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲で、必要に応じて、各種添加物、例えば、酸無水物、硬化剤、硬化触媒、充填剤、密着促進剤、酸化防止剤、凝集防止剤等を配合することができる。
<Various additives>
The colored curable composition of the present invention is various additives, for example, an acid anhydride, a curing agent, a curing catalyst, a filler, an adhesion promoter, and an antioxidant as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. An agent, an anti-aggregation agent and the like can be blended.
<着色硬化性組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物の好ましい調製方法について説明する。但し、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。
 着色剤がハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料のみの場合、通常、熱硬化性化合物およびラジカルトラップ剤とともに上記溶剤に溶解させる。また、着色剤として顔料をさらに含む場合、通常、上述のとおり顔料分散物として調製してから配合する。
<Preparation method of colored curable composition>
A preferred method for preparing the colored curable composition of the present invention will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the colorant is only a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, it is usually dissolved in the solvent together with the thermosetting compound and the radical trapping agent. Moreover, when it further contains a pigment as a coloring agent, it mix | blends after preparing as a pigment dispersion normally as above-mentioned.
 特に、熱硬化性化合物がエポキシ化合物である場合、このようにして得られた顔料の分散物または染料の溶液に熱硬化性化合物と硬化触媒や硬化剤とを添加、あるいは既にバインダーが熱硬化性化合物である場合には、硬化触媒や硬化剤を添加して熱硬化機能を付与し、必要に応じて溶剤を添加することで本発明における着色硬化性組成物を調製することが好ましい。 In particular, when the thermosetting compound is an epoxy compound, a thermosetting compound and a curing catalyst or a curing agent are added to the pigment dispersion or dye solution thus obtained, or the binder is already thermosetting. In the case of a compound, it is preferable to prepare the colored curable composition in the present invention by adding a curing catalyst or a curing agent to impart a thermosetting function, and adding a solvent as necessary.
<フィルターろ過>
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物は、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、フィルターで濾過することが好ましい。
 フィルターろ過に用いるフィルターとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているフィルターであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。
 上記フィルターの材質の例としては、PTFE(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン)等のフッ素樹脂;ナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6等のポリアミド系樹脂;ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量を含む);等が挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)が好ましい。
<Filter filtration>
The colored curable composition of the present invention is preferably filtered with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects.
As a filter used for filter filtration, if it is a filter conventionally used for the filtration use etc., it can use without being specifically limited.
Examples of the material of the filter include: a fluororesin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene); a polyamide resin such as nylon-6 and nylon-6, 6; a polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, Including ultra high molecular weight); Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) is preferable.
 上記フィルターの孔径には特に限定はないが、例えば0.01~20.0μm程度であり、好ましくは0.01~5μm程度であり、さらに好ましくは0.01~2.0μm程度である。
 フィルターの孔径を上記範囲とすることにより、微細な粒子をより効果的に取り除くことができ、濁度をより低減することができる。
 ここで、フィルターの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。市販のフィルターとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)または株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルターの中から選択することができる。
The pore size of the filter is not particularly limited, but is, for example, about 0.01 to 20.0 μm, preferably about 0.01 to 5 μm, and more preferably about 0.01 to 2.0 μm.
By setting the pore size of the filter within the above range, fine particles can be more effectively removed and turbidity can be further reduced.
Here, the pore size of the filter can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
 上記フィルターろ過では、2種以上のフィルターを組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 例えば、まず第1のフィルターを用いてろ過を行い、次に、第1のフィルターとは孔径が異なる第2のフィルターを用いてろ過を行うことができる。
 その際、第1のフィルターでのフィルタリングおよび第2のフィルターでのフィルタリングは、それぞれ、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。
 第2のフィルターは、上述した第1のフィルターと同様の材料等で形成されたものを使用することができる。
In the filter filtration, two or more filters may be used in combination.
For example, the filtration can be performed first using a first filter and then using a second filter having a pore diameter different from that of the first filter.
At that time, the filtering by the first filter and the filtering by the second filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more, respectively.
As the second filter, a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
<用途>
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物は、硬化させて硬化膜として好ましく用いられる。本発明の着色硬化性組成物を硬化させた層は、カラーフィルタの着色層として好ましく用いることができる。特に、ドライエッチング用着色硬化性組成物として好ましく用いることができる。
 本発明において、着色層の厚さは、0.1~1.0μmであることが好ましく、0.1~0.8μmであることがより好ましい。
<Application>
The colored curable composition of the present invention is cured and preferably used as a cured film. The layer obtained by curing the colored curable composition of the present invention can be preferably used as a colored layer of a color filter. In particular, it can be preferably used as a colored curable composition for dry etching.
In the present invention, the thickness of the colored layer is preferably from 0.1 to 1.0 μm, and more preferably from 0.1 to 0.8 μm.
<カラーフィルタの製造方法>
 本発明のカラーフィルタは、これを構成するパターンのうち、少なくとも一種のパターンが、上記した本発明の着色硬化性組成物から形成された着色パターンである。本発明のカラーフィルタは、少なくとも一種のパターンが、上記した本発明の着色硬化性組成物から形成された着色パターンであれば特に制限されるものではないが、好ましくは以下に示す本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法により作製される。
<Color filter manufacturing method>
In the color filter of the present invention, at least one of the patterns constituting the color filter is a colored pattern formed from the above-described colored curable composition of the present invention. The color filter of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as at least one pattern is a colored pattern formed from the above-described colored curable composition of the present invention, but preferably the color of the present invention shown below. The filter is manufactured by a manufacturing method.
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法の一例としては、本発明の着色硬化性組成物を用いて着色層を形成する工程、上記着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、露光および現像することにより上記フォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、および上記レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして上記着色層をドライエッチングする工程を含む。 As an example of the method for producing the color filter of the present invention, a step of forming a colored layer using the colored curable composition of the present invention, a step of forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer, exposure and development Patterning the photoresist layer to obtain a resist pattern, and dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
 本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法は、既述の本発明の着色硬化性組成物(第1の着色硬化性組成物とも言う)を用いて第1の着色層を形成する。
 ここで、第1着色層は、本発明の着色硬化性組成物により形成されているため、耐溶剤性および耐アルカリ現像液性に優れている。
 これにより、後に詳細に述べる、第1着色層の上にエッチング用のマスクとしてレジストパターン(パターニングされたフォトレジスト層)を形成する際に使用する現像液や、第1着色層の上に第2着色感放射線性組成物により第2着色感放射線性層を形成する工程、および、第1着色層の上に第3着色感放射線性組成物により第3着色感放射線性層を形成する工程において、第1着色層が、第2または第3着色感放射線性組成物における有機溶剤や、第2または第3着色感放射線性組成物により形成された第2または第3着色感放射線性層を露光、現像する際に使用される現像液に溶解し、第1着色層における色成分が、上記溶剤や現像液に溶出する虞れや、第2または第3着色感放射線性組成物における色成分が、第1の着色層に混入する虞れなどを抑制できる。その結果、第1着色層における色成分の色落ちの発生や複数の色が互いに重なり合うオーバーラップ領域の発生を抑制できるため、最終的に得られるカラーフィルタの性能を向上させることができる。
 特に、例えば厚みが0.1~1.0μmおよび/または画素パターンサイズ(正方パターンにおける一辺)が2μm以下(例えば0.5~2.0μm)となるような微小サイズが求められる固体撮像素子用のカラーフィルタを作製するのに有効である。
In the method for producing a color filter of the present invention, the first colored layer is formed using the above-described colored curable composition of the present invention (also referred to as the first colored curable composition).
Here, since the 1st colored layer is formed with the colored curable composition of this invention, it is excellent in solvent resistance and alkali developing solution resistance.
As a result, a developer used when forming a resist pattern (patterned photoresist layer) as an etching mask on the first colored layer, which will be described in detail later, or a second on the first colored layer. In the step of forming the second colored radiation-sensitive layer with the colored radiation-sensitive composition and the step of forming the third colored radiation-sensitive layer with the third colored radiation-sensitive composition on the first colored layer, The first colored layer exposes the organic solvent in the second or third colored radiation-sensitive composition or the second or third colored radiation-sensitive layer formed by the second or third colored radiation-sensitive composition; When dissolved in the developer used for development, the color component in the first colored layer may be eluted into the solvent or developer, or the color component in the second or third colored radiation-sensitive composition is Mixed in the first colored layer Fear, etc. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of color fading in the first colored layer and the occurrence of overlapping regions in which a plurality of colors overlap each other, so that the performance of the finally obtained color filter can be improved.
In particular, for a solid-state imaging device that requires a minute size such that the thickness is 0.1 to 1.0 μm and / or the pixel pattern size (one side in a square pattern) is 2 μm or less (for example, 0.5 to 2.0 μm). It is effective for producing a color filter.
 ここで、固体撮像素子について、一例として図4を参照して略説する。
 図4に示すように、固体撮像素子10は、シリコン基板上に設けられた受光素子(フォトダイオード)42、カラーフィルタ13、平坦化膜14、マイクロレンズ15等から構成される。本発明においては、平坦化膜14は必ずしも設ける必要はない。なお、図4では、各部を明確にするため、相互の厚みや幅の比率は無視して一部誇張して表示している。
Here, the solid-state imaging device will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 4 as an example.
As shown in FIG. 4, the solid-state imaging device 10 includes a light receiving element (photodiode) 42 provided on a silicon substrate, a color filter 13, a planarizing film 14, a microlens 15, and the like. In the present invention, the planarizing film 14 is not necessarily provided. In FIG. 4, in order to clarify each part, the ratios of the thicknesses and widths are ignored, and some parts are exaggerated.
 支持体としては、シリコン基板のほか、カラーフィルタに用いられるものであれば特に制限はなく、例えば、液晶表示素子等に用いられるソーダガラス、ホウケイ酸ガラス、石英ガラスおよびこれらに透明導電膜を付着させたものや、固体撮像素子等に用いられる光電変換素子基板、例えば酸化膜、窒化シリコン等が挙げられる。また、これら支持体とカラーフィルタ13との間には本発明を損なわない限り中間層などを設けてもよい。 The support is not particularly limited as long as it is used for a color filter in addition to a silicon substrate. For example, soda glass, borosilicate glass, quartz glass, and a transparent conductive film attached to these are used for liquid crystal display elements. And a photoelectric conversion element substrate used for a solid-state imaging device, such as an oxide film or silicon nitride. Further, an intermediate layer or the like may be provided between the support and the color filter 13 as long as the present invention is not impaired.
 シリコン基板上には、Pウエル41を有し、このPウエル41の表面の一部にフォトダイオード42を有している。フォトダイオード42は、Pウエル41の表面の一部にPやAs等のN型不純物をイオン注入した後、熱処理を行うことにより形成される。また、シリコン基板のPウエル41の表面であって上記一部とは異なる領域には、フォトダイオード42よりN型不純物濃度の高い不純物拡散層43を有している。この不純物拡散層43は、PやAs等のN型不純物をイオン注入した後、熱処理を行うことにより形成される。不純物拡散層43は、フォトダイオード42が入射光を受けることにより発生した電荷を転送する浮遊拡散層の役割を果たす。Pウエル41をP型不純物層、フォトダイオード42および不純物拡散層43をN型不純物層とする以外にも、Pウエル41をN型不純物層、フォトダイオード42および不純物拡散層43をP型不純物層として実施することもできる。 A P well 41 is provided on the silicon substrate, and a photodiode 42 is provided on a part of the surface of the P well 41. The photodiode 42 is formed by performing heat treatment after ion-implanting N-type impurities such as P and As into a part of the surface of the P well 41. In addition, an impurity diffusion layer 43 having an N-type impurity concentration higher than that of the photodiode 42 is provided in a region different from the above portion on the surface of the P well 41 of the silicon substrate. The impurity diffusion layer 43 is formed by performing heat treatment after ion implantation of N-type impurities such as P and As. The impurity diffusion layer 43 serves as a floating diffusion layer that transfers charges generated when the photodiode 42 receives incident light. In addition to the P-well 41 being a P-type impurity layer and the photodiode 42 and the impurity diffusion layer 43 being an N-type impurity layer, the P-well 41 is an N-type impurity layer, and the photodiode 42 and the impurity diffusion layer 43 are being P-type impurity layers. Can also be implemented.
 Pウエル41、フォトダイオード42、および不純物拡散層43上には、SiO2またはSiO2/SiN/SiO2等の絶縁膜47を有しており、この絶縁膜47上にはポリSi、タングステン、タングステンシリサイド、Al、Cu等からなる電極44が設けられている。電極44は、ゲートMOSトランジスタのゲートの役割を果たし、フォトダイオード42に発生した電荷を不純物拡散層43に転送するための転送ゲートとしての役割を果たすことができる。さらに、電極44の上方には、配線層45が形成されている。配線層45の更に上方には、BPSG膜46、P-SiN膜48を有している。BPSG膜46とP-SiN膜48の界面がフォトダイオード42の上方で下に湾曲する形状になるように形成されており、入射光を効率よくフォトダイオード42に導くための層内レンズの役割を果たす。BPSG膜46上には、P-SiN膜48表面または画素領域以外の凹凸部を平坦化する目的で平坦化膜層49が形成されている。 An insulating film 47 such as SiO 2 or SiO 2 / SiN / SiO 2 is provided on the P well 41, the photodiode 42, and the impurity diffusion layer 43. On the insulating film 47, poly-Si, tungsten, An electrode 44 made of tungsten silicide, Al, Cu or the like is provided. The electrode 44 serves as the gate of the gate MOS transistor, and can serve as a transfer gate for transferring charges generated in the photodiode 42 to the impurity diffusion layer 43. Further, a wiring layer 45 is formed above the electrode 44. Above the wiring layer 45, a BPSG film 46 and a P-SiN film 48 are provided. The interface between the BPSG film 46 and the P-SiN film 48 is formed so as to be curved downward above the photodiode 42, and serves as an in-layer lens for efficiently guiding incident light to the photodiode 42. Fulfill. On the BPSG film 46, a planarizing film layer 49 is formed for the purpose of planarizing the surface of the P-SiN film 48 or uneven portions other than the pixel region.
 この平坦化膜層49上にカラーフィルタ13が形成されている。なお、以下の説明では、領域を区切らずにシリコン基板上に形成されている着色膜(いわゆるベタ膜)を「着色(着色感放射線性)層」といい、パターン状に領域を区切って形成されている着色膜(例えば、ストライプ状にパターニングされている膜等)を「着色パターン」という。また、着色パターンのうち、カラーフィルタ13を構成する要素となっている着色パターン(例えば、正方形や長方形にパターン化された着色パターン等)を「着色(赤色、緑色、青色)画素」という。 The color filter 13 is formed on the planarizing film layer 49. In the following description, a colored film (so-called solid film) formed on a silicon substrate without dividing the region is referred to as a “colored (colored radiation sensitive) layer”, and is formed by dividing the region into a pattern. A colored film (for example, a film patterned in a stripe shape) is referred to as a “colored pattern”. In addition, among the colored patterns, a colored pattern that is an element constituting the color filter 13 (for example, a colored pattern patterned into a square or a rectangle) is referred to as a “colored (red, green, blue) pixel”.
 カラーフィルタ13は、2次元配列された複数の緑色画素(第1色画素)20G、赤色画素(第2色画素)20R、および青色画素(第3色画素)20Bから構成されている。各着色画素20R,20G,20Bは、それぞれ受光素子42の上方位置に形成されている。緑色画素20Gが市松模様に形成されるとともに、青色画素20Bおよび赤色画素20Rは、各緑色画素20Gの間に形成されている。なお、図4では、カラーフィルタ13が3色の画素から構成されていることを説明するために、各着色画素20R,20G,20Bを1列に並べて表示している。 The color filter 13 includes a plurality of two-dimensionally arranged green pixels (first color pixels) 20G, red pixels (second color pixels) 20R, and blue pixels (third color pixels) 20B. Each of the colored pixels 20R, 20G, and 20B is formed above the light receiving element 42. The green pixels 20G are formed in a checkered pattern, and the blue pixels 20B and the red pixels 20R are formed between the green pixels 20G. In FIG. 4, in order to explain that the color filter 13 is composed of pixels of three colors, the colored pixels 20R, 20G, and 20B are displayed in a line.
 平坦化膜14は、カラーフィルタ13の上面を覆うように形成されており、カラーフィルタ表面を平坦化している。 The planarization film 14 is formed so as to cover the upper surface of the color filter 13 and planarizes the color filter surface.
 マイクロレンズ15は、凸面を上にして配置された集光レンズであり、平坦化膜14(平坦化膜14を有しない場合はカラーフィルタ)の上方でかつ受光素子42の上方に設けられている。各マイクロレンズ15は、被写体からの光を効率良く各受光素子42へ導く。 The microlens 15 is a condensing lens arranged with the convex surface facing upward, and is provided above the planarizing film 14 (or a color filter when the planarizing film 14 is not provided) and above the light receiving element 42. . Each microlens 15 efficiently guides light from the subject to each light receiving element 42.
 次に、本発明の実施形態に係るカラーフィルタの製造方法について説明する。
 本発明の実施形態に係るカラーフィルタの製造方法においては、先ず、特開2013-64998号公報の図2の概略断面図に示すように、第1着色硬化性組成物によって第1着色層11を形成する(工程(I))。ここで、第1着色硬化性組成物は、本発明の着色硬化性組成物である。
Next, the manufacturing method of the color filter which concerns on embodiment of this invention is demonstrated.
In the method for producing a color filter according to the embodiment of the present invention, first, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. Form (step (I)). Here, the first colored curable composition is the colored curable composition of the present invention.
 第1着色層11の形成は、着色硬化性組成物を支持体上に回転塗布、スリット塗布、スプレー塗布等の塗布方法により塗布し、乾燥させて着色層を形成することにより行なえる。 The first colored layer 11 can be formed by applying a colored curable composition on a support by a coating method such as spin coating, slit coating or spray coating, and drying to form a colored layer.
 ここでの第1着色層11の厚みとしては、0.3~1.0μmの範囲が好ましく、0.35~0.8μmの範囲がより好ましく、0.35~0.7μmの範囲がより好ましい。 Here, the thickness of the first colored layer 11 is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1.0 μm, more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.8 μm, and more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.7 μm. .
 第1着色硬化性組成物が熱硬化性化合物を含有している。このため、ホットプレート、オーブン等の加熱装置により、第1着色層11を加熱して、硬化させることが好ましい。加熱温度は、120℃~250℃であることが好ましく、160℃~230℃であることがより好ましい。加熱時間は、加熱手段により異なるが、ホットプレート上で加熱する場合、通常3~30分間程度であり、オーブン中で加熱する場合、通常、30~90分間程度である。 The first colored curable composition contains a thermosetting compound. For this reason, it is preferable that the first colored layer 11 is heated and cured by a heating device such as a hot plate or an oven. The heating temperature is preferably 120 ° C. to 250 ° C., and more preferably 160 ° C. to 230 ° C. The heating time varies depending on the heating means, but is usually about 3 to 30 minutes when heated on a hot plate, and usually about 30 to 90 minutes when heated in an oven.
 次いで、第1着色層11に貫通孔群が形成されるようにドライエッチングによりパターニングする(工程(II))。これにより第1の着色パターンを形成する。この手法によれば、着色感放射線性組成物により第1着色層を形成した後、上記第1着色層を露光、現像することによって貫通孔群を設ける場合と比較して、所望の形状の貫通孔群をより確実に設けることができる。これは、組成物の全固形分に対する着色剤の含有量が50質量%以上とされた着色感放射線性組成物においては、組成物中に現像能に寄与する成分を添加できる余地が限られてくるため、確実なパターニングが困難になるためである。 Next, patterning is performed by dry etching so that a through hole group is formed in the first colored layer 11 (step (II)). Thereby, a first colored pattern is formed. According to this method, after forming the first colored layer with the colored radiation-sensitive composition, the first colored layer is exposed and developed to form a through hole having a desired shape as compared with the case where the through hole group is provided. A hole group can be provided more reliably. This is because, in a colored radiation-sensitive composition in which the content of the colorant with respect to the total solid content of the composition is 50% by mass or more, there is limited room for adding a component that contributes to developability to the composition. This is because reliable patterning becomes difficult.
 第1着色パターンは、支持体上に1色目として設けられる着色パターンでもよいし、場合によっては、既設のパターンを有する支持体上に例えば2色目あるいは3色目以降のパターンとして設けられる着色パターンでもよい。 The first colored pattern may be a colored pattern provided as the first color on the support, or may be a colored pattern provided as a pattern for the second color or the third color or later on the support having an existing pattern in some cases. .
 ドライエッチングは、第1着色層11を、パターニングされたフォトレジスト層をマスクとしてエッチングガスを用いて行うことができる。例えば、特開2013-64998号公報の図3の概略断面図に示すように、先ず、第1着色層11の上にフォトレジスト層51を形成する。 Dry etching can be performed on the first colored layer 11 using an etching gas with the patterned photoresist layer as a mask. For example, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 3 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-64998, first, a photoresist layer 51 is formed on the first colored layer 11.
 具体的には、着色層上にポジまたはネガ型の感放射線性組成物を適用(好ましくは塗布)し、これを乾燥させることによりフォトレジスト層を形成する。フォトレジスト層51の形成においては、更にプリベーク処理を施すことが好ましい。特に、フォトレジストの形成プロセスとしては、露光後の加熱処理(PEB)、現像後の加熱処理(ポストベーク処理)を実施する形態が望ましい。 Specifically, a positive or negative radiation-sensitive composition is applied (preferably applied) on the colored layer and dried to form a photoresist layer. In forming the photoresist layer 51, it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment. In particular, as a process for forming a photoresist, a mode in which heat treatment after exposure (PEB) and heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment) are desirable.
 フォトレジストとしては、例えば、ポジ型の感放射線性組成物が用いられる。このポジ型の感放射線性組成物としては、紫外線(g線、h線、i線)、エキシマー・レーザー等を含む遠紫外線、電子線、イオンビームおよびX線等の放射線に感応するポジ型フォトレジスト用に好適なポジ型レジスト組成物が使用できる。放射線のうち、g線、h線、i線が好ましく、中でもi線が好ましい。
 具体的には、ポジ型の感放射線性組成物として、キノンジアジド化合物およびアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する組成物が好ましい。キノンジアジド化合物およびアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有するポジ型の感放射線性組成物は、500nm以下の波長の光照射によりキノンジアジド基が分解してカルボキシル基を生じ、結果としてアルカリ不溶状態からアルカリ可溶性になることを利用するものである。このポジ型フォトレジストは解像力が著しく優れているので、ICやLSI等の集積回路の作製に用いられている。キノンジアジド化合物としては、ナフトキノンジアジド化合物が挙げられる。
As the photoresist, for example, a positive type radiation sensitive composition is used. As this positive type radiation sensitive composition, positive type photo sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, h rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays. A positive resist composition suitable for resist can be used. Of the radiation, g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
Specifically, as the positive radiation sensitive composition, a composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin is preferable. A positive radiation-sensitive composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin indicates that a quinonediazide group is decomposed by irradiation with light having a wavelength of 500 nm or less to produce a carboxyl group, resulting in alkali-solubility from an alkali-insoluble state. It is what you use. Since this positive photoresist has remarkably excellent resolution, it is used for manufacturing integrated circuits such as ICs and LSIs. Examples of the quinonediazide compound include a naphthoquinonediazide compound.
 フォトレジスト層51の厚みとしては、0.1~3μmが好ましく、0.2~2.5μmが好ましく、0.3~2μmが更に好ましい。なお、フォトレジスト層51の塗布は、既述の第1着色層11における塗布方法を用いて好適に行なえる。 The thickness of the photoresist layer 51 is preferably 0.1 to 3 μm, preferably 0.2 to 2.5 μm, and more preferably 0.3 to 2 μm. The application of the photoresist layer 51 can be suitably performed using the application method for the first colored layer 11 described above.
 次いで、特開2013-64998号公報の図4の概略断面図に示すように、このフォトレジスト層51を露光、現像することにより、レジスト貫通孔群51Aが設けられたレジストパターン(パターニングされたフォトレジスト層)52を形成する。
 レジストパターン52の形成は、特に制限なく、従来公知のフォトリソグラフィーの技術を適宜最適化して行なうことができる。露光、現像によりフォトレジスト層51に、レジスト貫通孔群51Aが設けられることによって、次のエッチングで用いられるエッチングマスクとしてのレジストパターン52が、第1着色層11上に設けられる。
Next, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 4 of JP2013-64998A, the photoresist layer 51 is exposed and developed to form a resist pattern (patterned photo resist) provided with a resist through-hole group 51A. Resist layer) 52 is formed.
The formation of the resist pattern 52 is not particularly limited, and can be performed by appropriately optimizing a conventionally known photolithography technique. By providing the resist through hole group 51 </ b> A in the photoresist layer 51 by exposure and development, a resist pattern 52 as an etching mask used in the next etching is provided on the first colored layer 11.
 フォトレジスト層51の露光は、所定のマスクパターンを介して、ポジ型またはネガ型の感放射線性組成物に、g線、h線、i線等、好ましくはi線で露光を施すことにより行なうことができる。露光後は、現像液で現像処理することにより、着色パターンを形成しようとする領域に合わせてフォトレジストが除去される。 The exposure of the photoresist layer 51 is performed by exposing the positive-type or negative-type radiation-sensitive composition with g-line, h-line, i-line, etc., preferably i-line, through a predetermined mask pattern. be able to. After the exposure, the photoresist is removed in accordance with a region where a colored pattern is to be formed by developing with a developer.
 上記現像液としては、着色剤を含む第1着色層には影響を与えず、ポジレジストの露光部およびネガレジストの未硬化部を溶解するものであればいずれも使用可能であり、例えば、種々の有機溶剤の組み合わせやアルカリ性の水溶液を用いることができる。アルカリ性の水溶液としては、アルカリ性化合物を濃度が0.001~10質量%、好ましくは0.01~5質量%となるように溶解して調製されたアルカリ性水溶液が好適である。アルカリ性化合物は、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム,硅酸ナトリウム、メタ硅酸ナトリウム、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン等が挙げられる。尚、アルカリ性水溶液を現像液として用いた場合は、一般に現像後に水で洗浄処理が施される。 Any developer can be used as long as it dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist without affecting the first colored layer containing the colorant. A combination of these organic solvents or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used. As the alkaline aqueous solution, an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass is suitable. Examples of alkaline compounds include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, Examples include pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene. In addition, when alkaline aqueous solution is used as a developing solution, generally a washing process is performed with water after development.
 次に、特開2013-64998号公報の図5の概略断面図に示すように、レジストパターン52をエッチングマスクとして、第1着色層11に貫通孔群120が形成されるようにドライエッチングによりパターニングする。これにより、第1着色パターン12が形成される。ここで、貫通孔群120は、第1貫通孔部分群121と第2貫通孔部分群122とを有している。
 貫通孔群120は、第1着色層11に、市松状に設けられている。よって、第1着色層11に貫通孔群120が設けられてなる第1着色パターン12は、複数の四角形状の第1着色画素を市松状に有している。
Next, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 5 of JP 2013-64998 A, patterning is performed by dry etching so that the through hole group 120 is formed in the first colored layer 11 using the resist pattern 52 as an etching mask. To do. Thereby, the 1st coloring pattern 12 is formed. Here, the through-hole group 120 has a first through-hole part group 121 and a second through-hole part group 122.
The through-hole group 120 is provided in a checkered pattern in the first colored layer 11. Therefore, the 1st coloring pattern 12 by which the through-hole group 120 is provided in the 1st coloring layer 11 has a some square-shaped 1st coloring pixel in checkered form.
 具体的には、ドライエッチングは、レジストパターン52をエッチングマスクとして、第1着色層11をドライエッチングする。ドライエッチングの代表的な例としては、特開昭59-126506号、特開昭59-46628号、同58-9108号、同58-2809号、同57-148706号、同61-41102号などの公報に記載の方法がある。 Specifically, in the dry etching, the first colored layer 11 is dry etched using the resist pattern 52 as an etching mask. Representative examples of dry etching include JP-A-59-126506, JP-A-59-46628, JP-A-58-9108, JP-A-58-2809, JP-A-57-148706, JP-A-61-41102, and the like. There is a method described in this publication.
 ドライエッチングとしては、パターン断面をより矩形に近く形成する観点や支持体へのダメージをより低減する観点から、以下の形態で行なうのが好ましい。
 フッ素系ガスと酸素ガス(O2)との混合ガスを用い、支持体が露出しない領域(深さ)までエッチングを行なう第1段階のエッチングと、この第1段階のエッチングの後に、窒素ガス(N2)と酸素ガス(O2)との混合ガスを用い、好ましくは支持体が露出する領域(深さ)付近までエッチングを行なう第2段階のエッチングと、支持体が露出した後に行なうオーバーエッチングとを含む形態が好ましい。以下、ドライエッチングの具体的手法、並びに第1段階のエッチング、第2段階のエッチング、およびオーバーエッチングについて説明する。
Dry etching is preferably performed in the following manner from the viewpoint of forming a pattern cross section closer to a rectangle and reducing damage to the support.
Using a mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas (O 2 ), the first stage etching is performed up to a region (depth) where the support is not exposed, and after this first stage etching, nitrogen gas ( N 2 ) and oxygen gas (O 2 ), and a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed. The form containing these is preferable. Hereinafter, a specific method of dry etching and the first stage etching, second stage etching, and over-etching will be described.
 ドライエッチングは、下記手法により事前にエッチング条件を求めて行なう。
(1)第1段階のエッチングにおけるエッチングレート(nm/min)と、第2段階のエッチングにおけるエッチングレート(nm/min)とをそれぞれ算出する。
(2)第1段階のエッチングで所望の厚さをエッチングする時間と、第2段階のエッチングで所望の厚さをエッチングする時間とをそれぞれ算出する。
(3)上記(2)で算出したエッチング時間に従って第1段階のエッチングを実施する。(4)上記(2)で算出したエッチング時間に従って第2段階のエッチングを実施する。あるいはエンドポイント検出でエッチング時間を決定し、決定したエッチング時間に従って第2段階のエッチングを実施してもよい。
(5)上記(3)、(4)の合計時間に対してオーバーエッチング時間を算出し、オーバーエッチングを実施する。
Dry etching is performed by obtaining etching conditions in advance by the following method.
(1) The etching rate (nm / min) in the first stage etching and the etching rate (nm / min) in the second stage etching are calculated respectively.
(2) The time for etching the desired thickness in the first stage etching and the time for etching the desired thickness in the second stage etching are respectively calculated.
(3) The first stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above. (4) The second stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above. Alternatively, the etching time may be determined by endpoint detection, and the second stage etching may be performed according to the determined etching time.
(5) Overetching time is calculated with respect to the total time of (3) and (4) above, and overetching is performed.
 上記第1段階のエッチング工程で用いる混合ガスとしては、被エッチング膜である有機材料を矩形に加工する観点から、フッ素系ガスおよび酸素ガス(O2)を含むことが好ましい。また、第1段階のエッチング工程は、支持体が露出しない領域までエッチングする形態にすることで、支持体のダメージを回避することができる。
 また、上記第2段階のエッチング工程および上記オーバーエッチング工程は、第1段階のエッチング工程でフッ素系ガスおよび酸素ガスの混合ガスにより支持体が露出しない領域までエッチングを実施した後、支持体のダメージ回避の観点から、窒素ガスおよび酸素ガスの混合ガスを用いてエッチング処理を行なうのが好ましい。
The mixed gas used in the first stage etching step preferably contains a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas (O 2 ) from the viewpoint of processing the organic material that is the film to be etched into a rectangular shape. In addition, the first stage etching process can avoid damage to the support body by etching to a region where the support body is not exposed.
The second etching step and the over-etching step are performed in the first etching step after etching to a region where the support is not exposed by the mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas. From the viewpoint of avoidance, it is preferable to perform the etching process using a mixed gas of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
 第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量と、第2段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量との比率は、第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング処理による矩形性を損なわないように決定することが重要である。なお、全エッチング量(第1段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量と第2段階のエッチング工程でのエッチング量との総和)中における後者の比率は、0%より大きく50%以下である範囲が好ましく、10~20%がより好ましい。エッチング量とは、被エッチング膜の残存する膜厚のことをいう。 It is important to determine the ratio between the etching amount in the first stage etching process and the etching amount in the second stage etching process so as not to impair the rectangularity due to the etching process in the first stage etching process. It is. The latter ratio in the total etching amount (the sum of the etching amount in the first-stage etching process and the etching amount in the second-stage etching process) is preferably in the range of more than 0% and not more than 50%. 10 to 20% is more preferable. The etching amount refers to the remaining film thickness of the film to be etched.
 また、エッチングは、オーバーエッチング処理を含むことが好ましい。オーバーエッチング処理は、オーバーエッチング比率を設定して行なうことが好ましい。また、オーバーエッチング比率は、初めに行なうエッチング処理時間より算出することが好ましい。オーバーエッチング比率は任意に設定できるが、フォトレジストのエッチング耐性と被エッチングパターンの矩形性維持の点で、エッチング工程におけるエッチング処理時間の30%以下であることが好ましく、5~25%であることがより好ましく、10~15%であることが特に好ましい。 Further, the etching preferably includes an over-etching process. The overetching process is preferably performed by setting an overetching ratio. Moreover, it is preferable to calculate the overetching ratio from the etching process time to be performed first. The over-etching ratio can be arbitrarily set, but it is preferably 30% or less of the etching processing time in the etching process, and preferably 5 to 25% from the viewpoint of etching resistance of the photoresist and maintaining the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched. Is more preferable, and 10 to 15% is particularly preferable.
 次いで、特開2013-64998号公報の図6の概略断面図に示すように、エッチング後に残存するレジストパターン(すなわちエッチングマスク)52を除去する。レジストパターン52の除去は、レジストパターン52上に剥離液または溶剤を付与して、レジストパターン52を除去可能な状態にする工程と、レジストパターン52を洗浄水を用いて除去する工程とを含むことが好ましい。 Next, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 6 of JP2013-64998A, the resist pattern (that is, etching mask) 52 remaining after the etching is removed. The removal of the resist pattern 52 includes a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent to the resist pattern 52 so that the resist pattern 52 can be removed, and a step of removing the resist pattern 52 using cleaning water. Is preferred.
 レジストパターン52上に剥離液または溶剤を付与し、レジストパターン52を除去可能な状態にする工程としては、例えば、剥離液または溶剤を少なくともレジストパターン52上に付与し、所定の時間停滞させてパドル現像する工程を挙げることができる。剥離液または溶剤を停滞させる時間としては、特に制限はないが、数十秒から数分であることが好ましい。 As a step of applying a stripping solution or solvent on the resist pattern 52 to make the resist pattern 52 removable, for example, a stripping solution or solvent is applied on at least the resist pattern 52, and the paddle is stagnated for a predetermined time. A step of developing can be mentioned. Although there is no restriction | limiting in particular as time to make stripping solution or a solvent stagnant, It is preferable that it is several dozen seconds to several minutes.
 また、レジストパターン52を洗浄水を用いて除去する工程としては、例えば、スプレー式またはシャワー式の噴射ノズルからレジストパターン52に洗浄水を噴射して、レジストパターン52を除去する工程を挙げることができる。洗浄水としては、純水を好ましく用いることができる。また、噴射ノズルとしては、その噴射範囲内に支持体全体が包含される噴射ノズルや、可動式の噴射ノズルであってその可動範囲が支持体全体を包含する噴射ノズルを挙げることができる。噴射ノズルが可動式の場合、レジストパターン52を除去する工程中に支持体中心部から支持体端部までを2回以上移動して洗浄水を噴射することで、より効果的にレジストパターン52を除去することができる。 Examples of the step of removing the resist pattern 52 using cleaning water include a step of removing the resist pattern 52 by spraying cleaning water onto the resist pattern 52 from a spray type or shower type spray nozzle. it can. As the washing water, pure water can be preferably used. Further, examples of the injection nozzle include an injection nozzle in which the entire support is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support. When the spray nozzle is movable, the resist pattern 52 is more effectively moved by spraying the cleaning water by moving from the support center to the support end twice or more during the step of removing the resist pattern 52. Can be removed.
 剥離液は、一般には有機溶剤を含有するが、無機溶剤を更に含有してもよい。有機溶剤としては、例えば、1)炭化水素系化合物、2)ハロゲン化炭化水素系化合物、3)アルコール系化合物、4)エーテルまたはアセタール系化合物、5)ケトンまたはアルデヒド系化合物、6)エステル系化合物、7)多価アルコール系化合物、8)カルボン酸またはその酸無水物系化合物、9)フェノール系化合物、10)含窒素化合物、11)含硫黄化合物、12)含フッ素化合物が挙げられる。剥離液としては、含窒素化合物を含有することが好ましく、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物とを含むことがより好ましい。 The stripping solution generally contains an organic solvent, but may further contain an inorganic solvent. Examples of organic solvents include 1) hydrocarbon compounds, 2) halogenated hydrocarbon compounds, 3) alcohol compounds, 4) ether or acetal compounds, 5) ketones or aldehyde compounds, and 6) ester compounds. 7) polyhydric alcohol compounds, 8) carboxylic acids or acid anhydride compounds thereof, 9) phenol compounds, 10) nitrogen compounds, 11) sulfur compounds, and 12) fluorine compounds. The stripping solution preferably contains a nitrogen-containing compound, and more preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
 非環状含窒素化合物としては、水酸基を有する非環状含窒素化合物であることが好ましい。具体的には、例えば、モノイソプロパノールアミン、ジイソプロパノールアミン、トリイソプロパノールアミン、N-エチルエタノールアミン、N,N-ジブチルエタノールアミン、N-ブチルエタノールアミン、モノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミンなどが挙げられ、好ましくはモノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミンであり、より好ましくはモノエタノールアミン(H2NCH2CH2OH)である。また、環状含窒素化合物としては、イソキノリン、イミダゾール、N-エチルモルホリン、ε-カプロラクタム、キノリン、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン、α-ピコリン、β-ピコリン、γ-ピコリン、2-ピペコリン、3-ピペコリン、4-ピペコリン、ピペラジン、ピペリジン、ピラジン、ピリジン、ピロリジン、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-フェニルモルホリン、2,4-ルチジン、2,6-ルチジンなどが挙げられ、好ましくは、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-エチルモルホリンであり、より好ましくはN-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)である。 The acyclic nitrogen-containing compound is preferably an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound having a hydroxyl group. Specific examples include monoisopropanolamine, diisopropanolamine, triisopropanolamine, N-ethylethanolamine, N, N-dibutylethanolamine, N-butylethanolamine, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine. Preferably, they are monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and more preferably monoethanolamine (H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 OH). Examples of cyclic nitrogen-containing compounds include isoquinoline, imidazole, N-ethylmorpholine, ε-caprolactam, quinoline, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, α-picoline, β-picoline, γ-picoline, 2- Preferred examples include pipecoline, 3-pipecoline, 4-pipecoline, piperazine, piperidine, pyrazine, pyridine, pyrrolidine, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-phenylmorpholine, 2,4-lutidine, and 2,6-lutidine. Are N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, more preferably N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP).
 剥離液は、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物とを含むことが好ましいが、中でも、非環状含窒素化合物として、モノエタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、およびトリエタノールアミンから選ばれる少なくとも1種と、環状含窒素化合物として、N-メチル-2-ピロリドンおよびN-エチルモルホリンから選ばれる少なくとも1種とを含むことがより好ましく、モノエタノールアミンとN-メチル-2-ピロリドンとを含むことが更に好ましい。 The stripping solution preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound. Among these, as the acyclic nitrogen-containing compound, at least one selected from monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and cyclic The nitrogen-containing compound preferably includes at least one selected from N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, and more preferably includes monoethanolamine and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
 剥離液で除去するときには、第1着色パターン12の上に形成されたレジストパターン52が除去されていればよく、第1着色パターン12の側壁にエッチング生成物であるデポ物が付着している場合でも、上記デポ物が完全に除去されていなくてもよい。デポ物とは、エッチング生成物が着色層の側壁に付着し堆積したものをいう。 When removing with the stripping solution, it is sufficient that the resist pattern 52 formed on the first colored pattern 12 is removed, and a deposit as an etching product adheres to the side wall of the first colored pattern 12 However, the deposit may not be completely removed. A deposit means an etching product deposited and deposited on the side wall of a colored layer.
 剥離液としては、非環状含窒素化合物の含有量が、剥離液100質量部に対して9質量部以上11質量部以下であって、環状含窒素化合物の含有量が、剥離液100質量部に対して65質量部以上70質量部以下であるものが望ましい。また、剥離液は、非環状含窒素化合物と環状含窒素化合物との混合物を純水で希釈したものが好ましい。 As the stripping solution, the content of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 9 parts by weight or more and 11 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution, and the content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution. On the other hand, what is 65 to 70 mass parts is desirable. Further, the stripping solution is preferably obtained by diluting a mixture of an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound with pure water.
 次いで、特開2013-64998号公報の図7の概略断面図に示すように、第1貫通孔部分群121および第2貫通孔部分群122における各貫通孔の内部に第2着色感放射線性組成物を埋設させて、複数の第2着色画素が形成されるように、第1着色層(すなわち、第1着色層11に貫通孔群120が形成されてなる第1着色パターン12)上に第2着色感放射線性組成物により第2着色感放射線性層21を積層する(工程(ウ))。これにより、第1着色層11の貫通孔群120の中に、複数の第2着色画素を有する第2着色パターン22が形成される。ここで、第2着色画素は四角形状の画素となっている。第2着色感放射線性層21の形成は、既述の第1着色層11を形成する方法と同様にして行なえる。
 ここでの第2着色感放射線性層21の厚みとしては、0.3~1μmの範囲が好ましく、0.35~0.8の範囲がより好ましく、0.35~0.7μmの範囲がより好ましい。
Next, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 7 of JP2013-64998A, the second colored radiation-sensitive composition is formed inside each through-hole in the first through-hole portion group 121 and the second through-hole portion group 122. The first colored layer (that is, the first colored pattern 12 in which the through-hole group 120 is formed in the first colored layer 11) is formed on the first colored layer so that a plurality of second colored pixels are formed by embedding the object. The 2nd colored radiation sensitive layer 21 is laminated | stacked with a 2 colored radiation sensitive composition (process (c)). Thereby, the 2nd coloring pattern 22 which has a some 2nd coloring pixel in the through-hole group 120 of the 1st coloring layer 11 is formed. Here, the second colored pixel is a square pixel. The second colored radiation sensitive layer 21 can be formed in the same manner as the method for forming the first colored layer 11 described above.
The thickness of the second colored radiation-sensitive layer 21 here is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1 μm, more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.8, and more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.7 μm. preferable.
 そして、第2着色感放射線性層21の、第1着色層11に設けられた第1貫通孔部分群121に対応する位置21Aを露光し、現像することによって、第2着色感放射線性層21と、第2貫通孔部分群122の各貫通孔の内部に設けられた複数の第2着色画素22Rとを除去する(工程(エ))(特開2013-64998号公報の図8の概略断面図を参照)。 Then, the second colored radiation-sensitive layer 21 is exposed and developed at a position 21A corresponding to the first through-hole portion group 121 provided in the first colored layer 11 of the second colored radiation-sensitive layer 21. And the plurality of second colored pixels 22R provided inside each through hole of the second through hole portion group 122 (step (d)) (schematic cross section of FIG. 8 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-64998) (See diagram).
 次いで、特開2013-64998号公報の図9の概略断面図に示すように、第2貫通孔部分群122における各貫通孔の内部に第3着色感放射線性組成物を埋設させて、複数の第3着色画素が形成されるように、第1着色層(すなわち、第1貫通孔部分群121の中に第2着色パターン22が形成されてなる第1着色パターン12)上に第3着色感放射線性組成物により第3着色感放射線性層31を形成する(工程(オ))。これにより、第1着色層11の第2貫通孔部分群122の中に、複数の第3着色画素を有する第3着色パターン32が形成される。ここで、第3着色画素は四角形状の画素となっている。第3着色感放射線性層31の形成は、既述の第1着色層11を形成する方法と同様にして行なえる。
 ここでの第3着色感放射線性層31の厚みとしては、0.3~1μmの範囲が好ましく、0.35~0.8の範囲がより好ましく、0.35~0.7μmの範囲がより好ましい。
Next, as shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 9 of JP2013-64998A, a third colored radiation-sensitive composition is embedded in each through-hole in the second through-hole portion group 122 to obtain a plurality of The third color sensation is formed on the first color layer (that is, the first color pattern 12 in which the second color pattern 22 is formed in the first through-hole portion group 121) so that the third color pixel is formed. The 3rd colored radiation sensitive layer 31 is formed with a radiation composition (process (e)). Thereby, the third colored pattern 32 having a plurality of third colored pixels is formed in the second through-hole portion group 122 of the first colored layer 11. Here, the third colored pixel is a square pixel. The third colored radiation-sensitive layer 31 can be formed in the same manner as the method for forming the first colored layer 11 described above.
The thickness of the third colored radiation-sensitive layer 31 here is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1 μm, more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.8, and more preferably in the range of 0.35 to 0.7 μm. preferable.
 そして、第3着色感放射線性層31の、第1着色層11に設けられた第2貫通孔部分群122に対応する位置31Aを露光し、現像することによって、第3着色感放射線性層31を除去することで、特開2013-64998号公報の図10の概略断面図に示すように、第1着色パターン12と、第2着色パターン22と、第3着色パターン32とを有するカラーフィルタ100が製造される(工程(カ))。 Then, the third colored radiation-sensitive layer 31 is exposed and developed at a position 31A corresponding to the second through-hole portion group 122 provided in the first colored layer 11 of the third colored radiation-sensitive layer 31. As shown in the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 10 of JP2013-64998A, the color filter 100 having the first colored pattern 12, the second colored pattern 22, and the third colored pattern 32 is removed. Is manufactured (step (f)).
 上述した第2着色感放射線性組成物、および、第3着色感放射線性組成物は、それぞれ、着色剤を含有する。着色剤は、本発明の着色硬化性組成物において上述したものを同様に挙げることができるが、第2着色画素および第3着色画素の一方が赤色透過部であり、他方が青色透過部であることが好ましい形態であるため、はそれぞれ赤色透過部または青色透過部であることが好ましい。赤色透過部を形成するための着色硬化性組成物に含有される着色剤は、C.I.Pigment Orange 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73、および、C.I.Pigment Red 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279から選択される1種以上であることが好ましく、青色透過部を形成するための着色硬化性組成物に含有される着色剤は、C.I.Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42、および、C.I.Pigment Blue 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,60,64,66,79,80から選択される1種以上であることが好ましい。 The second colored radiation-sensitive composition and the third colored radiation-sensitive composition described above each contain a colorant. Examples of the colorant include those described above for the colored curable composition of the present invention, but one of the second colored pixel and the third colored pixel is a red transmissive portion, and the other is a blue transmissive portion. Are preferably a red transmissive part or a blue transmissive part, respectively. The colorant contained in the colored curable composition for forming the red transmission part is C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, And C.I. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53: 1, 57: 1, 60: 1, 63: 1, 66, 67, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 270, 272, 279 seed Is preferably above, the colorant contained in the colored curable composition for forming a blue transmission unit, C. I. Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80 or more It is preferable.
 第2着色感放射線性組成物、および、第3着色感放射線性組成物の各々において、着色剤の組成物の全固形分に対する含有量は、30質量%以上であることが好ましく、35質量%以上であることがより好ましく、40質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、着色剤の組成物の全固形分に対する含有量は、通常、90質量%以下であり、80質量%以下であることが好ましい。 In each of the second colored radiation-sensitive composition and the third colored radiation-sensitive composition, the content of the colorant composition with respect to the total solid content is preferably 30% by mass or more, and 35% by mass. More preferably, it is more preferably 40% by mass or more. Moreover, content with respect to the total solid of the composition of a coloring agent is 90 mass% or less normally, and it is preferable that it is 80 mass% or less.
 また、第2着色感放射線性組成物、および、第3着色感放射線性組成物は、それぞれ、ネガ型の感放射線性組成物が用いられることが好ましい。このネガ型の感放射線性組成物としては、紫外線(g線、h線、i線)、エキシマー・レーザー等を含む遠紫外線、電子線、イオンビームおよびX線等の放射線に感応するネガ型感放射線性組成物が使用できる。放射線のうち、g線、h線、i線が好ましく、中でもi線が好ましい。 Also, it is preferable that a negative radiation sensitive composition is used for each of the second colored radiation sensitive composition and the third colored radiation sensitive composition. As this negative type radiation sensitive composition, there is a negative type feeling sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g rays, h rays, i rays), deep ultraviolet rays including excimer lasers, electron beams, ion beams and X rays. A radiation composition can be used. Of the radiation, g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
 具体的には、ネガ型の感放射線性組成物として、光重合開始剤、重合成分(重合性化合物)、および、バインダー樹脂(アルカリ可溶性樹脂等)などを含有する組成物が好ましく、例えば、特開2005-326453号公報の段落番号[0017]~[0064]に記載のものを挙げることができる。このようなネガ型の感放射線性組成物は、放射線の照射により、光重合開始剤が、重合性化合物の重合反応を開始させ、結果として、アルカリ可溶状態から、アルカリ不溶性になることを利用するものである。 Specifically, the negative radiation-sensitive composition is preferably a composition containing a photopolymerization initiator, a polymerization component (polymerizable compound), a binder resin (alkali-soluble resin or the like), and the like. Examples described in paragraph Nos. [0017] to [0064] of JP-A-2005-326453. Such a negative radiation sensitive composition utilizes the fact that the photopolymerization initiator initiates the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound upon irradiation with radiation, and as a result, the alkali soluble state becomes alkali insoluble. To do.
 第2着色感放射線性層21および第3着色感放射線性層31に対する露光は、g線、h線、i線等、好ましくはi線で露光を施すことにより行なうことができる。
 また、露光後に実施される現像は、通常、現像液で現像処理することにより行われる。
 現像液としては、フォトレジスト層51に対する露光、現像において既述した現像液と同様のものを挙げることができる。
 また、アルカリ性水溶液を現像液として用いた場合は、一般に現像後に水で洗浄処理が施される。
The exposure with respect to the 2nd colored radiation sensitive layer 21 and the 3rd colored radiation sensitive layer 31 can be performed by exposing with g line | wire, h line | wire, i line | wire, etc., Preferably i line | wire.
The development performed after exposure is usually performed by developing with a developer.
Examples of the developer include the same developers as those already described in the exposure and development of the photoresist layer 51.
When an alkaline aqueous solution is used as a developer, a washing treatment with water is generally performed after development.
 第1着色画素、第2着色画素および第3着色画素における一辺の長さ(画素が長方形である場合は短辺の長さであり、画素が正方形である場合は一辺の長さを指す)は、画像解像度の観点から、0.5~1.7μmが好ましく、0.6~1.5μmがより好ましい。 The length of one side of the first colored pixel, the second colored pixel, and the third colored pixel (the length of the short side when the pixel is a rectangle, and the length of one side when the pixel is a square) is From the viewpoint of image resolution, 0.5 to 1.7 μm is preferable, and 0.6 to 1.5 μm is more preferable.
 以上に説明した本発明のカラーフィルタの製造方法によれば、第1着色層、ひいては、第1着色画素が、本発明の着色剤の濃度が高い着色硬化性組成物により形成されるため、第1着色画素の厚みを極めて薄くできる(例えば、0.7μm以下)。これにより、クロストーク(光の混色)が抑制されたカラーフィルタを製造し得るカラーフィルタの製造方法とすることができる。
 また、本発明の着色硬化性組成物により形成された第1着色画素は、上述したように、耐溶剤性および耐アルカリ現像液性が優れたものとなる。これにより、他の着色層および他の着色パターンにおける色と重なり合うオーバーラップ領域の発生を低減でき、その結果、高性能のカラーフィルタを製造できる。
According to the method for producing a color filter of the present invention described above, the first colored layer, and thus the first colored pixel, is formed of the colored curable composition having a high concentration of the colorant of the present invention. The thickness of one colored pixel can be extremely reduced (for example, 0.7 μm or less). Thereby, it can be set as the manufacturing method of the color filter which can manufacture the color filter by which crosstalk (color mixture of light) was suppressed.
Moreover, as described above, the first colored pixel formed by the colored curable composition of the present invention has excellent solvent resistance and alkali developer resistance. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the overlap area | region which overlaps with the color in another coloring layer and another coloring pattern can be reduced, As a result, a high performance color filter can be manufactured.
 本発明の着色硬化性組成物から得られるカラーフィルタは、液晶表示装置(LCD)や固体撮像素子(例えば、CCD、CMOS等)用として好適に用いることができる。また電子ペーパーや有機EL等の画像表示デバイスにも好適に用いることができる。特に、本発明のカラーフィルタは、CCD、およびCMOS等の固体撮像素子用として好適に用いることができる。 The color filter obtained from the colored curable composition of the present invention can be suitably used for a liquid crystal display (LCD) or a solid-state imaging device (for example, CCD, CMOS, etc.). Moreover, it can use suitably also for image display devices, such as electronic paper and organic EL. In particular, the color filter of the present invention can be suitably used for a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD and a CMOS.
 また、本発明のカラーフィルタは、液晶表示装置用のカラーフィルタとしても好適である。このようなカラーフィルタを備えた液晶表示装置は、表示画像の色合いが良好で表示特性に優れた高画質画像を表示することができる。 The color filter of the present invention is also suitable as a color filter for a liquid crystal display device. A liquid crystal display device provided with such a color filter can display a high-quality image having a good display image color tone and excellent display characteristics.
 表示装置の定義や各表示装置の詳細については、例えば特開2013-64998号公報の段落番号0395~0398の記載を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 For the definition of the display device and details of each display device, for example, the description of paragraph numbers 0395 to 0398 in JP 2013-64998 A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 以下、本発明を実施例により更に具体的に説明するが、本発明はその主旨を越えない限り、以下の実施例に限定されるものではない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は、質量基準である。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the following examples as long as the gist thereof is not exceeded. Unless otherwise specified, “part” and “%” are based on mass.
<ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料>
ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料A:下記構造中、a~cは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a=12、b=2、c=2を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料B:下記構造中、a、bは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a=12、b=4を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料C:下記構造中、a~cは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a=12、b=2、c=2を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料D:下記構造中、a、bは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a=12、b=4を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料E:下記構造中、a、bは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a=12、b=4を表す。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料F(ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Eの多量体)
<非ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料>
非ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料A:下記構造中、a、bは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a+b=16を満たす。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
<ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料>
ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料A:P.G58(ピグメントグリーン58)
<Halogenated phthalocyanine dye>
Halogenated phthalocyanine dye A: In the following structures, a to c each represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses, and a = 12, b = 2, and c = 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000081
Halogenated phthalocyanine dye B: In the following structures, a and b represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses, respectively, and represent a = 12, b = 4.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000082
Halogenated phthalocyanine dye C: In the following structures, a to c each represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses, and a = 12, b = 2, and c = 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000083
Halogenated phthalocyanine dye D: In the following structure, a and b represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses, respectively, and represent a = 12, b = 4.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000084
Halogenated phthalocyanine dye E: In the following structures, a and b represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses, respectively, and a = 12 and b = 4.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000085
Halogenated phthalocyanine dye F (multimer of halogenated phthalocyanine dye E)
<Non-halogenated phthalocyanine dye>
Non-halogenated phthalocyanine dye A: In the following structures, a and b each represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses and satisfy a + b = 16.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000086
<Halogenated phthalocyanine pigment>
Halogenated phthalocyanine pigment A: P.I. G58 (Pigment Green 58)
<<合成例1-ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Aの合成>>
 フラスコにテトラクロロフタロニトリル(80.0g、300.9mmol)と下記化合物1(59.03g、300.9mmol)と、アセトニトリル400.0gとを投入した。このフラスコの内温が40℃に安定するまで30分間攪拌した後、炭酸カリウム(45.74g、330.9mmol)を投入して約3時間反応させた。冷却後、吸引ろ過して得た溶液を40℃1時間で減圧濃縮し、溶媒を留去し、次いで、110℃で一晩真空乾燥し、化合物Aを約128g(99.9%)得た。
 フラスコに化合物A(125.0g、293.7mmol)と、ベンゾニトリル146.83mLとを投入し、窒素気流下(10mL/min)、このフラスコの内温が150℃に安定するまで約1時間攪拌した。その後、ここにヨウ化亜鉛26.81g(84.0mmol)を投入して、約48時間反応させた。冷却後、ここにメタノール2000mLを加え、室温にて攪拌することで晶析した。析出した固体をデカンテーションにより取り出し、得られた固体にメタノール2000mLを加え、60℃で1時間加熱攪拌した。これを冷却した後、吸引ろ過し、得られた結晶を40℃で一晩送風乾燥し、化合物Bを約104.5g(80.5%)得た。この化合物Bは、上述したハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Eに相当する。
 フラスコに化合物B(30.0g、16.97mmol)、THF/水(1:1)300mL、および水酸化リチウム(0.81g、33.94mmol)を投入し、このフラスコの内温を60℃として約7時間攪拌した。これを冷却した後、ここに1M塩酸102mLを加え、室温にて30分攪拌した。この溶液を40℃で1時間、減圧濃縮し、溶媒を留去した。続いて、得られた残渣にメタノール50mLを加え、吸引ろ過し、得られた結晶を40℃で一晩送風乾燥し、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Aを約1.54g(88.2%)得た。
化合物1
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
<< Synthesis Example 1 Synthesis of Halogenated Phthalocyanine Dye A >>
Tetrachlorophthalonitrile (80.0 g, 300.9 mmol), the following compound 1 (59.03 g, 300.9 mmol) and 400.0 g of acetonitrile were added to the flask. After stirring for 30 minutes until the internal temperature of the flask was stabilized at 40 ° C., potassium carbonate (45.74 g, 330.9 mmol) was added and allowed to react for about 3 hours. After cooling, the solution obtained by suction filtration was concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. for 1 hour, the solvent was distilled off, and then vacuum dried at 110 ° C. overnight to obtain about 128 g (99.9%) of Compound A. .
A flask was charged with compound A (125.0 g, 293.7 mmol) and 146.83 mL of benzonitrile, and stirred for about 1 hour under a nitrogen stream (10 mL / min) until the internal temperature of the flask was stabilized at 150 ° C. did. Thereafter, 26.81 g (84.0 mmol) of zinc iodide was added thereto and reacted for about 48 hours. After cooling, 2000 mL of methanol was added thereto and crystallized by stirring at room temperature. The precipitated solid was taken out by decantation, 2000 mL of methanol was added to the obtained solid, and the mixture was heated and stirred at 60 ° C. for 1 hour. After cooling this, suction filtration was performed, and the resulting crystals were blown and dried overnight at 40 ° C. to obtain about 104.5 g (80.5%) of Compound B. This compound B corresponds to the halogenated phthalocyanine dye E described above.
Compound B (30.0 g, 16.97 mmol), THF / water (1: 1) 300 mL, and lithium hydroxide (0.81 g, 33.94 mmol) were charged into the flask, and the internal temperature of the flask was adjusted to 60 ° C. Stir for about 7 hours. After cooling this, 102 mL of 1M hydrochloric acid was added thereto and stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The solution was concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. for 1 hour, and the solvent was distilled off. Subsequently, 50 mL of methanol was added to the obtained residue and suction filtered, and the obtained crystal was blown and dried overnight at 40 ° C. to obtain about 1.54 g (88.2%) of a halogenated phthalocyanine dye A.
Compound 1
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000087
<合成例2-ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Fの合成>
 フラスコに上記化合物B(ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料E)(1.75g、1.06mmol)、DMF20mL、1M水酸化ナトリウム水溶液1.06mLを投入し、内温60℃で約6時間攪拌した。冷却後、1M塩酸10mLを加えた。この溶液にメタノール50mLを加え、吸引ろ過し、得られた固体を40℃で一晩送風乾燥し、化合物Cが約1.48g得られた。
 フラスコに化合物C(1.5g)、グリシジルメタクリレート0.18g、テトラブチルアンモニウムブロミド0.23g、p-メトキシフェノール0.02g、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル9.0mLを投入し、100℃で約8時間攪拌した。この反応液にメタノール45mLを加え、吸引ろ過し、得られた結晶を40℃で一晩送風乾燥し、化合物Dが約1.21g得られた。
化合物D
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000088
 三口フラスコに、化合物D(24.2g)、メタクリル酸(1.08g)、ドデシルメルカプタン(0.25g)、プロピレングリコール1-モノメチルエーテル2-アセテート(以下、「PGMEA」とも称する。)(23.3g)を添加し、窒素雰囲気下で80℃に加熱した。この溶液に、化合物D(24.2g)、メタクリル酸(1.08g)、ドデシルメルカプタン(0.25g)、2,2’-アゾビス(イソ酪酸)ジメチル(0.58g)〔商品名:V601、和光純薬工業(株)製〕、PGMEA(23.3g)の混合溶液を2時間かけて滴下した。その後3時間攪拌した後、90℃に昇温し、2時間加熱攪拌した後、放冷して多量体中間物のPGMEA溶液を得た。次に、メタクリル酸グリシジル(1.42g)、テトラブチルアンモニウムブロミド(80mg)、p-メトキシフェノール(20mg)を添加し、空気雰囲気下で、100℃で15時間加熱し、メタクリル酸グリシジルが消失するのを確認した。冷却後、メタノール/イオン交換水=100mL/10mLの混合溶媒に滴下して再沈し、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Fを47.6g得た。
 GPC測定により確認したハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Fの重量平均分子量(Mw)は6,500であり、重量平均分子量/数平均分子量(Mw/Mn)の比は1.9であった。
Synthesis Example 2 Synthesis of Halogenated Phthalocyanine Dye F
The above compound B (halogenated phthalocyanine dye E) (1.75 g, 1.06 mmol), DMF 20 mL, 1 M aqueous sodium hydroxide solution 1.06 mL was added to the flask, and the mixture was stirred at an internal temperature of 60 ° C. for about 6 hours. After cooling, 10 mL of 1M hydrochloric acid was added. 50 mL of methanol was added to this solution and suction filtered, and the resulting solid was blown and dried overnight at 40 ° C. to obtain about 1.48 g of Compound C.
Compound C (1.5 g), 0.18 g of glycidyl methacrylate, 0.23 g of tetrabutylammonium bromide, 0.02 g of p-methoxyphenol, and 9.0 mL of propylene glycol monomethyl ether were added to the flask and stirred at 100 ° C. for about 8 hours. did. To this reaction liquid, 45 mL of methanol was added and suction filtered, and the resulting crystal was blown and dried overnight at 40 ° C. to obtain about 1.21 g of Compound D.
Compound D
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000088
In a three-necked flask, compound D (24.2 g), methacrylic acid (1.08 g), dodecyl mercaptan (0.25 g), propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate (hereinafter also referred to as “PGMEA”) (23. 3 g) was added and heated to 80 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. To this solution, Compound D (24.2 g), methacrylic acid (1.08 g), dodecyl mercaptan (0.25 g), 2,2′-azobis (isobutyric acid) dimethyl (0.58 g) [trade name: V601, Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.] and PGMEA (23.3 g) were added dropwise over 2 hours. Then, after stirring for 3 hours, the temperature was raised to 90 ° C., the mixture was heated and stirred for 2 hours, and then allowed to cool to obtain a PGMEA solution of a multimeric intermediate. Next, glycidyl methacrylate (1.42 g), tetrabutylammonium bromide (80 mg), and p-methoxyphenol (20 mg) are added and heated in an air atmosphere at 100 ° C. for 15 hours to eliminate glycidyl methacrylate. Confirmed. After cooling, it was added dropwise to a mixed solvent of methanol / ion-exchanged water = 100 mL / 10 mL for reprecipitation to obtain 47.6 g of a halogenated phthalocyanine dye F.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the halogenated phthalocyanine dye F confirmed by GPC measurement was 6,500, and the ratio of the weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight (Mw / Mn) was 1.9.
<<合成例2-フタロシアニン染料B-E及び非ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料の合成>>
 合成例1において、適宜原料を変更することにより、他のフタロシアニン染料を合成した。
<< Synthesis Example 2 Synthesis of Phthalocyanine Dye BE and Non-Halogenated Phthalocyanine Dye >>
In Synthesis Example 1, other phthalocyanine dyes were synthesized by appropriately changing the raw materials.
<他の着色剤>
アゾ系色素(顔料)A:P.Y150
<Other colorants>
Azo dye (pigment) A: P.I. Y150
<誘導体>
誘導体A:下記化合物
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000089
<Derivative>
Derivative A: the following compound
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000089
<分散剤>
分散剤A:下記化合物(特開2007-277514号公報の段落番号0334を参照して合成した。)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000090
 上記において、aは、2.0、bは4.0、酸価10mgKOH/g、Mw20000である。
 また、分散剤Aにおけるaおよびbは、それぞれ、括弧内で表される部分構造の数を表し、a+b=6を満たす。
分散剤B:BYKChemie社製 Disperbyk-107
<Dispersant>
Dispersant A: the following compound (synthesized with reference to paragraph number 0334 of JP-A-2007-277514)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000090
In the above, a is 2.0, b is 4.0, acid value is 10 mgKOH / g, and Mw20000.
Further, a and b in the dispersant A each represent the number of partial structures represented in parentheses and satisfy a + b = 6.
Dispersant B: Disperbyk-107 manufactured by BYK Chemie
<ラジカルトラップ剤>
ナフタレン誘導体A:東京化成工業(株)社製 1,4-ジヒドロキシナフタレン
チオエーテル化合物A:東京化成工業(株)社製 3,3’-チオジプロピオン酸ジメチル
ヒンダードアミン化合物A:BASF社製 TINUVIN123
ヒンダードアミン化合物B:ADEKA(株)社製 アデカスタブLA-52
紫外線吸収剤A:BASF社製 TINUVIN900
紫外線吸収剤B:TINUVIN234
熱重合防止剤A:三立ケミー(株)社製 p-メトキシフェノール
熱重合防止剤B:ADEKA(株)社製 アデカスタブAO-60
<Radical trapping agent>
Naphthalene derivative A: manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. 1,4-dihydroxynaphthalene thioether compound A: manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. 3,3′-thiodipropionic acid dimethyl hindered amine compound A: manufactured by BASF TINUVIN123
Hindered amine compound B: Adekastab LA-52 manufactured by ADEKA Corporation
Ultraviolet absorber A: TINUVIN900 manufactured by BASF
Ultraviolet absorber B: TINUVIN234
Thermal polymerization inhibitor A: p-methoxyphenol thermal polymerization inhibitor B: ADEKA Corporation Adeka Stub AO-60
<熱硬化性化合物>
エポキシ化合物A:EHPE3150(ダイセル化学工業(株)製、分子量=2234)エポキシ化合物B:東京化成(株)社製 グリシジルトリチルエーテル
<Thermosetting compound>
Epoxy compound A: EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd., molecular weight = 2234) Epoxy compound B: glycidyl trityl ether, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
<界面活性剤>
界面活性剤A:メガファックF781(DIC(株)製、フッ素型界面活性剤)
<Surfactant>
Surfactant A: Megafac F781 (manufactured by DIC Corporation, fluorine type surfactant)
<顔料分散液の調製>
 下記化合物を配合した混合液を、0.3mm径のジルコニアビーズを使用して、ビーズミル(減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製))で、3時間、混合、分散して、顔料分散液を調製した。顔料の種類は下記表5に記載のものとした。
・顔料P.Y150またはP.G58:15質量部
・誘導体A:0.5質量部
・分散剤Aまたは分散剤B:7.0質量部
・溶剤:PGMEA:90質量部
<Preparation of pigment dispersion>
The mixed solution containing the following compound was mixed for 3 hours with a bead mill (high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism) using zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.3 mm. Dispersed to prepare a pigment dispersion. The types of pigments are those listed in Table 5 below.
-Pigment P.I. Y150 or P.I. G58: 15 parts by mass Derivative A: 0.5 parts by mass Dispersant A or B: 7.0 parts by mass Solvent: PGMEA: 90 parts by mass
<着色硬化性組成物の調製>
 以下の各成分(詳細は下記表に記載の化合物)を混合し、撹拌して着色硬化性組成物を調製した。なお、下記表5中、「-」は配合していないことを表す。
<<実施例1>>
・ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料:全固形分100質量部中60質量部
・ラジカルトラップ剤:固形分中5質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中34質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<<実施例2~10>>
・ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料:全固形分100質量部中45質量部
・顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中22.5質量部
・ラジカルトラップ剤:全固形分100質量部中5質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中26.5質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<<実施例11>>
・ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料:全固形分100質量部中70質量部
・ラジカルトラップ剤:全固形分100質量部中5質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中24質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<<実施例12~20、22~26、比較例5>
・ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料:全固形分100質量部中50質量部
・顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中30質量部
・ラジカルトラップ剤:全固形分100質量部中5質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中14質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<<実施例21>>
・ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料:全固形分100質量部中30質量部
・顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中15質量部
・ラジカルトラップ剤:全固形分100質量部中5質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中49質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<<実施例27>>
 実施例4において、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Aをハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料Fに変更したこと以外は同様にして実施例27の着色硬化性組成物を調製した。
<<比較例1>>
・ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料:全固形分100質量部中45質量部
・顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中22.5質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中31.5質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<<比較例2>>
・P.G58を用いた顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中67.5質量部
・P.Y150を用いた顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中22.5質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中9質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<<比較例3>>
・P.G58を用いた顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中67.5質量部
・P.Y150を用いた顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中2
2.5質量部
・ラジカルトラップ剤:全固形分100質量部中5質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中4質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<<比較例4>>
・ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料:全固形分100質量部中50質量部
・顔料分散液(上記で調製したもの):全固形分100質量部中30質量部
・熱硬化性化合物:全固形分100質量部中19質量部
・界面活性剤:全固形分100質量部中1質量部
・溶剤:最終固形分濃度が15質量%となる量
<Preparation of colored curable composition>
Each of the following components (compounds described in the following table for details) were mixed and stirred to prepare a colored curable composition. In Table 5 below, “-” indicates that no blending was performed.
<< Example 1 >>
-Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 60 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Radical trapping agent: 5 parts by mass in solids-Thermosetting compound: 34 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Surfactant: Total solids 1 part by mass per 100 parts by mass. Solvent: amount that results in a final solid content concentration of 15% by mass << Examples 2 to 10 >>
Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 45 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 22.5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Radical trapping agent: 100 parts by mass of total solids 5 parts by mass in the part, thermosetting compound: 26.5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of the total solid, surfactant: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of the total solid, and solvent: 15% by mass of the final solid content concentration. Amount << Example 11 >>
-Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 70 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Radical trapping agent: 5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Thermosetting compound: 24 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Surface activity Agent: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of the total solid content. Solvent: Amount at which the final solid content concentration becomes 15 mass% << Examples 12 to 20, 22 to 26, Comparative Example 5 >>
-Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 50 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 30 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Radical trapping agent: in 100 parts by mass of total solids 5 parts by mass / thermosetting compound: 14 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids / surfactant: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids / solvent: an amount in which the final solid content concentration is 15% by mass << Example 21 >>
-Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 30 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 15 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Radical trapping agent: in 100 parts by mass of total solids 5 parts by mass-thermosetting compound: 49 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solid-Surfactant: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solid-Solvent: an amount in which the final solid content concentration is 15% by mass << Example 27 >>
A colored curable composition of Example 27 was prepared in the same manner as in Example 4, except that the halogenated phthalocyanine dye A was changed to the halogenated phthalocyanine dye F.
<< Comparative Example 1 >>
-Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 45 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 22.5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-Thermosetting compound: 100 in total solids 31.5 parts by weight in parts by weight, surfactant: 1 part by weight in 100 parts by weight of total solids, solvent: an amount that results in a final solids concentration of 15% by weight << Comparative Example 2 >>
・ P. Pigment dispersion using G58 (prepared above): 67.5 parts by mass / P. Pigment dispersion using Y150 (prepared above): 22.5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids, thermosetting compound: 9 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids, surfactant: all solids 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass / solvent: An amount that results in a final solid content concentration of 15% by mass << Comparative Example 3 >>
・ P. Pigment dispersion using G58 (prepared above): 67.5 parts by mass / P. Pigment dispersion using Y150 (prepared above): 2 in 100 parts by weight of total solids
2.5 parts by mass-radical trapping agent: 5 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-thermosetting compound: 4 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids-surfactant: 1 part by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Parts / solvent: an amount at which the final solid content concentration becomes 15% by mass << Comparative Example 4 >>
Halogenated phthalocyanine dye: 50 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Pigment dispersion (prepared above): 30 parts by mass in 100 parts by mass of total solids Thermosetting compound: 100 parts by mass of total solids 19 parts by mass / surfactant: 1 part by mass of 100 parts by mass of total solids / solvent: the amount at which the final solid content concentration is 15% by mass
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000091
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000091
 得られた組成物について、以下の評価を行った。 The following evaluation was performed about the obtained composition.
<異物欠陥数の評価方法>
 上述で得られた組成物を7.5cm×7.5cmのガラス基板上に、スピンコータを用いて膜厚0.6μmの塗布膜となるように塗布した後、ホットプレートを使用して、100℃で2分間加熱乾燥(プリベーク)し、着色膜(着色層)を形成した。
 上記着色膜(プリベークした後の露光・現像前の着色膜)に含まれる異物を、異物評価装置コンプラスIII(アプライドマテリアルズ社製)にて検出した。検出された全ての異物から、歩留まり低下の原因となる最大幅1.0μm以上の異物を目視で分類した。分類された最大幅1.0μm以上の異物の数(1cm2あたりの数)をカウントし、得られた値を指標として膜欠陥の評価を行なった。
 なお、異物評価装置コンプラスIIIは、膜の状態により異物数が異なる為、異物評価の際は膜厚の面内均一性を事前に確認する必要がある。面内均一性が100nm以内の塗布膜の群については、異物数を同列に比較できる。面内均一性とは、塗布膜の8インチウェハー面内での最大膜厚と最少膜厚の膜厚差(最大膜厚-最少膜厚)を意味する
<Method for evaluating the number of foreign object defects>
The composition obtained above was applied onto a 7.5 cm × 7.5 cm glass substrate using a spin coater so as to form a coating film having a thickness of 0.6 μm. And dried for 2 minutes (pre-baked) to form a colored film (colored layer).
Foreign matter contained in the colored film (colored film after exposure and development after pre-baking) was detected with a foreign substance evaluation apparatus Conplus III (manufactured by Applied Materials). From all the detected foreign matters, foreign matters having a maximum width of 1.0 μm or more that cause a decrease in yield were visually classified. The number of classified foreign matters having a maximum width of 1.0 μm or more (number per 1 cm 2 ) was counted, and film defects were evaluated using the obtained value as an index.
Note that the foreign substance evaluation apparatus Conplus III has a different number of foreign substances depending on the state of the film. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the in-plane uniformity of the film thickness in advance when evaluating the foreign substance. For the group of coating films having in-plane uniformity within 100 nm, the number of foreign matters can be compared in the same row. In-plane uniformity means the film thickness difference between the maximum film thickness and the minimum film thickness (maximum film thickness-minimum film thickness) within the 8-inch wafer surface of the coating film.
 上記表5から明らかなとおり、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物、ラジカルトラップ剤、およびこれらを溶解する溶剤を含む着色硬化性組成物を用いて形成した着色層(実施例1~27)は、本構成を有さない場合と比較して、異物欠陥数が少ないことが分かった。
 これに対し、着色硬化性組成物中にラジカルトラップ剤が含まれない場合(比較例1及び4)、着色硬化性組成物中にラジカルトラップ剤が含まれず、かつ、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料ではなくフタロシアニン顔料を用いた場合(比較例2)、ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料ではなくフタロシアニン顔料を用いた場合(比較例3)、フタロシアニン染料がハロゲンを含まない場合(比較例5)、形成した着色層における異物欠陥数が実施例に比べて多いことが分かった。
As apparent from Table 5 above, a colored layer formed using a colored curable composition containing a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them (Example 1) From (27) to (27), it was found that the number of foreign matter defects was small as compared with the case without this configuration.
In contrast, when the colored curable composition does not contain a radical trapping agent (Comparative Examples 1 and 4), the colored curable composition contains no radical trapping agent and is not a halogenated phthalocyanine dye but a phthalocyanine. When a pigment is used (Comparative Example 2), when a phthalocyanine pigment is used instead of a halogenated phthalocyanine dye (Comparative Example 3), when the phthalocyanine dye does not contain a halogen (Comparative Example 5), foreign matter defects in the formed colored layer It turned out that there are many numbers compared with an Example.
 1 微小異物
 2 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料、
 3 ラジカルトラップ剤
 4 ハロゲン化フタロシアニン顔料
 13 カラーフィルタ
 14 平坦化膜
 15 マイクロレンズ
 20G 緑色画素(第1色画素)
 20R 赤色画素(第2色画素)
 20B 青色画素(第3色画素)
 41 Pウエル
 42 受光素子(フォトダイオード)
 43 不純物拡散層
 44 電極
 45 配線層
 46 BPSG膜
 47 絶縁膜
 48 P-SiN膜
 49 平坦化膜層
1 Fine foreign matter 2 Halogenated phthalocyanine dye,
3 Radical trapping agent 4 Halogenated phthalocyanine pigment 13 Color filter 14 Flattening film 15 Microlens 20G Green pixel (first color pixel)
20R red pixel (second color pixel)
20B Blue pixel (third color pixel)
41 P well 42 Light receiving element (photodiode)
43 Impurity diffusion layer 44 Electrode 45 Wiring layer 46 BPSG film 47 Insulating film 48 P-SiN film 49 Flattening film layer

Claims (18)

  1.  ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物、ラジカルトラップ剤、およびこれらを溶解する溶剤を含む着色硬化性組成物。
    A colored curable composition comprising a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them.
  2.  前記ラジカルトラップ剤が、少なくとも1つ以上の環構造を含む化合物を少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
    The colored curable composition according to claim 1, wherein the radical trapping agent contains at least one compound containing at least one ring structure.
  3.  前記ラジカルトラップ剤が、ヒンダードアミン化合物、紫外線吸収剤および熱重合防止剤から選択される少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1または2に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
    The colored curable composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the radical trapping agent contains at least one selected from a hindered amine compound, an ultraviolet absorber, and a thermal polymerization inhibitor.
  4.  前記ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料が、下記一般式(1)で表される、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物;一般式(1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     一般式(1)中、Z1~Z16は、それぞれ、水素原子または置換基であり、
     置換基の少なくとも1つは、ハロゲン原子であり、
     置換基の他の少なくとも1つは、芳香族基、または、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基である;
     Mは2つの水素原子、金属原子、金属酸化物または金属ハロゲン化物を表わす;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
     式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
     式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
    The colored curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is represented by the following general formula (1);
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In the general formula (1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
    At least one of the substituents is a halogen atom;
    At least one other substituent is an aromatic group, a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), or a group represented by the following formula (2A). A group containing at least one functional group selected from a group to be selected, an amino group and a thiol group;
    M represents two hydrogen atoms, metal atoms, metal oxides or metal halides;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
    In formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
    In formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  5.  前記一般式(1)において、Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、
     下記一般式(1-2)で表される基、
     一般式(1-4)で表される基、並びに
     カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基、
     から選択される少なくとも1種を表す、請求項4に記載の着色硬化性組成物;一般式(1-2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
     一般式(1-2)中、Xは酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、A1は、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基、または、置換基を有していてもよいナフチル基である;一般式(1-4)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
     一般式(1-4)中、R'は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R”は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表す。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
     式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
     式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
    In the general formula (1), 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are
    A group represented by the following general formula (1-2);
    A group represented by the general formula (1-4), a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), and a group represented by the following formula (2A). A group containing at least one functional group selected from a group, an amino group, and a thiol group,
    The colored curable composition according to claim 4, which represents at least one selected from the group consisting of:
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
    In general formula (1-2), X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. ; General formula (1-4)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
    In general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ″ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
    In formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
    In formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  6.  前記一般式(1)において、Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、
     下記一般式(1-2)で表される基若しくは下記一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、かつ、少なくとも1つは一般式(1-2)で表される基である、または、
     下記一般式(1-2)で表される基、並びに、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を含む基を表す、
     請求項4または5に記載の着色硬化性組成物;一般式(1-2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
     一般式(1-2)中、Xは酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、A1は、置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基、または、置換基を有していてもよいナフチル基である;一般式(1-4)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
     一般式(1-4)中、R'は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R”は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
     式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
     式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
    In the general formula (1), 1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 are
    It represents a group represented by the following general formula (1-2) or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4), and at least one is a group represented by the general formula (1-2) Or
    A group represented by the following general formula (1-2), a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), and a group represented by the following formula (2A) Represents a group containing at least one functional group selected from the group consisting of amino group and thiol group,
    The colored curable composition according to claim 4 or 5; the general formula (1-2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
    In general formula (1-2), X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 1 is a phenyl group which may have a substituent, or a naphthyl group which may have a substituent. ; General formula (1-4)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
    In general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ″ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
    In formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
    In formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  7.  前記ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料が下記一般式(1-1)で表される、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物;一般式(1-1)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
     一般式(1-1)中、Z1~Z16は、それぞれ、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、下記一般式
    (1-1-2)で表される基、下記一般式(1-3)で表される基、または、下記一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、
     Z1~Z16のうち、1~8つは、下記一般式(1-1-2)で表される基または下記一般式(1-4)で表される基を表し、
     少なくとも1つはハロゲン原子であり、かつ、少なくとも1つは下記一般式(1-1-2)で表される基である;
     Mは2つの水素原子、金属原子、金属酸化物または金属ハロゲン化物を表わす;一般式(1-1-2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
    一般式(1-1-2)中、X1は酸素原子または硫黄原子であり、A11は、1~5つの置換基Rを有するフェニル基、または1~7つの置換基Rを有するナフチル基であり、置換基Rは、ニトロ基、COOR1、OR2、ハロゲン原子、アリール基、シアノ基、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、下記一般式(4)~(6)のいずれかで表される基、または、下記一般式(X)から選択される基を表す;R1は下記一般式(1-3)で表される基または炭素数1~8のアルキル基である;R2は炭素数1~8のアルキル基である;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
     一般式(4)中、R4は水素原子、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有してもよいジアリールアミノ基、または置換基を有してもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基を表す;
     一般式(5)中、dは0~2の整数を表し、dが0または1のとき、R5は、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、または置換基を有してもよいアリール基であり、dが2のとき、R5は、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基
    を有してもよいジアルキルアミノ基、置換基を有してもよいジアリールアミノ基、置換基をまたは置換基を有してもよいアルキルアリールアミノ基を表す;
     一般式(6)中、R6およびR7は、それぞれ、置換基を有してもよいアルキル基、置換基を有してもよいアリール基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルカルボニル基、置換基を有してもよいアリールカルボニル基、置換基を有してもよいアルキルスルホニル基、置換基を有してもよいアリールスルホニル基を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
     一般式(X)中、R11は水素原子または炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す;
     n1は1~3の整数を表す;n1が2または3の場合、複数のR11は、それぞれ、同じでも異なっても良い;
     Y1は-O-、-S-、-NR13-、-SO2-、または、-C(=O)-を表す。R13は、水素原子または炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す;
     R12は1価の置換基を表す。
    一般式(1-3)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
     一般式(1-3)中、R3は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R4は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表し、nは1~4の整数を表す;一般式(1-4)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
     一般式(1-4)中、R'は炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表し、R”は炭素数1~8のアルキル基を表す。n1は0~4の整数を表す。
    The colored curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is represented by the following general formula (1-1);
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
    In the general formula (1-1), Z 1 to Z 16 are each a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2), or a group represented by the following general formula (1-3). Or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4),
    1 to 8 of Z 1 to Z 16 represent a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2) or a group represented by the following general formula (1-4),
    At least one is a halogen atom, and at least one is a group represented by the following general formula (1-1-2);
    M represents two hydrogen atoms, a metal atom, a metal oxide or a metal halide; general formula (1-1-2)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
    In general formula (1-1-2), X 1 is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and A 11 is a phenyl group having 1 to 5 substituents R, or a naphthyl group having 1 to 7 substituents R. And the substituent R is represented by any one of the following general formulas (4) to (6): a nitro group, COOR 1 , OR 2 , a halogen atom, an aryl group, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Or a group selected from the following general formula (X); R 1 is a group represented by the following general formula (1-3) or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms; R 2 Is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
    In general formula (4), R 4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents an optionally substituted diarylamino group, or an optionally substituted alkylarylamino group;
    In the general formula (5), d represents an integer of 0 to 2, and when d is 0 or 1, R 5 is an alkyl group that may have a substituent or an aryl that may have a substituent. And when d is 2, R 5 represents an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, a dialkylamino group which may have a substituent, or a substituent. A diarylamino group which may have a substituent, a substituent or an alkylarylamino group which may have a substituent;
    In general formula (6), R 6 and R 7 are each an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, an alkylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, An arylcarbonyl group which may have a substituent, an alkylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent, and an arylsulfonyl group which may have a substituent;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
    In general formula (X), R 11 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms;
    n1 represents an integer of 1 to 3; when n1 is 2 or 3, the plurality of R 11 may be the same or different;
    Y 1 represents —O—, —S—, —NR 13 —, —SO 2 —, or —C (═O) —. R 13 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
    R 12 represents a monovalent substituent.
    General formula (1-3)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
    In the general formula (1-3), R 3 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R 4 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 1 to 4; 1-4)
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
    In general formula (1-4), R ′ represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R ″ represents an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and n1 represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  8.  前記Z1~Z16のうち、1~4つが、カルボキシル基、エポキシ基、アリールエステル基、3級アルキルエステル基、下記式(1A)で表される基、下記式(2A)で表される基、アミノ基およびチオール基から選ばれる少なくとも1種の官能基を有する、請求項4~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
     式(1A)中、R1はフッ素原子を有するアルキル基を表す;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
     式(2A)中、R2およびR3は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基であり、R2およびR3が互いに結合して環を形成していても良い。
    1 to 4 of Z 1 to Z 16 are represented by a carboxyl group, an epoxy group, an aryl ester group, a tertiary alkyl ester group, a group represented by the following formula (1A), or a formula (2A) The colored curable composition according to any one of claims 4 to 7, which has at least one functional group selected from a group, an amino group, and a thiol group;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
    In formula (1A), R 1 represents an alkyl group having a fluorine atom;
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
    In formula (2A), R 2 and R 3 are each independently an alkyl group, and R 2 and R 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  9.  前記着色剤が、黄色色素をさらに含む、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
    The colored curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the colorant further contains a yellow pigment.
  10.  前記熱硬化性化合物が1分子内にエポキシ基を2つ以上有する、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
    The colored curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the thermosetting compound has two or more epoxy groups in one molecule.
  11.  前記着色剤の含有量の合計が、着色硬化性組成物の全固形分に対し60~90質量%である、請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
    The colored curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the total content of the colorant is 60 to 90% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored curable composition.
  12.  前記ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料が多量体である、請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物。
    The colored curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the halogenated phthalocyanine dye is a multimer.
  13.  請求項1~12のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物を硬化してなる硬化膜。
    A cured film obtained by curing the colored curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 12.
  14.  請求項1~12のいずれか1項に記載の着色硬化性組成物を用いた着色層を有するカラーフィルタ。
    A color filter having a colored layer using the colored curable composition according to any one of claims 1 to 12.
  15.  前記着色層の厚さが0.1~0.8μmである、請求項14に記載のカラーフィルタ。
    The color filter according to claim 14, wherein the colored layer has a thickness of 0.1 to 0.8 µm.
  16.  ハロゲン化フタロシアニン染料を含む着色剤、熱硬化性化合物、ラジカルトラップ剤、およびこれらを溶解する溶剤を含む着色硬化性組成物を硬化して着色層を形成する工程、
     前記着色層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程、
     露光および現像することにより前記フォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程、および
     前記レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして前記着色層をドライエッチングする工程、
     を含む、カラーフィルタの製造方法。
    A step of curing a colored curable composition containing a colorant containing a halogenated phthalocyanine dye, a thermosetting compound, a radical trapping agent, and a solvent for dissolving them, to form a colored layer;
    Forming a photoresist layer on the colored layer;
    Patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern; and dry etching the colored layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask;
    A method for producing a color filter, comprising:
  17.  請求項14または15に記載のカラーフィルタを有する液晶表示装置、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子または固体撮像素子。
    A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence element, or a solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to claim 14 or 15.
  18.  請求項16に記載のカラーフィルタの製造方法により製造されたカラーフィルタを有する液晶表示装置、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子または固体撮像素子。 A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence element, or a solid-state image sensor having a color filter manufactured by the method for manufacturing a color filter according to claim 16.
PCT/JP2014/064045 2013-07-01 2014-05-28 Colored curable composition, cured film using same, color filter, production method for color filter, solid state imaging element, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device WO2015001873A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020157032296A KR101780993B1 (en) 2013-07-01 2014-05-28 Colored curable composition, cured film using same, color filter, production method for color filter, solid state imaging element, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013-137991 2013-07-01
JP2013137991 2013-07-01
JP2014-103282 2014-05-19
JP2014103282A JP6147224B2 (en) 2013-07-01 2014-05-19 Colored curable composition, cured film using the same, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015001873A1 true WO2015001873A1 (en) 2015-01-08

Family

ID=52143465

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/064045 WO2015001873A1 (en) 2013-07-01 2014-05-28 Colored curable composition, cured film using same, color filter, production method for color filter, solid state imaging element, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6147224B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101780993B1 (en)
TW (1) TW201502211A (en)
WO (1) WO2015001873A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113078189A (en) * 2021-03-22 2021-07-06 武汉天马微电子有限公司 Display panel and display device

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101837563B1 (en) 2015-06-23 2018-03-12 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Novel compound, photosensitive resin composition comprising the same, and color filter
JP6625130B2 (en) * 2015-09-04 2019-12-25 富士フイルム株式会社 Materials, compositions, curable compositions, cured films, optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, infrared sensors, camera modules, and methods of manufacturing materials
JPWO2017208771A1 (en) * 2016-05-31 2019-03-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Composition, cured film, color filter, light shielding film, solid-state imaging device and image display device
JPWO2018163702A1 (en) * 2017-03-07 2019-12-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Laminate, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, infrared sensor and kit
CN113966374B (en) * 2020-02-20 2023-05-02 株式会社Lg化学 Adhesive composition, adhesive film, adhesive filter, and display device

Citations (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10160921A (en) * 1996-12-03 1998-06-19 Nippon Shokubai Co Ltd Colored photosensitive resin composition for color filter
JPH10171118A (en) * 1996-12-06 1998-06-26 Nippon Shokubai Co Ltd Production of color filter
JP2004339375A (en) * 2003-05-16 2004-12-02 Umeda Jimusho:Kk Light stabilizer for water-based resin and light-resistant water-based resin composition using the same
JP2008050599A (en) * 2006-07-28 2008-03-06 Nippon Shokubai Co Ltd Phthalocyanine compound
JP2009031723A (en) * 2007-02-14 2009-02-12 Fujifilm Corp Color filter and method of manufacturing the same, and solid-state imaging apparatus
JP2009051896A (en) * 2007-08-24 2009-03-12 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Colored curable composition
WO2009104339A1 (en) * 2008-02-20 2009-08-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Color filter, method for producing the same, and solid-state imaging device
JP2010077273A (en) * 2008-09-25 2010-04-08 Fujifilm Corp Composition for use in formation of transparent film, transparent film, transparent film substrate for use in color filter, and solid-state image pick-up element
WO2011010461A1 (en) * 2009-07-21 2011-01-27 太陽ホールディングス株式会社 Photocurable resin composition
JP2011075923A (en) * 2009-09-30 2011-04-14 Taiyo Holdings Co Ltd Photocurable resin composition, dry film and cured product of the same, and printed wiring board using those
JP2012012476A (en) * 2010-06-30 2012-01-19 Sumitomo Seika Chem Co Ltd Stabilizer for synthetic resin, synthetic resin composition containing the stabilizer, and resin member
JP2012181512A (en) * 2011-02-10 2012-09-20 Fujifilm Corp Colored curable composition and color filter
WO2013054868A1 (en) * 2011-10-12 2013-04-18 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Resin composition, coating film, and insulating film for touch panel
JP2013080022A (en) * 2011-09-30 2013-05-02 Taiyo Ink Mfg Ltd Photosensitive resin composition, cured film thereof and printed circuit board
JP2013080258A (en) * 2013-01-08 2013-05-02 Taiyo Holdings Co Ltd Photocurable/thermosetting resin composition, dry film thereof and cured substance therefrom, and printed circuit board using the same
JP2013095839A (en) * 2011-10-31 2013-05-20 Taiyo Ink Mfg Ltd Thermosetting resin composition, cured product thereof, and printed wiring board using the same

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4963951B2 (en) 2006-05-24 2012-06-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Green photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive resin transfer material, color filter, and display device
JP2011107429A (en) 2009-11-18 2011-06-02 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Photosensitive colored composition for color filter, color filter and liquid crystal display
JP2011107430A (en) 2009-11-18 2011-06-02 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Photosensitive colored composition for color filter, color filter and liquid crystal display
JP5623886B2 (en) 2009-12-09 2014-11-12 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored photosensitive composition, method for producing color filter, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
JP2011191483A (en) 2010-03-15 2011-09-29 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Green photosensitive colored composition and color filter using the same, as well as liquid crystal display device with the same
JP5657452B2 (en) 2010-05-07 2015-01-21 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored photosensitive composition, method for producing color filter, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
JP5672781B2 (en) 2010-06-09 2015-02-18 凸版印刷株式会社 Color filter and liquid crystal display device

Patent Citations (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10160921A (en) * 1996-12-03 1998-06-19 Nippon Shokubai Co Ltd Colored photosensitive resin composition for color filter
JPH10171118A (en) * 1996-12-06 1998-06-26 Nippon Shokubai Co Ltd Production of color filter
JP2004339375A (en) * 2003-05-16 2004-12-02 Umeda Jimusho:Kk Light stabilizer for water-based resin and light-resistant water-based resin composition using the same
JP2008050599A (en) * 2006-07-28 2008-03-06 Nippon Shokubai Co Ltd Phthalocyanine compound
JP2009031723A (en) * 2007-02-14 2009-02-12 Fujifilm Corp Color filter and method of manufacturing the same, and solid-state imaging apparatus
JP2009051896A (en) * 2007-08-24 2009-03-12 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Colored curable composition
WO2009104339A1 (en) * 2008-02-20 2009-08-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Color filter, method for producing the same, and solid-state imaging device
JP2010077273A (en) * 2008-09-25 2010-04-08 Fujifilm Corp Composition for use in formation of transparent film, transparent film, transparent film substrate for use in color filter, and solid-state image pick-up element
WO2011010461A1 (en) * 2009-07-21 2011-01-27 太陽ホールディングス株式会社 Photocurable resin composition
JP2011075923A (en) * 2009-09-30 2011-04-14 Taiyo Holdings Co Ltd Photocurable resin composition, dry film and cured product of the same, and printed wiring board using those
JP2012012476A (en) * 2010-06-30 2012-01-19 Sumitomo Seika Chem Co Ltd Stabilizer for synthetic resin, synthetic resin composition containing the stabilizer, and resin member
JP2012181512A (en) * 2011-02-10 2012-09-20 Fujifilm Corp Colored curable composition and color filter
JP2013080022A (en) * 2011-09-30 2013-05-02 Taiyo Ink Mfg Ltd Photosensitive resin composition, cured film thereof and printed circuit board
WO2013054868A1 (en) * 2011-10-12 2013-04-18 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Resin composition, coating film, and insulating film for touch panel
JP2013095839A (en) * 2011-10-31 2013-05-20 Taiyo Ink Mfg Ltd Thermosetting resin composition, cured product thereof, and printed wiring board using the same
JP2013080258A (en) * 2013-01-08 2013-05-02 Taiyo Holdings Co Ltd Photocurable/thermosetting resin composition, dry film thereof and cured substance therefrom, and printed circuit board using the same

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113078189A (en) * 2021-03-22 2021-07-06 武汉天马微电子有限公司 Display panel and display device
CN113078189B (en) * 2021-03-22 2022-08-26 武汉天马微电子有限公司 Display panel and display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP6147224B2 (en) 2017-06-14
JP2015028602A (en) 2015-02-12
KR20150143653A (en) 2015-12-23
KR101780993B1 (en) 2017-09-25
TW201502211A (en) 2015-01-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6205193B2 (en) Colored curable composition and color filter using the same
JP6088794B2 (en) Laminated body and color filter having the same
JP6043645B2 (en) Curable composition and color filter
JP6162165B2 (en) Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, image display device, organic electroluminescence device, pigment and method for producing pigment
KR101808130B1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, pattern formation method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP6205289B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR101920742B1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP6147224B2 (en) Colored curable composition, cured film using the same, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device
KR101851547B1 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, pattern forming method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
JP6279745B2 (en) COLORING COMPOSITION, COLOR FILTER, PATTERN FORMING METHOD, COLOR FILTER MANUFACTURING METHOD, SOLID-STATE IMAGING DEVICE, IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE, AND DYE MULTIMER MANUFACTURING METHOD
KR20170008785A (en) Pigment dispersion, process for producing pigment dispersion, colored composition, cured film, color filter, process for producing color filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and composition
JP6106784B2 (en) Colored curable composition and color filter using the same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14820618

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20157032296

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14820618

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1